JP2017086113A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interests.SOLUTION: As a dynamic display period in dynamic display of second identification information which is executed by second dynamic display execution means, one dynamic display period is selected out of a plurality of periods by period selection means. On the basis of the fact that a first game state is set by game state setting means, a first selection state in which the ratio at which a second dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means is low is set by the first setting means. When the first selection state is set by the second setting means, on the basis of the fact that a first determination result by the first determination means is a special determination result different from a specific determination result, a second selection state in which the ratio at which the period setting means selects the second dynamic display period is higher than the first selection state is set by the second setting means. Thereby, player's interests in the game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, one of a normal state in which the winning state is drawn with a normal probability and a probability fluctuation state in which the winning state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state, triggered by the end of the winning state Some are set to.

JP 2006-000392 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the normal state is set at the end of the hit state, the disadvantageous state in which the win state is drawn with a lottery probability lower than the probability variation state is at least the next hit state Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the normal state.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 performs a first determination unit that executes a first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and a second determination based on the establishment of the second condition. Based on the second determination means to be executed, the first determination by the first determination means, or the second determination by the second determination means, a specific determination result is obtained, which is advantageous to the player Among a plurality of game states including a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, a first game state based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state A game state setting means for setting one game state, a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a first result indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means on the display means. First dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying one identification information; The second dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination by the second determining means on the display means, and the second dynamic display executing means. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information, at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period having a different degree of advantage for the player than the first dynamic display period A period selecting means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods, and the period selecting means by the period selecting means based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A first setting means for setting a first selection state in which a ratio for selecting a second dynamic display period is lower than a ratio for selecting the first dynamic display period; and the first selection state is determined by the first setting means. If set The ratio by which the period setting unit selects the second dynamic display period based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit being a special determination result different from the specific determination result Comprises a second setting means capable of setting a second selection state that is higher than the first selection state.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display executing means is selected from a plurality of periods. The selection means includes a selection means, and the selection means has the same ratio of selecting each of the plurality of periods in the first selection state and the second selection state.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.

  A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein as the type of the special game executed by the special game execution means, a first special game and the first special game are provided. There is provided a type selection means for selecting one of the types of the privilege game from a plurality of types including at least a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the game, and the type selection means is configured to perform the first determination. In comparison, when the second determination results in the specific determination result, the ratio of selecting the second privilege game is high, and the second dynamic display period is the first dynamic display period. It is shorter than the display period.

  The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising timing means for timing timekeeping information, wherein the second setting means has timing information counted by the timing means. In a predetermined range, when the determination result of the first determination becomes the special determination result, the ratio of setting the second selection state is higher than outside the predetermined range.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit is displayed on the display unit configured to display the identification information by the first dynamic display execution unit. The second identification information that is dynamically displayed and indicates the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display execution means. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, the first dynamic display period and the first dynamic display period are advantageous to the player. One dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least different second dynamic display periods. Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the first selection state in which the ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means is lower than the ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period Is set by the first setting means. When the first selection state is set by the first setting means, the period setting is based on the fact that the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. The second selection state is set by the second setting unit so that the ratio of the means to select the second dynamic display period is higher than the first selection state.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is selected from the plurality of periods by the selection means. In the first selection state and the second selection state, each of the plurality of periods is selected by the selection means at the same rate.

  Accordingly, when the special lottery result is obtained by the first determination, the advantage degree when the second determination is executed is changed without changing the advantage degree when the first determination is executed. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the first gaming state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.

  As a result, in the first gaming state, the game can be performed in the hope that a special determination result will be obtained by the first determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the first gaming state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. One type is selected by means. Compared to the first determination, when the second determination results in a specific determination, the type selection means selects the second privilege game at a higher rate. The second dynamic display period is configured with a period shorter than the first dynamic display period.

  Accordingly, when the second selection state is set by obtaining a special determination result by the first determination, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second determination is shortened. It is possible to shorten the execution interval of the determination. Therefore, since it becomes easy to perform the 2nd discrimination | determination which is easy to select an advantageous 2nd privilege game when it becomes a specific discrimination | determination result, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, the following effect is achieved. That is, time information is timed by the time measuring means. The ratio at which the second selection state is set by the second setting means when the timekeeping information timed by the timekeeping means is within a predetermined range and the determination result of the first determination is a special determination result rather than out of the predetermined range Is configured to be high.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the advantageous degree of a 1st game state can be varied according to the time information which time-measurement means time-measures.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus of La-La cross section, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a top view of a variable winning apparatus. (A)-(b) is a partial rear view of a variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the operation | movement of a flow-path solenoid and operation | movement of an opening-and-closing plate in 1 round of big hits. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of reach production, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents of special super reach production which is one mode of reach production. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of rushing into chance mode A, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of completion | finish of chance mode A. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the 1st random number counter C1 in 1st Embodiment, and the jackpot judgment value in a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 in 1st Embodiment and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the winning in the normal symbol, and (b) is a small hitting type counter in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of C5 and the small hit type in a special symbol. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for consecutive resorts / chance B in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the content of the table for chance A in 1st Embodiment typically. It is the shown schematic diagram. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the game state update process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the chance mode setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation monitoring process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud monitoring process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is for normal (when there is special figure 2 holding) in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for consecutive resorts / chance B (second half) in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is the chance in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for A (second half). It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the selection process at the time of chance A performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is the main control in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal time selection process performed by MPU in an apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the selection process at the time of extended resorts performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 2nd Embodiment. is there. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the game state update process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process 3 which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the 1st per-random number counter C1 in 3rd Embodiment, and the jackpot judgment value in a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st winning type counter C2 in 3rd Embodiment and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the small hit classification counter C5 in 3rd Embodiment and the small hit determination value in a special symbol, (b) is a fluctuation pattern in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the scenario table typically. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 4 which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 3rd execution form. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a front view of the distribution unit in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a response | compatibility with the 1st hit type counter C2 in 4th Embodiment, and the jackpot type in a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd per random number counter C4 in 4th Embodiment and the hit in a normal symbol. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation | variation pattern table in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability change provision in 4th Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 4th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fall lottery table in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. . It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of transition of the game state after the jackpot end in 4th Embodiment, and the fluctuation pattern table referred. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation start process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, entrance holes 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a start port or the like is disposed, Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball enters the normal entrance. When passing 67, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are 6 types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”. After the special game state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to the results of the jackpot game Value (game value) is given to the player. Note that the four types of “hits A to D” are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is performed in the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of jackpots E and F are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is executed in response to a ball entering the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as “the first special symbol lottery”, and the ball is the second entrance. The lottery executed when the ball enters the mouth 640 is referred to as a “second special symbol lottery”.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric ball 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.9 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 Opened. In addition, at the normal time, since the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, when the normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  When the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and the lottery result is shown after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Normal symbols are stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are six types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”. When the “big hit A” and the “big hit E” are reached, a special game state (16 rounds big hit) with 16 rounds is set. On the other hand, when “Big Bonus B” and “Big Bonus C” are reached, the number of rounds is 12 special rounds (12 rounds of big jackpot), and when “Big Bonus D” and “Big Bonus F” are both rounds. Becomes a special game state of 4 rounds (4 rounds jackpot). Further, when a specific condition is satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes a V winning switch 65e3 described later), the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during special symbol change) after the jackpot ends. When a high probability state of a special symbol is given, the high probability state of the special symbol continues from the end of the jackpot until the variation of the special symbol is completed 100 times (until the 101st variation is started). . Although details will be described later, the jackpots A and B and the jackpots E and F are configured so that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, the jackpots C and D are configured such that the ball does not easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Therefore, in the second special symbol in which either the big hit E or F (that is, the big hit that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3) is determined rather than the lottery of the first special symbol in which the big win C and D can be determined. The lottery is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, after the jackpots other than “Big Jack D” are completed, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends, and the second special symbol changes. Time is shortened. The state where the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased continues after the jackpot is finished until the variation of the special symbol is completed 100 times (until the 101st variation is started). Thereby, since it becomes easy to enter a ball into the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to perform the lottery of the 2nd special symbol advantageous for a player. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player. In the normal state of the normal symbol, basically, the variation time (10 minutes) of the second special symbol is extremely longer than the variation time (7 seconds to 90 seconds) of the first special symbol. For this reason, when the game is played aiming at the second entrance 640 in the normal state of the normal symbol, the game efficiency is remarkably lowered, so that the game can be played aiming at the first entrance 64.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called “high probability state of a special symbol” (special symbol probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). Also, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol high probability state) means that the normal symbol hit probability is increased and the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. An easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (ordinary symbol low probability state), which is a normal symbol hit probability normal state, that is, shorter than the short-time state Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probability change period. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot varies according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. Further, instead of changing the period of time when the “normal symbol is in a short time state”, the electric accessory is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or at the time of one ordinary symbol. The number of times may be changed. In the present embodiment, if the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” is maintained from the end of the jackpot until the variation of the special symbol ends 100 times. The probability variation period of the special symbol is not limited to 100 times and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. Thereafter, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game shifts from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol time-short state”. In this case, the set “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued after the jackpot ends until the special symbol variation display is completed 100 times. If the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the 100 special symbol lottery after the special symbol jackpot, the game returns to the “normal state of normal symbols”. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously executing a variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and a variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol (using the simultaneous variable method). ) For this reason, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the other special symbol may be executed in a state where the variation display of the 100th special symbol in the time reduction state is being executed, and the variation display may be started. In this case, the time reduction state is configured to end when the 101st special symbol lottery condition is satisfied after the time reduction state is set. Thereby, when a relatively long variation time (for example, 90 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the 100th variation display, the short variation time is continuously selected in the other special symbol lottery, It is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the number of time reductions substantially increases.

  If a new jackpot type other than jackpot D is continued while “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, then “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased to 100 special symbols after the end of the new jackpot. It continues until the variable display is finished.

  The same applies to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Of the 100 probability variation states, when the lottery condition for the 101st special symbol is satisfied during the execution of the variable display based on the lottery of the 100th special symbol. At that time, the probability variation state is terminated, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set. Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that the lottery of the 101st special symbol will become a high probability.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in a part when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the specific winning opening 65a is won for a predetermined time (for example, until 3 seconds elapses or 10 balls are awarded). There is a small hit to be opened. The game state is not changed because this small hit is a type of loss, but the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) after the small hit is completed. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display accompanying the lottery is shortened (to 3 seconds). As described above, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes very long (600 seconds), so if the ball is continuously launched aiming at the second entrance 640, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated. , Disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, by shortening the variation time over a predetermined number of fluctuation displays after the small hit is completed, the second special is achieved by launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 during the predetermined number of times. The symbol lottery can be easily executed. That is, the player is in an advantageous state for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) that is the gaming state in which the game stays for the longest time, the game can be performed with the expectation that it will be a small hit. In addition, since it is possible to shift to an advantageous state without going through a jackpot, the game in the normal state can be sharpened. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In the following description, a state where the lottery of the second special symbol set a predetermined number of times after the small hit is easy to be executed is referred to as “chance mode A”. On the other hand, among the states in which the “chance mode A” is not set, the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol are “normal mode”, the low probability state of the special symbol, and The normal symbol time-short state is referred to as “chance mode B”, the special symbol high-probability state, and the normal symbol time-short state is referred to as “rengo mode”.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball that has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are being hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (special symbols corresponding to the jackpots A to D) (First symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 8-10, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 11) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . If there are a plurality of holding balls, a lottery is executed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not yet been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image. In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with different types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) that are likely to be selected in accordance with the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery is easily executed in the current gaming state. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to be executed in the current gaming state is executed is displayed.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display region Dm are displayed for the small right region Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and When a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the number of times of entering the ball is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is It is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol (second symbol) displayed in the lower half The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the reach effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9A shows an example of reach production. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the main symbol with the same number on the effective line L1 of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed. When it is in the state, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the reach state (the chance that the main symbols with the same numbers are aligned on the active line L1) has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as a mode of variation production in which reach production occurs, normal reach with a short variation time and a low expectation level where the same main symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (which is a big hit) and a long variation time. In addition, a super-reach with a high expectation degree in which the same main symbols are aligned (a big hit) is provided on the effective line L1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9B, a display mode of special super reach in the present embodiment will be described. This special super reach is an aspect in the above-described super reach, and can be selected only when a lottery result of a special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. Specifically, the most unfavorable jackpot type (a jackpot D in which the number of rounds is four and the ball is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 and no short-time state is given) or the most advantageous jackpot type (chance mode) This special super reach is selected only when A becomes the small hit C) set 100 times.

  FIG. 9B shows a display mode when the speed of the middle symbol row Z2 that is variably displayed becomes low after the special super reach is selected and the reach effect (see FIG. 9A) is executed. It is the figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the special super reach, the character of the boy character displayed in the small area Ds2 looks like a flame, and the character “Large Chance” appears in the small area Ds3. A speech bubble appears inside. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the current variation display is likely to indicate a lottery result advantageous to the player. In the special super reach, the symbols scrolled from top to bottom at a low speed in the middle symbol row Z2 are the symbols with the word “chance mode” and the symbols with the numbers to which the reach is applied. There are only two types. Here, the symbol with the “chance mode” means the transition to the chance mode A. When the symbol is stopped on the active line L1, it becomes a small hit C, and 100 times after the small hit ends. The chance mode A is set.

  Even if the jackpot is D, the number of winning balls is small, and neither the probability change state nor the short-time state is given after the jackpot, so the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, since the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed is set over a maximum of 100 variation displays after the small hit C is completed, 100 for the player. You can get almost the same profit as if you set a short period of time. Therefore, when special super reach is executed, a game can be performed in the hope that a small hit C will be achieved rather than a big hit D.

  In a general pachinko machine, when a variation display is executed, a game is played in the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers are aligned (that is, a big win). In the machine 10, when the special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numerals are not arranged. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which a game can be played in the expectation that the degree of advantage will be off (small hit C) rather than the big hit (small hit D) with a low degree of advantage.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram showing the display contents when the symbol with the word “chance mode” is stopped and displayed on the active line L1. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the symbol indicating the transition to the chance mode A (the symbol with the word “chance mode”) is stopped and displayed, “chance mode GET !! "Appears in the small area Ds3. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the mode has shifted to the chance mode. Further, it is possible to make the player easily understand that a right strike (a game method in which a ball is launched on the right path of the game board 13 and aims at the second entrance 640) should be performed. In addition, a display area having a substantially rectangular shape with the characters “100 remaining times” is displayed at the lower left of the small area Ds3. This display area indicates the remaining number of lotteries in chance mode A, and the number of times displayed is decremented by one each time a change is started. This display area allows the player to easily understand the remaining number of lotteries in chance mode A.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram showing display contents at the time when the number of lotteries set as the chance mode A is completed. As shown in FIG. 10B, when the chance mode A is completed, a balloon with a letter “End of the chance mode ... please return to the left!” Is displayed in the small area Ds3. . Thus, the player is informed that the chance mode A has ended and that the player should make a left strike (a game method in which a ball is launched in the path on the left side of the game board 13 to aim at the first entrance 64). Can be easily understood.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, the symbol “O” as the symbol “2” and the symbol “×” are displayed. Fluctuation display in which symbols are alternately turned on is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is only for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is limited to 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. It becomes easy to enter the first entrance 64 when a ball is launched into the left path of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed). Further, although the rate of entering the ball is lower than that of making a left-hand hit, the ball is also shot when the ball is launched to the path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called right-hand hit). May enter the ball.

  A second entrance 640 into which a sphere can enter is disposed on the lower right side in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side, and when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, It becomes easy to enter the ball. Therefore, in order to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it is basically sufficient to make a right turn. Although the rate of entering the ball is lower than that of the right-hand hit, it is possible to enter the second entrance 640 even when the left-handed ball flows down to the right side of the first entrance 64. There is sex.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed in the upper right of the second entrance 640 in front view, and a horizontally long specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed in the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed so as to become a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). That is, the opening / closing plate 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. Also, the special winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 0.5 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won) even when the special symbol lottery is a small hit.

  In addition, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which a sphere can pass are provided inside the variable winning device 65. The game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 65 flow down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The special discharge channel 65e2 is provided with a V winning switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a sphere. The special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass only in the first round of the big hit. In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, a ball | bowl can enter into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of jackpot (the opening-and-closing plate 65f1 is opened), and a ball | bowl is a special discharge passage. The period during which 65e2 can flow down is configured to vary depending on the jackpot type.

  More specifically, as the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of jackpot, the opening time is relatively short, and it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1. Either the opening / closing operation (opening / closing pattern) or the opening / closing operation (opening / closing pattern) that allows the ball to easily enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is relatively long. The jackpot type is set according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 7). During the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can flow down through the special discharge channel 65e2, so pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the big hit. A game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game that is a big hit from becoming monotonous.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 4-6, the structure of this variable prize-winning apparatus 65 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65 b that protrudes from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65 b, so that the variable winning device 65 is A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The LED board 65d that is disposed, the back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d are provided. The open / close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e, and the flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, and a back surface that is disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, and covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close plate 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and a ball is not It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter) In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing plate 65f1, and the upper part of the opening / closing door is configured to allow the game ball to roll. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With such a configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second entrance 640 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 while keeping the right hit state even during the short-time game (including during the probability change game), and the game method to the left strike immediately after the big hit game It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Fig.5 (a) is La-La sectional drawing shown in FIG.5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the V winning switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is discharged.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state after the big hit game is a high probability gaming state (by passing the V winning switch 65e3 described above during the big hit game, Probability game state) is set. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability change gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning slot 65a during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 0.2 seconds at the shortest. Yes. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h is operated for 3 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started, and the special discharge flow continues to the V winning switch 65e3. The path 65e2 is allowed to pass.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V winning switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected early.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, 15 for one ball prize). Award balls). Further, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the V winning switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change gaming state can also be executed. it can. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of jackpot is made variable according to the jackpot type, thereby making it easy to flow the sphere down the specific discharge flow path 65e2. Yes. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (patterns that are difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a and patterns that are easy to enter) are provided as the opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing plate 65f1.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically illustrating a change in time of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and a change in time of the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a for each jackpot type. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the off state before one big hit round is started. That is, before the start of one round, the sphere can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This off state continues until one round starts. When the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state for 3 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A). When the three-second on-state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off-state again, and thereafter the off-state is maintained until the jackpot ends.

  Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, when either of the big hits C or D is reached, when one round starts, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, a ball can enter the variable winning device 65. This open state continues only for 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, one round is completed, and the closed state is maintained until two rounds are started after an interval period of 5 seconds. In addition, one round in this embodiment is complete | finished when three balls pass after ten balls enter into the specific winning opening 65a or one round is started. Since it is very difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a in 0.2 seconds, in most cases where the jackpot C, D, the ball flows down to the special discharge channel 65e2. The jackpot ends without being able to. In other words, since the ball cannot pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the special symbol probability change state is not given after the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot is C or D, the gaming state after the jackpot is disadvantageous for the player as compared to other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, if the ball can be entered into the special winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds when the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened, it is possible to shift to a special symbol probable state after the end of the jackpot. Can do. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is either jackpot C or D, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the probability variation state will be set after the jackpot ends.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when the jackpot is A, B, E, or F, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of jackpot is started. That is, the period during which the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on coincides with the period during which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set in the open state. Therefore, the V winning switch 65e3 can be easily passed by allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during a relatively long open period. Therefore, when the jackpot is A, B, E, or F, the ball can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so even the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to a certain symbol probable state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of shifting to the probable change state varies depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, a game can be performed in anticipation that an opening / closing pattern that is easy to shift to a probability change state is set.

  In the present embodiment, the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 and the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k, which are set when the jackpot is A, B, E, F, are made to coincide with each other. It is not a thing. For example, the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k may be configured to be longer by a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). With this configuration, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the opening / closing period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is allowed to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the probability variation state is not given even though the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any prize opening is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set initial values for the first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type counter C3 used for selecting the stop-type, the variation-type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern, and the first per-random-number counter C1. A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 46). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning for the first entrance 64 and the winning for the second entrance 640. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b to be stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of 4 reserved balls, and a total of up to 8 reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, each counter value is set to the first counter value. When a special ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and a game ball wins the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to an execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display) are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Various settings and control processes are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, or during the period when the special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the first entrance 64. Alternatively, when winning at the second entrance 640, if the number of reserves for the winning entrance (starting entrance) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. And stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning entrance. In addition, when the number of reserves for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and 5 winning balls (in this embodiment) Only the prize ball is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is not limited to this, and is less than 4 (for example, 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined in the big hit random number table (see FIG. 13B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot stipulated in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is “0” in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of “1 to 4”. If it is in the range of “1 to 4”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Furthermore, regardless of the gaming state, in the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of “295 to 299”, and the range of “295 to 299”. If it is within, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b must be a random number that is a small hit. That is, if the random number is a special symbol small hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol small hit.

  On the other hand, a random number in which the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is a big hit of the special symbol. If so, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “0” is the first random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, since the total number of random numbers that is 300 is the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability that the special symbol is a jackpot is “1/300”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first per-random number counter C1, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random numbers “1-4” are the first per-random number table as described above. 202a. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 4 among the total number of random number values of 300, the probability that a special symbol jackpot will be “1/75”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13C). The Rukoto. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this embodiment, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, it is different from the symbol that has reached reach as the final stop symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected: “reach out” (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and “complete out” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in the probable state of special symbols, since a big hit is likely to occur, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide as 0 to 89 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. The table is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected, and “reach out” is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that “reach out” is difficult to select. Also, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. The table for the low probability is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out”, and the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “out of reach” is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done.

  Further, the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14B). ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 46) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15B and 16). In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables dedicated to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, respectively, and a variation pattern table is set for each of the determination results. Yes. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the ball has passed through the right or left normal starting port (through gate) 67. Is detected and stored in the ordinary drawing execution area of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the second random number table 202c, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are 199 random number values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-203”. . Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, since the total number of random number values that can be hit is 199, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “199/240”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”. . In this way, in this embodiment, since the random number value that is a normal symbol hit is only one difference between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability is almost equal. Yes. Also, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol is hit are the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second entrance 640 is the same in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is larger than the variation time in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol. Become extremely long. As a result, in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), the lottery of the second special symbol is less likely to be executed than the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol, so the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol In this case, it is possible to cause the player to play a game aiming at the first entrance 64.

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 3 seconds. Then, in the normal symbol low probability state, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 203”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened “0.9 seconds × one time”. On the other hand, if the obtained value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204” in the high probability state of the normal symbol, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened “for one second × one time”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the gameability is not impaired.

  The normal variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol variation pattern is selected based on the value of the general variation variation counter CS2. Specifically, a variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds is selected in the range of the normal variation type counter CS2 in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range).

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 46), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 45) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the first hit random number table 202a and the second hit random number table 202c already described above. It has been.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13C) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2 is performed. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (c), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 9” is defined in association with “big hit A”. . This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Among the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “big hit A” is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (in FIG. Since the lower reference) is set, the probability variation state is easily given after the big hit. For this reason, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player.

  Further, “big hit B” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 49”. This “big hit B” is a big hit with 12 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 40 counter values that become “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although this “big hit B” has fewer rounds than “big hit A”, as with “big hit A”, the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a that can pass (easily) the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit Since the pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set, the probability variation state is easily given after the big hit. For this reason, it is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous to the player, although it is inferior to “jackpot A” (and “jackpot E” described later).

  In addition, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 69”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. This “big hit C” is a big hit with 12 rounds, similar to “big hit B”. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 20 counter values that are “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 20% (20/100). The “big hit C” has a smaller number of rounds than the “big hit A”, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that makes it difficult to pass the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (see the middle row in FIG. 7) is set. Therefore, it is difficult to give a probable change state after a big hit (a short time state (chance mode B) of a normal symbol is likely to be set after a big win). For this reason, it becomes a disadvantageous jackpot type as compared to “big hit A” and “big hit B” in which a probability variation state (long-run mode) is easily set.

  Further, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “70 to 99” is defined in association with “big hit D”. This “big hit D” is a big hit with four rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 counter values that become “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 30% (30/100). This “big hit D” has the smallest number of rounds among the six big hit types, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (see the middle of FIG. 7) ) Is set, it is difficult to give a probable change state after a big hit (a short time state (chance mode B) of a normal symbol is likely to be set after a big win). For this reason, it becomes the most unfavorable jackpot type among all jackpot types.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a range of “0 to 69” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit E”. This “big hit E” is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 70 counter values that are “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol The ratio is 70% (70/100). This “big hit E” has the largest number of rounds among the six types of big hit types, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that can pass (easily) the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (FIG. 7). Therefore, the probability variation state is likely to be given after the big hit. For this reason, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player, similar to “Big Jack A”.

  Further, for the second special symbol, a range of “70 to 99” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit F”. This “big hit F” is a big hit with four rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 counter values that will be “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 30% (30/100). This “big hit F” has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of big hit types, but the open / close pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (as shown in FIG. 7) that can pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (easy). Therefore, the probability variation state is likely to be given after the big hit. For this reason, although it is disadvantageous in the award sphere, it is easy to become the next big hit with a relatively small number of lotteries, and is advantageous compared to “big hit C” or “big hit D”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol is a lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning port 65a that can pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 50% (easy) is set. When the big win type (big hit A, B) is determined, but when the big special is drawn in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 100% (easy). The jackpot type (jackpot E, F) for which the opening / closing pattern of the winning opening 65a is set is determined. Therefore, once the consecutive-villa mode (special symbol probability change state and normal symbol short-time state) is set, the second special symbol lottery is made by winning to the second entrance 640 by right-handed. The state where it is easy to execute and the jackpot are easily repeated. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the consecutive resort mode. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the normal mode (special symbol low probability state and normal symbol normal state), the probability of winning a big symbol in the special symbol lottery is low, and basically the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed. , I will aim for a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol. However, even if the first special symbol wins, the open / close pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) that can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is set only at a rate of 50%. Even if it is not a big hit or a big win, the normal mode that is disadvantageous for the player will continue for a long time because the open / close pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 (see the middle part of FIG. 7) continues to be set. There is a case. If the disadvantageous state continues for a long time, the player may lose motivation for the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the normal mode, when the first special symbol lottery results in a specific lottery result (small hit), chance mode A in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed temporarily. It is configured to be able to migrate to. With this configuration, if the big win is obtained by executing the lottery of the second special symbol while the chance mode A is set, the V winning switch 65e3 can be passed (easily) at a rate of 100%. Since the jackpot type (jackpot E, F) for which the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a is set is determined, it is possible to increase the player's motivation for the game when the chance mode A is set. In addition, the game in the normal mode can be performed in the hope that not only the jackpot but also the chance mode A is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14B, details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described. This small hitting type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of small hitting when the first special symbol lottery is won. In the small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, “small hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 39”. This “small hit A” is a small hit type in which the chance mode A is set over 10 special symbol lotteries after the small hit ends. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there are 40 random number values that are “small hitting A”, so when the special symbol lottery is won, “small hitting A” is obtained. The ratio is 40% (40/100).

  Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “40 to 79”, “small hit B” is defined in association with it. This “small hit B” is a small hit type in which the chance mode A is set over 20 special symbol lotteries after the small hit ends. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 40 random number values that are “small hit B”, so when the special symbol lottery is won, “small hit B” is obtained. The ratio is 40% (40/100).

  Furthermore, “small hit C” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “80 to 99”. This “small hit C” is a small hit type in which the chance mode A is set over 100 special symbol lotteries after the small hit ends. Of the 100 random number values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 20 random number values that become “small hit C”, so when the special symbol lottery is won, it becomes “small hit C”. The ratio is 20% (20/100).

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which transfers to the chance mode A more advantageous than a normal mode with a small hit as an opportunity. When the chance mode A is entered, the second special symbol variation time is short (3 seconds), which is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery (when the jackpot is reached, the second special mode is easy to set) Since it is easy to execute the lottery, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that the player will win a big hit. In addition, in the normal mode, since it is possible to shift to the chance mode A without going through the jackpot, even if the player has not won the jackpot for a long period of time, the game can be inflected. Therefore, even if a so-called big hook has occurred, motivation for the player's game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. Furthermore, the length of the chance mode A to be given (number of lotteries) is different for each small hit type. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has detected that the game has been won to play a game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a type of a small game set for a longer period. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. As described above, the variation pattern table 202d defines a random value for determining a variation pattern (variation time) for variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the normal mode, a extended mode (probable change state), and a chance mode B (short time). At least) includes a resort / chance B table 202d2 for determining the variation pattern in the state) and a chance A table 202d3 for determining the variation pattern in the chance mode A.

  First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 15B, the normal table 202d1 includes a random number (variation type counter value) for determining a variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type. CS1 counter value) is defined.

  Specifically, when the first special symbol is drawn out and it is determined that the complete stoppage is determined as the stop type, the change of the change type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 98” and the fluctuation is short (7 seconds). Patterns are associated with each other, and a fluctuation pattern of extraordinary (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “99 to 198”. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is missed and the leaching reach is determined as the stop type, various values of the normal reach (30 seconds) in the range of “0 to 198” (that is, all ranges) as the value of the variation type counter CS1. Are associated. Also, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, which is a type of losing, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198” (that is, the entire range), with various super reach (60 seconds). ) Are associated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a lottery, the normal type (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0-50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the range of “51-179” Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with "180 to 198". That is, 60 seconds is selected as the variation time of the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol only in the case of a small hit or a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the player enters the chance mode A or becomes a big hit when it develops into super reach. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security during the fluctuating time after recognizing that it has been reversed to super reach. Also, since the special reach with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds can be selected only in the case of a jackpot, when the fluctuation time exceeds 60 seconds (development into a special reach), the lottery result of this first special symbol will be It is possible to make the player recognize that it was a big hit. Therefore, the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal mode, the super long variation (600 seconds) is applied to the values of all the variation type counters CS1 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is associated. Thus, in the normal mode, when a game is played aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed in order to execute an advantageous lottery of the second special symbol, at least once every 10 minutes (600 seconds) However, the special symbol lottery is not executed, and the game efficiency can be extremely low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player always makes a right turn in the normal mode. As described above, the present embodiment employs the simultaneous variation method (a method in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). Therefore, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the normal mode without being maliciously caused by a player's operation mistake or the like, and the 10-minute fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, it is left-handed. By aiming at the first entrance 64, the variation of the first special symbol can be executed during the variation of the second special symbol.

  Next, the details of the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 included in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 is a table used to determine a variation pattern in the extended holiday mode (probability change state) and the chance mode B (short time state).

  In this consecutive resort / chance B table 202d2, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same variation type counter CS1, the same variation pattern (variation time) Is configured to be determined. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery is lost and the complete type is determined as the stop type, a short deviation (7 seconds) is associated with the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of “0 to 190”. , “191 to 198” is associated with extra long (10 seconds). As described above, in the consecutive-village mode (probability change state) and chance mode B (short-time state), when the special symbol lottery is missed, and when the perfect stop is determined as the stop type, the ratio of being out of the normal mode. Is set to be high. Thereby, the game efficiency in the extended game mode and chance mode B which are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode can be improved.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery is lost and the reach type is determined to be out of reach, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is set to a range of “0 to 198” (that is, all ranges) and various types of normal reach (30 seconds). Are associated. Also, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, which is a type of losing, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198” (that is, the entire range), with various super reach (60 seconds). ) Are associated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a lottery, the normal type (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0-50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the range of “51-179” Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with "180 to 198".

  Thus, unlike the normal mode, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the extended-village mode (probability change state) and the chance mode B (short-time state) in which the extended-village / chance B table 202d2 is set. The variation time determined in (1) is equivalent to the lottery of the first special symbol. Thereby, the lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be efficiently performed by striking a ball aiming at the 2nd entrance 640 by right-handing. In other words, an advantageous state is obtained in which a probable variation state is easily provided when a big hit is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that it will be a big hit.

  Next, details of the chance A table 202d3 included in the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The chance A table 202d3 is a table used for determining a variation pattern in the chance mode A as described above.

  In the chance A table 202d3, the correspondence between the variation display variation time based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same as the normal table 202d1. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. On the other hand, the variation display variation time based on the lottery of the second special symbol is determined to be 3 seconds irrespective of the lottery result of the second special symbol. In other words, since the variation time is shorter than the variation display executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol, by making a right strike at the second entrance 640, the game efficiency is better than the left strike. Become. Therefore, since the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the chance mode A, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the specified period (the special symbol lottery is finished 10, 20, or 100 times after the end of the small hit. Is set). Since the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed in the normal mode, by shifting from the normal mode to the chance mode A through the jackpot, it is possible to make the player advantageous without going through the jackpot. . Therefore, in the normal mode, even if the player has not won a big hit for a long period of time (even if a so-called big hook has occurred), the motivation for the player's game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. it can. Furthermore, as described above, the length of the chance mode A to be given (number of lotteries) is different for each small hit type. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has detected that the game has been won to play a game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a type of a small game set for a longer period. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the chance mode A, a variation pattern of 3 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. It is not something that can be done. It may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. For example, if the lottery of the second special symbol is out of place, a variation pattern of 3 seconds is set uniformly, and if it is a win, the same variation pattern as that in the case of winning in the lottery of the first special symbol is selected. It is good also as a structure.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, Probability change valid flag 203o, probability change valid timer 203p, discharge number counter 203q, hour and middle counter 203r, hit flag 203s, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u, big hit medium flag 203v, small hit medium flag 203w ,chance Dokaunta 203x, abnormality monitoring flag 203Y, abnormality monitoring counter 203Aa, other and at least a memory area 203Z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reservation areas. Each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the 2nd entrance 640 is memorized in this 2nd special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding). 4th area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, which is the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area having the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S1304 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 29).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 29, FIG. 39). (See S1305). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of suspended balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the sound lamp control device 113 is affected by the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the variable display held at 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S1310 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see S903 in FIG. 35). Similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a change display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1505 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1503: No in FIG. 41). ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). In addition, as described above, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the normal symbol is in a short time state. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and that the normal symbol is in the short-time state (the extended game mode).

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 101 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2202 in FIG. 48). Further, in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) executed when starting the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S402 in FIG. 30). ). Further, the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38).

  The probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36). (See S502 in FIG. 31 and S1002 in FIG. 36). Specifically, when the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) are executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 based on the first random number table 202a for time, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol is selected based on the first random number table 202a for low probability. The lottery will be held.

  The probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a time-short state in the normal symbol variation process (S1408, S1414 in FIG. 40). Specifically, in the normal symbol variation process, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the hour / medium counter 203r are referred to. If any counter value is 1 or more, the second random number for high probability is used. If the normal symbol lottery is performed on the basis of the table 202c and the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / minute counter 203r are both 0, the normal symbol is drawn based on the second per random number table 202c for low probability. A lottery will be held. Further, in the normal symbol variation process, it is also referred to when determining the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit (see S1414 in FIG. 40).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability changing state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. Here, when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. The flag 203h may be officially set to ON and returned. In this case, whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 passes before the power is turned off can be determined based on whether or not a probability variation passing counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the V winning switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (one round in the present embodiment). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passing counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed (S2311 in FIG. 49). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S2411 in FIG. 50). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, one is added and updated (S2303 in FIG. 49). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharging number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S2411 in FIG. 50). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excited). In the present embodiment, when one round of big hit is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set on for 3 seconds (see FIG. 7). In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set when one round of jackpot is started. On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in the process of S2309 of the winning process (FIG. 49, S2113) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, a later ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is added and updated by 1 (see S2405 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time necessary for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is a game that won the variable winning device 65 when one preset round (one round of jackpot in the present embodiment) is finished and the open / close plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for discriminating whether or not the time necessary for discharging the ball has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n in advance. Is set as Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203n has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings (see FIG. S2407 in FIG. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, the ball is illegally left inside the variable winning device 65, and the ball flows down after the next round of jackpot is started (that is, after the state that can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2). Thus, an illegal act of passing the V winning switch 65e3 can be detected at an early stage.

  If the number of winning and the number of discharging does not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h even if the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. A configuration may be adopted in which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probable state is provided improperly.

  The probability variation valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON is awarded V prize. It shows that the time is less than the time required to pass through the switch 65e3. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203p, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the V winning switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. Thereafter, even if the V winning switch 65e3 is passed, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to pass.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6B), the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and the game ball is passed through the V winning switch 65e3. Damage caused by fraud in which a game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from the lower side of the V winning switch 65e3 or passed through a magnetic sensor or erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharge counter 203q is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S2411 in FIG. 50).

  The short / medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the short time state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203r is set to 101 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. Similar to the probability variation counter 203g, the short / medium counter 203r is decremented by one in the game state update process executed when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started to be displayed (FIG. 30). S404). By adopting a configuration in which the time-saving state is terminated at the start of the fluctuation, the time-varying state (chance mode B) is set after the big hit, and the time when the 101st fluctuation display is started is in the middle of the 100th fluctuation display. Even the short-time state is terminated.

  The winning flag 203s is based on the fact that the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is a big hit or a small hit at the start of fluctuation based on having entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. This flag is set to ON when determined (see S507 in FIG. 31 and S1007 in FIG. 36). The hit flag 203s is set to OFF when displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38). Note that a 2-bit storage area is allocated to the hit flag 203s, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bits and information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the winning flag 203s is “10H”, it indicates that the lottery of the first special symbol is a big win or a small win, and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the winning flag 203s is “01H”, it indicates that the lottery of the second special symbol is a big win and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the hit flag 203s is “00H”, it indicates that neither a big hit change nor a small hit change is executed.

  When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to ON at the start of the fluctuation, the winning flag 203s may be a big hit or a small win if the other lottery result is The winning flag 203s is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same way as a miss. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously subjected to the variable display that triggers the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. In other words, when one of the special symbols starts the fluctuation display that is a big hit, on the other side, the fluctuation display that becomes the big hit or the small hit is not started, and only the deviation fluctuation mode is displayed. The

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are constituted by the common hit flag 203s. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol have independent hit flags. It is also possible to configure such that a variable display that is a big hit or a small win is executed simultaneously for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By adopting such a configuration, even when the fluctuation display that becomes the big hit D is started with the first special symbol during the probability variation state, the fluctuation time is set long and the short fluctuation time with the second special symbol. By making it easy to make a lottery, it is possible to make a big hit with the second special symbol until the big hit D is started. Therefore, an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot D is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state is finished) is executed, and the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect for playing a game. Therefore, a fresh performance can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S609 in FIG. 32). Thereafter, in the process of S701 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed fluctuation time (in this embodiment, one by one) is subtracted and updated.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S1109 in FIG. 37). Thereafter, in the process of S1201 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 38, S207), the counter value (one by one in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed fluctuation time is subtracted and updated.

  The big hit flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit. If the jackpot flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not hit. This jackpot flag 203v is set to ON at the start of jackpot in the jackpot control process (see S2004 in FIG. 47) (see S2104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48).

  The small hitting flag 203w is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 203w is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting small, and if it is off, it indicates that the small hitting is not being hit. The small hitting flag 203w is set to ON at the start of the small hits in the small hitting control process (see S2005 in FIG. 51) (see S2503 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, it is set off at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 51).

  The chance mode counter 203x is a counter indicating whether or not the current mode is the chance mode A. If the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 1 or more, it means that the current mode is the chance mode A. Therefore, when the variation pattern is selected, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the chance A table 202d3 described above. Is done. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0, it means that the current state is other than the chance mode A (normal mode, extended mode, or chance mode B). (One of the normal table 202d1 and the extended resort / chance B table 202d2) is read from the variation pattern table 202d and used to determine the variation pattern (variation time). The chance mode counter 203x is set to a value corresponding to the small hit type when the first special symbol lottery is won (see S803, S805, and S806 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, when the special symbol variation display is started, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S406 in FIG. 30).

  The abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing a game with a correct game method (a game method advantageous to the player) corresponding to the current game state. If this abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on, it indicates that the player may be playing an illegal (disadvantaged) gaming method, and if it is off, the player is playing the correct gaming method. Indicates that the

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the extended-village mode (probability variation state), chance mode A, and chance mode B, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened (see FIGS. 16A and 16B), It becomes easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to play the game by aiming at the second entrance 640 by making a right turn, so that a right turn is the correct gaming method. In this case, the lottery is usually executed with the second special symbol, and during the period when the game is being executed with the first special symbol, the player plays an illegal (unfavorable) game method. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON. When the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON, a period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is continuously ON is counted by an abnormality monitoring counter 203aa to be described later, and a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds). If it becomes above, abnormality alert | report (it displays an audio | voice and a warning image) will be performed.

  In the normal mode (the normal state in which the chance mode A is not set), it is a correct gaming method to play left-handed, but the second entrance 640 that should only enter right-handed or normal When it is determined that a ball has entered the entrance 67 and the second special symbol variation display or the normal symbol variation display has been executed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON and abnormality notification is executed. It is configured as follows.

  The abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is a counter for counting (counting) a period during which there is a high possibility that a game is being performed by an unauthorized gaming method. When the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa reaches a count value corresponding to 20 seconds, abnormality notification is executed. The abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is updated by 1 when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is turned on during the fraud monitoring process (see S1702 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off, it is reset to 0 (see S1705 in FIG. 43).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Next, details of mode transition performed by using various tables provided in the ROM 202, various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, four types of modes are provided. Specifically, “normal mode” and “chance mode A” set in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), and a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, In addition, there are provided a “long-run mode” set as a normal symbol time-short state) and a “chance mode B” set as a time-short state (low probability state of a special symbol and a normal symbol time-short state). ing.

  The “normal mode” shown on the upper left side of FIG. 18 is the most disadvantageous state for the player because it is difficult for the second special symbol to be drawn. Since it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting the ball aiming at the first entrance 64. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 18, in the “normal mode”, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a special symbol lottery is won or a big hit. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the jackpot type is jackpot A or B, the mode shifts to the “renso mode”. If the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball was not launched in the first round of the jackpot, etc., even if the jackpot is A, B, the “rensou mode” is set. No (chance mode B is set).

  Also, if the special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the jackpot type is a big hit C, the mode shifts to “chance mode B”. In the first round of jackpot, if the ball is entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the extremely short opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1, and the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3, “Renso mode” is set (chance mode B is not set). Furthermore, when the special symbol lottery is a small hit, the process shifts to “chance mode A” after the small hit is completed. The number of lotteries that the “chance mode A” continues is different depending on the small hit type (see FIG. 14B).

  The “chance mode A” shown on the upper right side of FIG. 18 is the same as the “normal mode” as a gaming state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), but the second special symbol Since the fluctuation pattern table (chance A table 202d3) with a short fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is referred to (chance A table 202d3), it is a mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more easily performed than in the “normal mode”. As described above, when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, as the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, there is a pattern (open / close pattern with a long opening time) that the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3. Since it is always set, it is more advantageous for the player than a big win in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the state more advantageous than the “normal mode” while being in the same gaming state.

  In the “chance mode A”, there is a possibility that the game will be a big hit or, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after entering the chance mode A, the mode may be shifted to another mode. Specifically, when a special symbol lottery is won, and when the jackpot E or F is reached, as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern in which a ball easily passes the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). Therefore, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot mode is set to the “renso mode”. Even if the jackpot is E or F, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it does not shift to the “renso mode” (only the short time state of the normal symbol is given) As a result, it shifts to chance mode B). Further, in the “chance mode A”, when the lottery of special symbols of the specified number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) is completed without making a big hit, the process returns to the “normal mode”.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the normal state, the two modes of the disadvantageous “normal mode” and the “chance mode A” which is more advantageous than the “normal mode” can be switched back and forth. . By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage can be switched according to the progress of the game even in the normal state which is more disadvantageous than the “renso mode” or the “chance mode B”. Therefore, even if it is not a big hit, the game can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The “chance mode B” shown in the middle part of FIG. 18 is a mode indicating a short time state as described above. In the short time state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to strike the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 by hitting right.

  In this “chance mode B”, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a special winning lottery is executed for a specified number of times (100 times) after the chance mode B is reached. is there. Specifically, when a special symbol lottery is won, and when the jackpot E or F is reached, as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern in which a ball easily passes the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). Therefore, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot mode is set to the “renso mode”. Even if the jackpot is E or F, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it does not shift to the “renso mode” (only the short time state of the normal symbol is given) As a result, the chance mode B is looped). Further, in the “chance mode B”, when the lottery of the special symbol for the specified number of times (100 times) is completed without making a big hit, the process proceeds to the “normal mode”.

  The “renso mode” shown in the lower part of FIG. 18 is a mode indicating a probability variation state as described above. In the probability variation state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, and the probability of winning the special symbol lottery increases (1/300 → 1/75), which is extremely advantageous for the player. It becomes.

  In the “renso mode”, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) after becoming the “renso mode”, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode. Specifically, in the “renso mode”, when the lottery of the special symbol is lost for 100 consecutive times, the mode shifts (falls) to the “normal mode”. On the other hand, basically, the jackpot does not shift to another mode (the “renso mode” is looped). Therefore, if you enter the “renso mode”, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is high, and if you win a big hit, the “renso mode” is set as the gaming state after that jackpot. This is a very advantageous mode in which the jackpot and the “renso mode” are easily repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the goal of shifting to the “renso mode”, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Even if the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot E or F, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the “renso mode” is not looped and the chance mode B is switched to. And migrate.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which traverses the some game state from which an advantage degree differs. In addition, it is possible not only to go back and forth between different gaming states, but also to go back and forth between modes with different degrees of advantage in the same gaming state. That is, in the most disadvantageous normal state, the degree of advantage can be varied according to the game situation. Therefore, even if the special symbol lottery continues for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous due to the change in the degree of advantage.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a are opened and closed. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid or a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2, Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2, secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e, secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f, effect counter 223g, and game state storage area 223h And at least other memory area 223z.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 54) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are fluctuating effects (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter that counts up to four times for each special symbol type the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 corresponds to the variable number of reserved balls based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol. Corresponds to the number of balls held.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2. The number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol When the change display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S4211 of FIG. 54). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2. At the same time, in order to notify the display controller 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display controller 114. Send.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113, the second special symbol. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of retained balls corresponding to the value of the retained ball number counter 223b2 is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. The value is changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It is possible to change while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 are respectively received when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 54) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4402 and S4407 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 receive the first special symbol stop type command and the second special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110. (See S4202 in FIG. 54), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4412 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a big hit type in the case of a big win). It is determined.

  The slave special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e and the slave special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f are counters for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, respectively.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by incrementing the value by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed. .

  The gaming state storage area 223h is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time the status command output from the main control device 110 is received, the game status storage area 223h is updated to information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command (S4011, FIG. 52). (See S4215 in FIG. 54). More specifically, the game state storage area 223h is allocated with a 3-bit storage area, and whether the special symbol is in a probabilistic state or not in the normal symbol time-saving state in order from the upper bit. A value indicating whether or not the chance mode A is set is stored. For example, if the value of the game state storage area 223h is “110H”, it means that the special symbol is in a probable change state, and that the normal symbol is in the short time state (that is, the extended game mode), and if it is “010H”. This means that the special symbol has a low probability state and the normal symbol has a short time state (that is, the chance mode B), and “001H” means the chance mode A. On the other hand, if the information stored in the game state storage area 223h is “000H”, it means that the mode is the normal mode.

  By updating the game state storage area 223h according to the state command output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory 234a is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, the NAND flash memory 234a reads the instructions constituting the control program. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 57) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 59B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a generally facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 57).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 21 shows that the display controller 114 turns on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and the entrance was detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an incoming ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the hour main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back image and the back image will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 22B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the rear surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “empty stage”, respectively. . FIG. 23 shows the rear surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back face type is determined based on the back face type selection table and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 displays the corresponding back image. First, the position between the position a and the position a ′ is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, the back image on the back E is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is the 3rd pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 23B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 23C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 23A is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 23A to 23C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 22A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are all back of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “city stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a rear surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, a rear surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and a rear surface D corresponding to the “empty stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The back E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 23A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is made resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, if so, the resident video RAM 235 is used. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 23A to FIG. 23B). ) And image data corresponding to an image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or an image between FIGS. 23A and 23B) is displayed as a rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface BD can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back side B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface E, the images shown in FIGS. 23A to 23B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 23 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 23 (b) to 23 (c) and FIGS. 23 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Accordingly, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 23B to 23C and FIGS. 23C to 23A are used for normal use while the images of FIGS. 23A to 23B are displayed. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The image of FIG. 23 (b) to (c) and FIG. 23 (c) to (a) is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image that has been made. be able to.

  Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the back B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  In addition, on the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten main symbols (see FIG. 6) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, but for resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (“city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display one of them or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 24). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 25 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 25).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 57). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process, an image other than the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Are set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 68B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 59B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 59) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 59 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 68A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed (see FIG. 68B). If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 59B). In step S6303), pointer update processing (see step S7205 in FIG. 65) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 26), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 26, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 59B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 65). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 69). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 69). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 70).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 59B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 64A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 69), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 69). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 64 (a) ) (See S7002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S7221 in FIG. 65). When other display data tables other than those are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 61A, S6705 in FIG. 62A, and S6805 in FIG. 62B). , See S6905 of FIG. 63). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (S7214 in FIG. 65). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 61A, S6705 in FIG. 62A, S6805 in FIG. 62B, FIG. 63, S6905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 51. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process (see FIG. 45) activated upon power-on, a main process (see FIG. 46) executed after the startup process, and periodically (this embodiment). In this case, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) activated at a cycle of 2 milliseconds and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then startup processing (see FIG. 45) and main processing (see FIG. 46) will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) and the main process (see FIG. 46), commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes and provided in the RAM 203. Temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (FIG. 39, S108) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed for this purpose (S103). That is, for each round of jackpot (special gaming state), the specific winning opening 65a is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S104). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S106). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5, and these counter values are the maximum values (this embodiment) Then, when it reaches 299, 99, 239, 99), it is cleared to 0 respectively. When the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first per-random number counter. The initial value of C1 or the second random number counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 to set the third symbol variation pattern is executed. Then (S107), then, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S108). Details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, and details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process (S108) is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a normal symbol variation process for the game ball passing through the normal ball slot 67, is executed (S109). A through gate passing process is executed for the passing of the game ball (S110). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, and details of the through gate passage process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the through gate passing process (S110) is executed, a fluctuation monitoring process (S111) for monitoring whether the player is playing the correct game corresponding to the gaming state is executed, and then the player does not correspond to the gaming state. When a (illegal) game is being executed, a fraud monitoring process (S112) for monitoring the period is performed. Details of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, and details of the fraud monitoring process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the fraud monitoring process (S112), a launch control process for executing control related to the launch of the sphere is executed (S113), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S114). The timer interrupt process ends. In the firing control process (S113), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variation process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), various determinations and determinations are made using each counter value acquired based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, Control is performed such that the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can control the variable display at the same time in a variable display mode corresponding to the determination result, or stop the display in the display mode indicating the determination result. Is done.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit or small hit game is being executed (S201), and when it is determined that a big hit or small hit game is being executed. (S201: Yes), since the start or stop of the special symbol variation display should not be set, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined in the process of S202 that the first special symbol variation display is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204), and the process proceeds to S205. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. In the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the specified variation time has elapsed during the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol lottery is performed. A process of stopping the variable display with the pattern indicating the result is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203), and the process proceeds to S205. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S203), the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a. Then, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data are executed.

  In the process of S205 that is executed after the first special symbol variation start process (S203) or the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (S205). In the process of S205, when it is determined that the second special symbol is in a variable display (S205: Yes), a second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S207), and this process ends. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. In the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 38, S207), the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204) is performed in the same manner as the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204). When the specified fluctuation time has elapsed during the fluctuation display, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S205 that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a varying manner (S205: No), the second special symbol variation starting process is executed (S206), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), as in the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S203), the second special symbol reserved ball count is stored. If hold data (various counter values) is stored in the area 203b, jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the hold data is executed.

  Next, the details of the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1 is subtracted (S303), and the reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b1. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S304 is completed, a game state update process is then executed (S304). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but in the game state update process (FIG. 30, S304), various counters (probability change counter 203g, hour / medium counter 203r, chance mode counter 203x) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. This is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the value.

  When the process of S305 is completed, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 31, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306), the first per-random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203c. Based on this value and the current gaming state, a determination is made as to whether or not a big hit.

  When the process of S306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307), and the process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32. In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S307), the first per-random number counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203c. Based on the determination result based on the value of C1, processing for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the gaming state update process (S305) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the game state update process (S305).

  When the game state update process (see FIG. 30) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S401), and if it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 ( (S401: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability variation counter (S402), and the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

  In the process of S403, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203r is greater than 0 (S403). In the process of S403, if it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203r is greater than 0 (S403: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter 203r is 0 (S403: No), the process of S404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S405.

  In the process of S405, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S405). If it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S405: Yes), the chance mode counter 203x 1 is subtracted (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S405: No), the process of S406 is skipped and the process proceeds to S407.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed. More specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is updated from 1 to 0 to change from the probability variation state to the normal state, or the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203r is updated from 1 to 0 to change from the time reduction state to the normal state. Or the value of the chance mode counter 203x is updated from 1 to 0 to determine whether or not the chance mode A is changed to the normal mode in the normal state. In the process of S407, if it is determined that the gaming state has been changed (S407: Yes), a state command indicating the changed gaming state is set (S408), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the gaming state has not been changed (S407: No), the process of S408 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

  Note that the status command set in the process of S408 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S2001) of a main process (see FIG. 46) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. With this state command, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S501). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state) (S502). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation state) (S502: Yes), the jackpot defined in the first per-random number table 202a for high probability And whether the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer matches the random number, and the result of the determination (lottery result) is acquired (S503). On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S502: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability is stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value corresponding to the big hit matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S504).

  When the processing of S503 or S504 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the winning flag 203s is on (S505). If it is determined that it is on (S505: Yes), this first special symbol big hit determining process Before the execution (see FIG. 31), it is determined that a big win or a small win is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the variable display indicating the determination result is being executed. As the stop symbol type to be displayed on the symbol display device 37, the off symbol of the first special symbol is set (S510), and this process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are big wins, and the other big win is started during the execution of one big win.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S505 that the winning flag 203s is not ON (OFF) (S505: No), then the lottery result (determination result) of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit Is determined (S506), and when it is determined that either the big hit or the small win (S506: Yes), the winning flag 203s is set to ON (S507). Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to jackpot or small jackpot (S508), the symbol of the first special symbol (big jackpot or jackpot) is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S509), the book The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S506, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is neither big hit nor small hit (the lottery result is out) (S506: No), the process proceeds to S510 and stops. The off symbol of the first special symbol is set as a symbol (S510), and this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “-” indicating detachment is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) is a jackpot. (S601) If the jackpot is determined (S601: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b is read and the jackpot type of the first special symbol corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is selected. (S602). When the process of S602 ends, the process proceeds to S603.

  On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big win (small win or miss) (S601: No), the process of S602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S603. To do.

  In the process of S603, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S603). If it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S603: Yes), it means that the first special symbol lottery has been executed in the chance mode A, so the chance A table 202d3 is used as the variation pattern table. Is read (S604), and the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S603: No), it is then determined whether both the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / short time counter 203r are 0 (S605).

  In the process of S605, if it is determined that both the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the hour / minute counter 203r are 0 (S605: Yes), it means that the current state is the normal mode. The normal table 202d1 is read as a pattern table, and the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, when it is determined that one of the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203r is 1 or more (S605: No), this means that the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being established. Therefore, the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 is read as a variation pattern table (S607), and the process proceeds to S608.

  In the process of S608, one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected from the read fluctuation pattern table based on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S608). Next, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern, and a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter (S609). Next, the special figure 1 stop type command is set (S610), and this process is terminated.

  The special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S2001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines a detailed fluctuation display effect mode based on the fluctuation pattern notified by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command.

  Next, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204).

  In the special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is subtracted and updated (S701), and the counter value after the subtraction is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern set this time. It is determined whether or not the counter value corresponds to the end (S702). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is not a counter value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S702: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S702, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is a counter value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S702: Yes), the current fluctuation pattern is It is determined whether or not a jackpot is set as a lottery result of one special symbol (S703). If it is determined in the process of S703 that the jackpot is set (S703: Yes), a special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol is set (S704), and the first symbol display is performed. The change stop of the second special symbol of the device 37 is set (S705). Then, the start of jackpot is set (S706), and the values of the win flag 203s, the probability variation counter 203g, the hour / medium counter 203r, and the chance mode counter 203x are reset (S707), and the process proceeds to S709.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S703, when it is determined that a lottery result other than the big win (miss or small hit) is set as the lottery result of the first special symbol (S703: No), the process shifts to the chance mode A. In the case of shifting to the chance mode A, a chance mode setting process for setting the number of chance modes is performed (S708), and the process proceeds to S709. Details of the chance mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the symbol indicating the jackpot is set (S709), and the variation of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S710). ), This process is terminated.

  By configuring in this way, the second special symbol can be stopped at the symbol corresponding to the deviation in accordance with the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol corresponding to the winning symbol. Therefore, the player can be concentrated on the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the chance mode setting process (S708) which is one process of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this chance mode setting process (S708).

  When this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is set as the lottery result of the first special symbol (S801), and it is not a small hit (ie, it is out of place). (S801: No), since the chance mode A is not set, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S801: Yes), it is determined whether the small hit type is the small hit A (S802). .

  If it is determined in the process of S802 that a small hit is A (S802: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 10 (S803), and the process proceeds to S807. Thereby, after the small hit is completed, it is possible to set a chance mode A that is more advantageous than the normal mode over 10 special symbol lotteries (the second special symbol lottery is easily executed).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit type is not the small hit A (S802: No), then it is determined whether the small hit type is the small hit B (S804). (S804: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 20 (S805), and the process proceeds to S807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S804 that the current small hit type is not small hit B (that is, small hit C) (S804: No), 100 is set as the value of the chance mode counter 203x (S806). ), The process proceeds to S807.

  In the process of S807, a state command indicating the transition to the chance mode A is set (S807), and then a display special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol with the symbol corresponding to the deviation is set ( S808). Next, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S809), the start of the small hit is set (S810), the hit flag 203s is set to OFF (S811), and this processing Exit.

  By this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34), when the small hit is made, the chance mode A of the number of times corresponding to the small hit type can be set. As a result, when the game state is the normal state, the chance mode is relatively advantageous from the normal mode that is most disadvantageous for the player every time a small hit is made (the second special symbol lottery is easily executed when the player strikes right). A can be transferred to A. Therefore, even if it is not a big hit, the game in the normal state can be inflated, so that the game can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 35), first, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is acquired (S901), and the acquired second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) is greater than 0 (S902). In the process of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S902: No), there is no reserved ball and the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the processing of S903 to S906 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S907. On the other hand, in the processing of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S902: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) 1 is subtracted (S903), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the sound lamp controller 113 of the value after the subtraction is set (S904).

  Next, the game state update process described above with reference to FIG. 30 is executed (S905), the second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S906), and the process proceeds to S907. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, but the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) is performed in the first special symbol stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the random number counter C1.

  In the process of S907, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S907), and this process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 37, S907) is performed by the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern from the variation pattern table 202d in accordance with the value of CS1.

  Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 35, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36), first, various counter values stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are acquired (S1001). Next, referring to the value of the probability variation counter 203g, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (S1002). In the processing of S1002, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation state) (S1002: Yes), the first per-random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. The lottery result indicating whether or not the jackpot random number specified in 13 (b) matches the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is acquired (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1005.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1002 that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (that is, the gaming state is the normal state) (S1002: No), the first per-random number table 202a for low probability ( A lottery result as to whether or not the jackpot random number specified in FIG. 13B matches the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is acquired (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005.

  In the processing of S1005, it is determined whether or not the winning flag 203s is turned on (S1005), and when it is determined that the winning flag 203s is turned off, that is, the big hit variation display is executed in the first special symbol. If it is determined that there is not (S1005: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1003 or S1004 is a big hit (S1006). In the process of S1006, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S1006: Yes), the winning flag 203s is set to ON (S1007), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a big win (S1008). . Next, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1009), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1005 that the winning flag 203s is ON (S1005: Yes), or when it is determined that the set lottery result is out of the process in S1006 ( (S1006: No), a symbol indicating a deviation of the second special symbol is set in the first special symbol display device 37 (S1010), and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is set as a lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101). In the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the big win is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b is read and the first hit type counter C2 is counted. A hit type corresponding to the value is selected (S1102). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the selection is set as the second special symbol lottery result (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1103.

  In the processing of S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S1103). If the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S1103: Yes), the change pattern table is for chance A. The table 202d3 is read (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1108. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S1103: No), it is determined whether the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / minute counter 203r are both 0 (S1105). In the processing of S1105, if each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203r is both 0 (S1105: Yes), the normal table 202d1 is read as the variation pattern table (S1106), and the processing proceeds to S1108. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if one of the probability variation counter 203g and the hourly / intermediate counter 203r is 1 or more (S1105: No), the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 is read as the variation pattern table. (S1107), the process proceeds to S1108.

  In the process of S1108, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set special symbol lottery result and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern table (S1108). Next, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is generated (set) based on the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of S1108, and a counter value corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u ( In step S1109, a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type is set (S1110), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is subtracted and updated (S1201), and the counter value after the subtraction corresponds to the end of the fluctuation time. Whether it is a value or not is discriminated (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the counter value does not correspond to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: No), this process is terminated without setting the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: Yes), a big hit is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S1203). If it is determined that the jackpot is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1203: Yes), the voice lamp control device so as to stop and display the variation of the first special symbol with the set stop type A special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying to 113 is set (S1204). Next, a stop display of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S1205). Then, a big hit start is set (S1206), and the values of the win flag 203s, the probability variation counter 203g, the hour / medium counter 203r, and the chance mode counter 203x are reset (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1203 that a small hit or miss is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1203: No), the process of S1204 to S1207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

  In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the change in the second special symbol is displayed with the set stop type (S1208). The change stop of the second special symbol being executed in the display device 37 is set (S1219), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Can be made. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the lottery game is executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed at the same time, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, Since the variation display of the special symbol is removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). In the start winning process (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not a ball has been won at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (whether or not the start is won). Each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively (up to four for each of the entrance 64 and the second entrance 640). It is processing to do.

  In the start winning process (see FIG. 39), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S1301). Here, a winning at the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1301: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired ( In step S1302, it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1303). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is stored up to the upper limit.

  Then, even if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S1301: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d If it is not less than 4 (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1307 without acquiring various counter values in the counter buffer. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S1301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special figure reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S1303: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d (1304), and a holding ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the added holding ball number is set (S1305). .

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S2001) of a main process (see FIG. 46) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b1.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S1305, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type classification counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S106 of the timer interrupt processing described above, The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1306, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In addition, about each process from S1307 to S1312, the process similar to the process performed with respect to the start winning to the 1st entrance slot 64 performed by each process from S1301 to S1306 is 2nd pitch. Since it is executed for the start winning to the mouth 640, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the normal symbol variation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 40), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S1401). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is being performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning symbol. Up to. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1401: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1401: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is in a variable display. (S1402). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed ( S1420). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1419, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S1420 (S1420: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1420 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S1420: Yes), stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1421). . In the process of S1421, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1413, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “○” symbol as a second symbol (lighted display). ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S1418, the “x” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the processing of S1421, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S1413 and the processing of S1418. 2 Stop display (lights up) on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win or not (S1422). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1422: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set (1423). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is out of place (S1422: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1402 that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1402: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1403).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1404), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0. (S1404: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1404: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S1405).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1406). In the process of S1406, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → the execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → the normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → the normal symbol hold second area, and the normal symbol hold fourth area. → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal symbol hold third area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1407).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in a short-time state (including a probability variation state) (S1408). More specifically, when the value of either one of the probability variation counter 203g and the time shortening counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the state is the time shortening state (or the probability variation state). In the processing of S1408, if it is determined that it is not in the time-short state (S1408: No), whether or not it is determined based on the winning determination value of the random symbol per normal symbol for low probability (see FIG. 14A). A result is acquired (S1411). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the game is a short-time game (S1408: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1409). In the process of S1409, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (S1409: Yes), the process of S1411 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1409: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per normal symbol for high probability (see FIG. 14A) On the basis of the result, the determination result is obtained (S1410).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1412), and if it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (ie, it is out of place) (S1412: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1418), and the process proceeds to S1419. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (S1412: Yes), the display mode at the time of win is “◯”. Is set (S1413).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state (including a probability change state) (S1414). If it is determined that a short-time game is being played (S1414: Yes), the process proceeds to S1416. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1414 that the time-short state is not being reached (S1414: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1415). In the process of S1415, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1415: Yes), the process proceeds to S1416.

  In the process of S1416, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1416), and the process proceeds to S1419. On the other hand, in the process of S1415, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not big hit (that is, the normal symbol is in a low probability state) (S1415: No), the electric accessory 640a is opened. The time is set to 0.9 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1417), and the process proceeds to S1419.

  In the process of S1419 executed after executing any one of S1416 to S1418, the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 seconds (S1419), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S110). This through gate passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process (see FIG. 41), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1501). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S1501: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1502), and the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired. It is determined whether the value (M) of 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1503).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If it is not less than 4 (S1503: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S1501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S1504). Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (normal symbol reserved first to fourth areas) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1505). In the processing of S1505, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the normal symbol reservation 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal symbol hold 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal symbol hold 3 area, if the value is 3, the normal symbol hold 4 area first. The area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this variation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether the player is playing a correct game corresponding to the gaming state is executed. In the present embodiment, in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), basically, the sphere is fired with the firing strength that the sphere passes through the path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. The gaming method (left-handed) becomes a regular gaming method, and the ball is fired with a firing strength that the ball passes through the path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 during the big hit, the small hit, the short-time state, and the probability changing state. The game method (right-handed) is the regular game method. In the normal state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the game pattern is deteriorated because the very long variation (600 seconds) is set as the variation pattern. For this reason, making a right strike in a normal state is a disadvantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being disadvantaged to the player by monitoring whether the game is played in the correct way. Also, it is possible to monitor the act of drawing the second special symbol that is advantageous by making a right-hand strike and making a prize at the second entrance 640. The possibility that it will end up can be reduced. Even in the normal state, if the chance mode A is set over a special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (10, 20, or 100) after a small hit, a right game is a regular game. Become a method.

  In the fluctuation monitoring process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is being made (S1601). If it is determined in the processing of S1601 that neither big win nor small win is found (S1601: No), it is in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (that is, the value of either the probability variation counter 203g or the time reduction middle counter 203r) Is determined to be 1 or more) (S1602), and if it is determined that the probability variation state or the short-time state is present (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being variably displayed (S1603). . If it is determined that the first special symbol is being variably displayed (S1603: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process is terminated. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing a game in the correct gaming method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the gaming state. When the time for which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds or more), an abnormality notification command is set, and the abnormality notification command (third symbol) is set by the command by the command. Characters indicating abnormality (for example, character display indicating the correct gaming method (please make a right strike)) are executed on the display device 81, and an error sound or an instruction voice to the correct game is output by voice. An abnormal signal is output to the computer)).

  In the promiscuous state and the short-time state, by playing a game in the correct gaming method (right-handed), it becomes easy to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery, and the disadvantageous first special symbol lottery is executed. It becomes difficult. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is highly likely that the player is playing the game with an unfavorable left-handed strike. In this case, by continuously displaying the first special symbol variation display for a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds), it is possible to continue the game with an illegal gaming method that is disadvantageous to the player by adopting a configuration for notifying the abnormality. Can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the jackpot is in the big hit or the jackpot (S1601: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S1603 that the first special symbol is in a variable stop state ( S1603: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to OFF (S1605).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1602 that neither the probability change state nor the short-time state is present (S1602: No), it means that the current gaming state is the normal state, so the value of the chance mode counter 203x is next. It is determined whether it is greater than 0 (that is, whether the right-handed is the chance mode A which is a regular game method) (S1606). In the process of S1606, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S1606: Yes), the processes of S1603 to S1605 are executed in the same manner as in the probability change state or the short time state.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1606, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (normal mode) (S1606: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed. (S1607). If it is determined in the processing of S1607 that the normal symbol is not changing (S1607: No), then it is determined whether the second special symbol is changing (S1608), and the second special symbol is changing. Otherwise (S1608: No), in the normal mode, there is a high possibility that the player is playing the game with the regular gaming method (left-handed), so the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to off (S1609), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1607 that the normal symbol is changing (S1607: Yes), or in the processing of S1608, it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S1608: Yes), this means that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 or entered the second entrance 640 during the normal mode, and the player is likely to be right-handed . Therefore, in this case, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process ends.

  In this way, in the normal mode, it is a regular gaming method to play left-handed, but if the normal symbol or the second special symbol that can be displayed variably when right-handed is changing, it is incorrect. The possibility of playing a game with the game method increases. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203y to on, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is kept on for more than a predetermined time (120 seconds in this embodiment), abnormality notification is executed. The game method can be discovered earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an unforeseen disadvantage from being given to the hall due to illegal games.

  Next, the fraud monitoring process (S112), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the fraud monitoring process (S112). In this fraud monitoring process (see FIG. 43), the time period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to on is counted, and an abnormality alarm command is set when the predetermined time or longer (120 seconds or longer in this embodiment) is reached. Processing is executed.

  In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 43, S112), first, it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on (S1701). If the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on (S1701: Yes), the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is set. 1 is added and updated (S1702). Then, it is determined whether the value of the updated abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 120 seconds) (S1703). (S1703: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (S1703: Yes), an abnormality alarm command is set (S1704), and this process ends.

  This abnormality alarm command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this abnormality alarm command, processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 or the sound output device 226 to output an abnormality alarm mode is executed. Thereby, fraud and a malfunction can be discovered at an early stage.

  In addition, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set on, the abnormality alarm command is set when it is kept on for a predetermined period (120 seconds in this embodiment) or more. Even if there is a period when the game is not played with the regular gaming method for a short time (less than 120 seconds) at the time of switching of the gaming state, etc. (for example, a period for switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state) Since the abnormality alarm is not output, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined period is 120 seconds. However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and the predetermined period is configured with a longer period of time than the necessary switching time in normal gaming when switching the gaming state. do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormality alarm is erroneously output while the player is changing the firing strength (the direction in which the ball is launched).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off (S1701: No), the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1705), and this processing ends. To do.

  As described above, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is determined to be off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to the initial value, so that the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided, and the normal gaming method is used. Although a game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormal alarm is output.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 45), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904). If it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905). (S1905: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1910 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S1906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1910 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1911, S1912) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as at the start of business in a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1911, S1912) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1913.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If normal (S1907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1913), and a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state at the time of start-up. Is set (S1914). Thereafter, the interrupt is permitted (S1915), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 46) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (see FIG. 46), first, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) External output processing to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). After the process of S2003, the jackpot control process for setting the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 and the flow path solenoid 65k in the jackpot game is executed (S2004). Details of the jackpot control process (S2004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the big hit control process (S2004) is executed, the small hit control process (S2005) for setting the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 that is hitting the small hits is executed. Details of the small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the small hit control process (S2005) is completed, an electric accessory opening / closing process is then executed (S2006). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2006), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed. Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S2007).

  When the process of S2007 is completed, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the second symbol display device 83 Normal symbols are displayed. Then, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the normal symbol is hit, the normal electric accessory 640a is held for a predetermined time (1 second × 2 times, or 0.9 second × 2). Times) released.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010). ) If the predetermined time has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process proceeds to S2001, and the above-described processes after S2001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main process is executed. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011, S2012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2002 (S2012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001-S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S2009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 44 has been executed, the power-off process after S2013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). Transmit (S2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2001 to S2008 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from the process of S2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S1901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot control process (S2004) that is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S2004).

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S2101). Specifically, in the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33), the start of jackpot is set (S706 in FIG. 33), or the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38). Among them, when the jackpot start is set (see S1206 in FIG. 38), it is determined that the jackpot is started in the processing of S2101.

  If it is determined in the process of S2101 that the special symbol jackpot is started (S2101: Yes), an opening command for executing an opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot is set (S2102), and the flow path solenoid 65k. The operation pattern (see the upper part of FIG. 7) is started (S2103). Next, the big hit flag 203v is set to ON (S2104), and this process is terminated. Here, by setting the jackpot flag 203v to ON, it is determined that the jackpot is being hit in the processing of S201 of the special symbol variation process, and the variation start and variation stop of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. Since the process can be terminated without executing various processes for setting, it is possible to prevent the problem that the variable display is started despite the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the special symbol jackpot is not started (S2101: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot is being hit (S2105). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S2105, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2105: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2105 that the special symbol is a big hit (S2105: Yes), it is then determined whether it is a new round start timing (S2106), and a new round start timing is determined. If so (S2106: Yes), the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S2107). Next, the read opening operation (opening / closing pattern) is set in the opening / closing plate 65f1 (S2108), and this process is terminated. Although illustration is omitted, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2105: Yes), a round number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the start of a new round. Is set. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, when a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is received, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109), and if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109). : Yes), an ending command is set (S2110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S2111). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where an ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of S2111, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S2111: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends is executed (S2112), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not the big hit end timing (S2111: No), a winning process for performing a process corresponding to winning in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S2113), and then the specific winning opening ( An abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the large opening 65a has been normally discharged is executed (S2114), and this process ends. Details of the winning process (S2113) and the abnormality process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the jackpot end process (S2112) which is one process in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This jackpot end process (S2112) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S2112).

  In the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201). If the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201: Yes), Since it means that the V winning switch 65e3 has been passed, by setting 101 to the value of the probability variation counter 203g, the gaming state after the big hit is set to be the probability variation state (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2205. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S2201: No), it is then determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S2203). If it is not the big hit D (S2203: No), 101 is set to the value of the hour / minute counter 203r (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if it is a big hit D (S2203: Yes), the process of S2204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2205. Thereby, when the jackpot type is jackpot D and the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 in another jackpot type, a time reduction state of 100 times is set after the jackpot.

  In the process of S2205, a status command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state after the big hit is set from the respective values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / mid hour counter 203r (S2205), and the big hit middle flag 203x, Then, both the probability variation setting flag 203h are set to OFF (S2206), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the winning process (S2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S2113). This winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In this winning process (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S2301). Here, the round effective period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (3 seconds) ends. It is. If it is not the round effective period in the processing of S2301 (S2301: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that the present is the round effective period (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S2302). If a winning for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S2302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j and updated (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if the winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not detected (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

  In the process of S2304, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304). If the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2304, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S2304: No), it is determined whether the round time has passed (S2305), and if the round time has passed. (S2305: Yes), the process proceeds to S2306.

  In the process of S2306, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S2306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2305 that the round time has not elapsed (S2305: No), the processes of S2306 and S2307 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2308.

  In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S2308). If the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S2308: Yes), the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S2309), and the process of S2310 is performed. Transition to processing. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2308: No), it means that it is a ball throwing period after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed, and then the probability variation valid flag 203o is turned on. Is determined (S2316). In the process of S2316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S2316: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S2316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p (S2317), and then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. 5 seconds) (S2318). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S2318: No), the process proceeds to S2310, and the process of monitoring the ball entering the probability variation ball opening 671 and updating the probability variation setting flag 203h is executed. To do. Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the time for ball removal. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability change gaming state from being granted by passing the ball through the V winning switch illegally.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S2318: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to off (S2319), the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is reset (S2320), and this process is performed. finish.

  In the process of S2310, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310). If the ball has not passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: No), the process proceeds to S2313. On the other hand, if the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i (S2311), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312), and S2313. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S2313, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313). If the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S2313: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S2314), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to on (S2315), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the abnormality process (S2114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S2114). This abnormal process (S2114) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47). As described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is normally discharged. This is a process for determining whether it has been performed.

  In the abnormal process (S2114), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round effective period (S2401). If it is not the round effective period (S2401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the round effective period (S2401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402).

  In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ball discharge number counter 203q (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if the sphere has not passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404.

  In the process of S2404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S2404). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S2404: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S2404: Yes), since the ball is being thrown, the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated (S2405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (S2406). If the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S2406: No), The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S2406: Yes), then the number of discharges (the value of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the value of the ball discharge number counter 203q) It is determined whether the (total value) matches the winning number (S2407).

  In the process of S2407, if it is determined that the number of discharged items does not match the number of winning prizes (S2407: No), an error command is set (S2408), and the process proceeds to S2409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of leaving the ball illegally in the variable winning device 65 and causing the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k after the start of the next jackpot. it can.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2407, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins matches the number of winning prizes (S2407: Yes), the process of S2408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2409. In the processing of S2409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S2409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S2410). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the ball discharge number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S2411), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 50), the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not normally discharged due to a ball clogging occurring inside the variable winning device 65. It is possible to detect and notify the occurrence of a malfunction that occurs at an early stage. In addition, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of leaving the ball illegally in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the small hit control process (S2005) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 46) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting control process (S2005).

  In the small hit control process (see FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol small hit is started (S2501). In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the special symbol small hitting is started (S2105: Yes), a small hitting opening command is set (S2502). Then, the small hitting / medium flag 203w is set to ON (S2503), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the special symbol small hit is not started (S2501: No), it is determined whether the small hit middle flag 203w is on (S2504). During the special symbol small hits, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small hits (including during the special symbol small hit game), Includes a special symbol during the predetermined time after the small hit game ends. In the process of S2504, if the small hitting medium flag 203w is off (S2504: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2504, if it is determined that the small hitting medium flag 203w is on (S2504: Yes), it is determined whether it is the opening end timing (S2505), and if it is the opening end timing. (S2505: Yes), the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set (S2506), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2505 that it is not the opening end timing (S2505: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening pattern set in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S2507). ). If it is determined in the processing of S2507 that it is the end timing of the opening pattern set for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S2507: Yes), a small hitting ending command is set (S2508), and this processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is not the set end timing of the release pattern (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special symbol small hit (S2509). That is, it is determined whether it is the ending end timing. If it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the small hitting end timing (S2509: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 203w is set to OFF (S2510), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the small hit end timing (S2509: No), this processing is ended as it is.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. 56, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 52, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S4116 is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 53). ) Is determined during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 53, S4113), it executes a power-off process in S4116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S4116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S4116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S4116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 53). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S4008. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The gaming state notified by the command is set in the gaming state storage area 223h (S4011), thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S4008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S4004 to S4006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S4009 is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is reached via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4110. In S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S4102 to S4110 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4110 are sent to the display control device 114. (S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a hold number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the hold number display update process (S4106), a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearrangeable period (a period during which the jackpot game and the state without a hold are omitted), the hold symbol display that is displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts the variable display. It is rearranged in order and displayed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S4108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S4111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process (S4111), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is displayed. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmission to the display control device 114, is executed (S4112). Details of the change display setting process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S4116). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4114, when it is determined that the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and determines the command received from the main control apparatus 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 54, S4111), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a special figure 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to ON (S4202). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag is set. Set 223d2 to ON. Next, from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command, a stop type (completely out of reach, out of reach, small hit, or big hit A to D) is extracted (S4203), and this processing is performed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S4203 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), the main controller 110 then sends the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S4204). The special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of S4204, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4204: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the received special figure is received. The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 1 (S4206), and this processing is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol) Used).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4204: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4207). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in the process of S4207 that a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4207: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4208). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4209), and this processing is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4210). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4210: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the second special symbol reserved ball included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted and provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the extracted counter value. The corresponding counter value is updated (S4211), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the RAM 223, and the second special symbol reserved ball number is stored. When the value of the counter 203e is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, the start winning is determined. Every time, the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the first special symbol reservation value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S4211. It can be adjusted to the values of the ball counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the value of 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified on the basis of the start winning, the number of first special symbol reserved balls of the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  Also, in the process of S4210, if it is determined that a pending ball number command has not been received (S4210: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 confirmation command or a special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4212). If it is determined in the process of S4212 that either the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S4212: Yes), the special symbol confirmation display corresponding to the command is set (S4213). This process is terminated. Specifically, in the processing of S4213, when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the first special symbol is set, and when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set. Set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4212 that neither the special figure 1 confirmation command nor the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether or not a state command has been received (S4214). If a command has been received (S4214: Yes), information corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is set (stored) in the gaming state storage area 223h (S4215), and this process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4214, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4214: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S4216), and this process ends. In the process of S4215, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Then, a process for generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (completely missed, missed reach, jackpot E, F), the display special figure 1 stop type command or the display special figure 2 for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type. Executes processing to set a stop type command.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 55), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4401). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is off (S4401: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S4406. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S4401: Yes), the fluctuation of the first special symbol this time is based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S4402-S4405 for determining the detailed aspect of a display is performed.

  More specifically, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF (S4402), and then a fluctuation pattern selection process for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is executed (S4403). Details of this variation pattern selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 (S4404), the counter value is set in the secondary special figure 1 variation time counter 223e (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

  In the process of S4406, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4406). If the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is off (S4406: No), the main controller 110 Since the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received, the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is ON (S4406: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol this time is based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S4407-S4410 for determining the detailed aspect of a display is performed.

  Specifically, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF (S4407), and then a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S4408). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (S4409), the counter value is set in the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

  In the processing of S4411, it is determined whether either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4411). If it is determined that both the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 are off (S4411: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, when it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S4411: Yes), the flag determined to be on is turned off. In step S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4413). Next, based on the set stop type, a display special figure 1 stop type command or a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is generated (S4414). The process ends.

  The special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the jackpot type when the special symbol lottery result is a big win, In this case, the small hit type is notified, and in the case of losing, it is notified of complete losing or losing reach.

  With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed simultaneously.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection process (S4403) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection process (S4403). This variation pattern selection process (S4403) is one process of the variation display setting process (S4112) (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and details the variation pattern of the first special symbol. This is a process for setting an aspect.

  In the variation pattern selection process (S4403), it is first determined whether or not the super reach has been extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54) ( S4501) If it is determined that the extracted variation pattern is super reach (S4501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the set stop type is small hit C (S4502). In the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the set stop type is not the small hit C (S4502: No), it is then determined whether or not the set stop type is the big hit D (S4503). If it is determined that the stop type is not big hit D (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4504. If it is determined in the process of S4501 that the current variation pattern is not super reach (S4501: No), there is no possibility of setting a special super reach at this time, so the processes of S4502 and S4503 are skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S4504.

  In the process of S4504, based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), the detailed mode of the current fluctuation pattern is displayed. Then, the process proceeds to S4506.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4502 that the set stop type is small hit C (S4502: Yes), or in the process of S4503, the set stop type is jackpot D If it is determined (S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to S4505 for setting special super reach (see FIG. 9B). In the process of S4505, the mode of the current variation pattern is determined to be special super reach (see FIG. 9B) (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506. In the processing of S4506, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined variation pattern is set (S4506), and this processing ends.

  By executing this variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 56), special super reach (see FIG. 9B) is performed only when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit D or a small hit C. Can be executed. Of the lottery results for which special super reach (see FIG. 9B) is set, the jackpot D has a small number of prize balls and is not given a promising state or a short-time state after the jackpot. Lower. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed is set over 100 fluctuation displays after the small hit C is completed. You can get almost the same profit as if you set a short period of time. Therefore, when special super reach is executed, a game can be performed in the hope that a small hit C will be achieved rather than a big hit D. This is because the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the jackpot is D (about 500) can be determined to draw the first special symbol only about 30 to 40 times after the jackpot.

  In a general pachinko machine, when a variation display is executed, a game is played in the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers are aligned (that is, a big win). In the machine 10, when the special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numerals are not arranged. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which a game can be played in the expectation that the degree of advantage will be off (small hit C) rather than the big hit (small hit D) with a low degree of advantage.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 57). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 58, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 68A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 68A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) can be easily drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 59B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 59B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 59B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 26 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 60, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 61A, details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of big hits A to F, small hits A to C, out of reach or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 59B) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to ON (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S6415) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A and B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the others The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored) ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If this is the case (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. When it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59B) is the same process as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, ie, variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 61 (b)) are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, the details of the display setting process (S6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 65, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, and thus a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 59B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) (see S7501: No in FIG. 68A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  In the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, so this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each back image type. Of the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer list (not shown) are generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 59B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, on the basis of the fact that the special symbol lottery is won. When the chance mode A is entered, the second special symbol change time is shortened (to 3 seconds), which is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery (when the jackpot is reached, the second resort mode is easy to set) Since the symbol lottery is easy to be executed, it is possible to cause the player to play with a strong expectation that the player will win a big hit. In addition, in the normal mode, since it is possible to shift to the chance mode A without going through the jackpot, even if the player has not won the jackpot for a long period of time, the game can be inflected. Therefore, even if a so-called big hook has occurred, motivation for the player's game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. Furthermore, the length of the chance mode A to be given (number of lotteries) is different for each small hit type. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has detected that the game has been won to play a game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a type of a small game set for a longer period. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the super-reach mode with a variation time of 60 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display only in the case of a big win or a small win. . In other words, the super reach is not set when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost. By configuring in this way, when it is found that the fluctuation display being executed is super reach (the fluctuation time exceeds 30 seconds), the player recognizes that it will be a small hit or a big win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, in the present embodiment, a special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds can be determined only when a special symbol is won by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a big hit when it is found that the variation display being executed is special reach (the variation time exceeds 60 seconds). Therefore, since the player can sense that the game will be a big hit before the change display ends, it is possible to watch the result of the production with confidence in the remaining change time.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, special super reach is provided as a kind of effect when super reach is determined. This special super reach production mode can be determined only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit D or a small hit C. The jackpot D has a small number of award balls, and since neither a promiscuous state nor a short time state is given after the jackpot, the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, since the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed is set over a maximum of 100 variation displays after the small hit C is completed, 100 for the player. You can get almost the same profit as if you set a short period of time. Therefore, when special super reach is executed, a game can be performed in the hope that a small hit C will be achieved rather than a big hit D.

  In a general pachinko machine, when a variation display is executed, a game is played in the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers are aligned (that is, a big win). In the machine 10, when the special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numerals are not arranged. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which a game can be played in the expectation that the degree of advantage will be off (small hit C) rather than the big hit (small hit D) with a low degree of advantage.

  In the first embodiment, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is subtracted every time the special symbol lottery is executed regardless of whether the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the chance mode counter 203x may be subtracted only when the second special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, when the chance mode A is set, the advantageous special symbol 2 lottery can be surely performed a predetermined number of times regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol lottery. it can. Therefore, the expectation for the chance mode A can be further increased.

  In the first embodiment, the chance mode A is always set when the first special symbol is a lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance mode A is not set. It is good also as a structure which provides a hit classification. Thereby, even if super reach occurs, a case where chance mode A is not set can be provided, so that when super reach occurs, attention can be paid to the effect result.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot D that is the most unfavorable for the player in the jackpot type (that is, the short-time state is not given and the prize ball is the least), or the jackpot type is the most advantageous for the player in the jackpot type Although a special super reach that is selected only when the small hit C is obtained is provided, the condition for generating the special super reach is not limited to this. For example, the special super reach is executed only when the most advantageous jackpot A or the most advantageous jackpot C out of the jackpots among the jackpot types won in the first special symbol lottery. May be. By configuring in this way, the player can be made aware of the most advantageous jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot before the symbol stops. Can do.

  In the first embodiment, after the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the winning flag 203s is referred to, and when the winning flag 203s is on, the lottery result is overwritten. However, the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the winning flag 203s may be referred to before the special symbol lottery is executed, and if it is on, the lottery result may be confirmed to be off and the special symbol lottery may be skipped. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the hit flag 203s is on.

  In the first embodiment, the normal symbol variation time is common (3 seconds) for the normal symbol normal (low probability) state and the normal symbol short-time (high probability) state, and the normal symbol hit probability In addition, although the configuration is such that there is no great difference in the opening period of the electric accessory 640a when it hits the normal symbol, it is not limited to this. When chance mode A is set, it may be arbitrarily determined within a range where it is more advantageous to make a right strike than to make a left strike (a special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed). More specifically, for example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is lowered (for example, to 1/3) or the electric combination is performed so that the number of holding balls is more surely reduced when the right hand is made in the normal mode. The opening period of the object 640a may be shortened (for example, 0.7 seconds × 1 time), or the normal symbol variation time may be lengthened (for example, 10 seconds). Thus, by making a difference in control between the normal low state of the normal symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol, it is possible to reliably reduce the holding ball when the right hand is made in the normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the right-handed game is always performed even in the normal mode so that only the advantageous second special symbol lottery is performed without reducing the holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the chance mode A, the short fluctuation (3 seconds) is selected, but when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the same as the normal mode is performed. The configuration is such that control is executed. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the chance A table may be changed so that the fluctuation time becomes longer (for example, always 120 seconds). With this configuration, if the player makes a left turn accidentally in chance mode A, or if a part of the ball launched by the right strike enters the first entrance 64, the entry Since the variation time of the first special symbol based on the sphere becomes long, the variation display of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times during the long variation time. Therefore, when the right hand is made in the chance mode A, it is possible to execute more lots of advantageous second special symbols.

  In the first embodiment, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to as a variation pattern table over a specific number of special symbol lotteries on condition that the first special symbol lottery has been won. However, the condition for setting the chance mode A is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern table to be referred to is changed according to time information. Specifically, a known RTC (Real-Time Clock) capable of measuring time is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 so that the main control device 110 can grasp the current time. If the gaming state is the normal state in a predetermined time zone (for example, AM 10:00 to AM 11:00), the special symbol lottery is executed and the chance A table 202d3 is referred to. If the gaming state is the normal state during the time period, the normal table 202d1 may be referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed. By comprising in this way, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the time zone when the chance mode A is referred to can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, when the chance mode A is entered, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened and the frequency of the advantageous second special symbol lottery is increased, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. However, it is not limited to this. In the chance mode A, the lottery of the first special symbol may be advantageous. Specifically, while the chance mode A is set, the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 that easily passes the V winning switch 65e3 (see FIG. 5) even if the first special symbol lottery becomes C, D. 7 may be set. That is, in the chance mode A, an open / close pattern that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 may be set for all jackpot types. By configuring in this way, an advantageous opening / closing pattern can be obtained even when the chance mode A is set in a state where the holding ball of the first special symbol exists, and there is a holding ball that becomes a big hit C, D in the holding. Can be set. Even when the player hits the right in the chance mode A, the ball enters the first entrance 64 and becomes a jackpot C or D. Can be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an absurdity in which an unfavorable opening / closing pattern is set even though the game is played in accordance with the instructions on the screen (the launch direction) in the chance mode A and the jackpot is made.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured that the jackpot type that is advantageous in the case of winning the lottery in the second special symbol is likely to become an advantageous jackpot type. . Specifically, for example, when a big win is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the advantageous opening / closing pattern is reduced (for example, 70%), and when the big bonus is won by the first special symbol The ratio at which an advantageous opening / closing pattern is provided may be higher (for example, 100%) or lower (for example, 50%) than the second special symbol depending on the situation. More specifically, for example, in the chance mode A, if the first special symbol lottery started in the state where the second special symbol holding ball exists, the big special win by the second special symbol lottery The opening / closing pattern of the advantageous opening / closing plate 65f1 is set at a higher rate (e.g., 100%) than in the other cases, and in other cases, the rate is lower than the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery ( For example, an advantageous opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 may be set at 50%). With this configuration, when the player hits the right in the chance mode A and happens to enter the first entrance 64 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, It is possible to have a sense of expectation for a probabilistic state. Moreover, in chance mode A, since the variation time of the second special symbol is short (to 3 seconds), it becomes difficult to store the reserved ball of the second special symbol (it becomes full to store one hold), Even if it is changed to left-handed after confirming that the reserve has accumulated, the possibility that the reserve of the second special symbol will be digested before the ball enters the first entrance 64 is increased. it can. Therefore, in the chance mode A, the irregular gaming method of making a left turn after the holding of the second special symbol occurs is suppressed, and the right turn is continued during the chance mode A, and it happens to be the first entrance 64. You can only benefit if the ball enters.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71 to FIG. 75, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the first embodiment described above will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time is an extra long fluctuation of 10 minutes) that is very long compared to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined in the normal mode. Is done. As a result, the gaming efficiency is reduced when the right hand is made in the normal mode, and the irregular gaming method in which the right hand is always made in the normal mode is suppressed.

  However, since the simultaneous variation method (a method in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously) is employed, for example, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4 There is a possibility that a player who performs an irregular game method may appear, such as making a right-hand hit until the number of pieces is stored and returning to the left-hand side when the reserved ball is stored to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, in this modification, in the normal mode, when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is accumulated (becomes one or more), the left-handed is returned and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. As the variation time of the first special symbol, the same ultra long variation (10 minutes) as the variation time of the second special symbol is set. As a result, when the player makes a right strike during the normal mode and returns to the left strike with the second special symbol holding ball accumulated, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have an extremely long fluctuation of 10 minutes. Therefore, since it is possible to form a very disadvantageous state in which a special symbol lottery is executed only about every 10 minutes, the player can be more reliably left-handed in the normal mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partly. This is a point that is changed, and a part of the processing that is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
First, the configuration of the fluctuation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. Similar to the first embodiment, this variation pattern table 202d is a data table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern (variation time) of variation display indicating a lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the variation pattern table 202d in the present modification includes a normal (when no special figure 2 is on hold) table 202d11 and a normal table 202d11 as tables used for determining the variation pattern in the normal mode. A table 202d12 (when special figure 2 is on hold) is provided. The normal (when there is no special figure 2 hold) table 202d11 is a table that is referred to when there is no second special symbol hold ball (0 pieces), and the normal (when special figure 2 hold is held) table 202d12 is This is a table that is referred to when there is a holding ball of the second special symbol (one or more).

  In addition, the variation pattern table 202d includes a continuation / chance B (first half) table 202d21 as a table used to determine a variation pattern in the continuation mode (probability variation state) and the chance mode B (short-time state). A villa / chance B (second half) table 202d22 is provided. The villa / chance B (first half) table 202d21 is a data table that is referred to when the remaining lottery times remain six or more in the villa mode or chance mode B. Further, the Renso / Chance B (second half) table 202d22 is a data table that is referred to when the remaining number of lotteries is 5 or less.

  The variation pattern table 202d is provided with a chance A (first half) table 202d31 and a chance A (second half) table 202d32 as tables used for determining a variation pattern in the chance mode A. The chance A (first half) table 202d31 is a data table that is referred to in the chance mode A when the remaining number of lotteries is six or more. The chance A (second half) table 202d32 is a data table that is referred to when the remaining number of lotteries is 5 or less.

  First, a table referred to in the normal mode will be described. Note that the normal (when no special figure 2 is on hold) table 202d11 is the same as the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) of the first embodiment described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. When the normal (with special figure 2 holding) table 202d12 is referred to, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the special symbol type (first special symbol or second special symbol) and the special symbol lottery Regardless of the result (stop type), a very long fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (10 minutes) is determined.

  When there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, the normal mode is configured such that not only the variation time of the second special symbol but also the variation time of the first special symbol is determined for 10 minutes. Penalty can be increased if you continue to make a right-hand strike. That is, in the normal mode, the reserved ball is generated in the second special symbol in a situation that is unlikely to occur unless the game method of deliberately aiming the second entrance 640 is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular gaming method, while the second special symbol holding ball remains, the first special symbol variation display is also the second special symbol variation display. Also, it has a configuration in which ultra-long fluctuation is set. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular gaming method and returns to the left, the special symbol lottery is performed only about every 10 minutes (the first special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed). A state can be formed. Therefore, the deterrent effect with respect to the player performing an irregular game method can be further improved.

  Next, a table referred to in the extended mode and the chance mode B will be described. Note that the villa / chance B (first half) table 202d21 is the same as the villa / chance B table 202d2 (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. . As shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the consecutive house / chance B (second half) table 202d22 is referenced, the variation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 0 regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. .7 seconds ultrashort variation is determined. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same as that of the extended resort / chance B (first half) table 202d21 (the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 in the first embodiment).

  In the renzo mode and chance mode B, the right game is to play the right game. However, if the number of changes set in the renso mode or chance mode B is within the remaining five, When the chance B (first half) table 202d21 is referred to, a long fluctuation time is set just before the end of the extended mode or the chance mode B, and a lot of reserved balls are accumulated during the fluctuation display of the long fluctuation time. May end up. That is, at the end of the extended game mode or the chance mode B, there may be a state where there are two or more reserved balls of the second special symbol. In this case, even if the player returns to the normal mode and returns to the left in accordance with the correct gaming method, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the second special symbol holding ball becomes 1 or more, and a penalty occurs. (The variation time of the first special symbol is 10 minutes). As described above, if the player is penalized even though the player is executing the correct gaming method, the player may be dissatisfied.

  Therefore, in this modification, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds) over the special symbol variation of the last game 5 times in the extended game mode and chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. It is comprised so that it may become difficult to generate | occur | produce the new entrance with respect to the 2nd entrance 640 during a fluctuation | variation. By comprising in this way, possibility that the number of reservation balls of a 2nd special symbol will become 1 or more can be made low at the time of completion | finish of consecutive resort mode or chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

  Next, a table referred to in the chance mode A will be described. Note that the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is the same as the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the chance A (second half) table 202d32 is referenced, the variation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 0.7 seconds regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. The ultra short fluctuation is determined. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same as the chance A (first half) table 202d31 (chance A table 202d3 in the first embodiment).

  In the chance mode A, as in the consecutive resort mode and the chance mode B, the right game method is to play the game by right-handed. Therefore, when the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is referred to with the remaining number of fluctuations set as the chance mode A within five, a long fluctuation time is set just before the chance mode A ends, and the long There may be a case where a lot of reserved balls are accumulated during the display of the fluctuation time. In other words, even if the chance mode A is finished and the mode is shifted to the normal mode, the second special symbol holding ball becomes 1 or more when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the penalty is reduced. May occur (the variation time of the first special symbol is 10 minutes).

  Therefore, as for the chance A (second half) table 202d32, similarly to the above-mentioned consecutive resort / chance B (second half) table 202d22, it is difficult for new entrance to the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation. In this configuration, ultra short fluctuation is set. By configuring in this way, at the end of the chance mode A, the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Modified Example of First Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311), similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, the variation pattern is selected based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. The process to select.

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) in the modification of the first embodiment, in each of the processes S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation in the first embodiment, respectively. Of the pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), the same processes as those in S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610 are executed.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the modification of the first embodiment, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (that is, the chance mode A) in the process of S603. Is determined (S603: Yes), a chance A selection process for selecting a variation pattern for the first special symbol lottery executed in the chance mode A is executed (S611), and the process proceeds to S608. Transition. Details of this chance A selection process (S611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S605, when it is determined that the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / short time counter 203r are both 0 (that is, the normal mode) (S605: Yes), the first executed in the normal mode. A normal selection process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery is executed (S612), and the process proceeds to S608. Details of the normal selection process (S612) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S605 that either the probability variation counter 203g or the hour / short time counter 203r has a value of 1 or more (that is, the extended mode or chance mode B) (S605: No). In addition, a selection process at the time of consecutive resort for selecting a variation pattern for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the consecutive resort mode or the chance mode B is executed (S613), and the process proceeds to S608. Details of this extended time selection process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74A, details of the above-described chance A selection process (S611) will be described. This chance A selection process (S611) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the chance mode A as described above.

  When this chance A selection process (S611) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 5 (S2601), and if it is determined that it is greater than 5 (S2601: Yes). Then, the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is read from the variation pattern table 202d as a table for determining the variation pattern of the present variation display (S2602), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2601, if it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 5 or less (S2601: No), the chance as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display from the fluctuation pattern table 202d. The A (second half) table 202d32 is read (S2603), and this processing is terminated.

  By performing this chance A selection process (see FIG. 74 (a)), when the special symbol lottery is executed in the final stage of the chance mode A (the remaining lottery number is 5 or less), the chance A ( The variation pattern can be determined with reference to the second half table 202d32. That is, as described above, the super short fluctuation is set so that it is difficult for a new entry to the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation. By configuring in this way, at the end of the chance mode A, the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

  Next, details of the normal selection process (S612) will be described with reference to FIG. This normal selection process (S612) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal mode, as described above.

  When the normal selection process (S612) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S2701), and if it is determined that it is 0 ( (S2701: Yes), the normal (without special figure 2 hold) table 202d11 is read from the fluctuation pattern table 202d as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display (S2702), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S2701: No), the current variation is determined from the variation pattern table 202d. The normal (when special figure 2 is on hold) table 202d12 is read as a table for determining the display variation pattern (S2703), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this normal selection process (see FIG. 74 (b)), if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in the normal mode, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Variation (600 seconds) can be set. In the normal mode, when there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, 10 minutes is determined not only for the variation time of the second special symbol but also for the variation time of the first special symbol. In the normal mode, it is possible to increase the penalty when the right hand is continuously performed. That is, in the normal mode, the reserved ball is generated in the second special symbol in a situation that is unlikely to occur unless the game method of deliberately aiming the second entrance 640 is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular gaming method, while the second special symbol holding ball remains, the first special symbol variation display is also the second special symbol variation display. Also, it has a configuration in which ultra-long fluctuation is set. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular gaming method and returns to left-handed, the special symbol lottery is performed only about every 10 minutes (the first special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed). A state can be formed. Therefore, the deterrent effect with respect to the player performing an irregular game method can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the details of the above-mentioned selection process at the time of extended resort (S613) will be described. This consecutive resort time selection process (S613) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the consecutive resort mode and the chance mode B as described above.

  When the extended time selection process (S613) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is within the range of 1 to 5 (S2801) and out of the range of 1 to 5 ( If it is determined that the value is 0 or 6 or more (S2801: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is in the range of 1 to 5 (S2802). In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203r is out of the range of 1 to 5 (value is 0, or 6 or more) (S2802: No), the remaining number of times of the probability change state remains 6 or more. Or the remaining number of times of the short-time state is 6 or more. Therefore, from the variation pattern table 202d, as a table for determining the variation pattern of the present variation display, the villa / chance B (first half) ) Table 202d21 is read (S2803), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is in the range of 1 to 5 or less (S2801: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is in the range of 1 to 5 or less. If it is determined that there is (S2802: Yes), the extended resort / chance B (second half) table 202d22 is read as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display (S2804), and this process ends.

  By executing this extended time selection process (see FIG. 75), the variation pattern table can be switched according to the remaining number of times of the probability variation state and the short time state. As a result, the variation time of the second special symbol can be made extremely short (0.7 seconds) over the last five variations of the special symbol in the extended game mode or chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for a new entrance to the second entrance 640 to occur during the fluctuation. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more at the end of the extended game mode or the chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the present modification, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. This second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is the same as the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73), whether it is the current state (the extended game mode or the chance mode A), According to the chance mode B or the normal mode), the above-described chance A selection process (see FIG. 74 (a)), normal selection process (see FIG. 74 (b)), and extended time selection By executing one of the processes (see FIG. 75), a process for selecting any one of the tables defined in the variation pattern table 202d is executed. Since the content of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is the same as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, the detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, in the normal mode, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated (becomes one or more) and left-handed to return to the left. When the lottery is executed, the very long fluctuation (600 seconds) same as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, when the player makes a right strike during the normal mode and returns to the left strike with the second special symbol holding ball accumulated, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have an extremely long fluctuation of 10 minutes. Therefore, since it is possible to form a very disadvantageous state in which a special symbol lottery is executed only about every 10 minutes, the player can be more reliably left-handed in the normal mode.

  Further, in this modified example, the remaining lottery times are within 5 (the special symbol lottery is executed within 5 times) in the consecutive mode, chance mode A, and chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. When changing to the normal mode), the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds). This makes it difficult for new balls to enter the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation, so that the number of balls held in the second special symbol can be 1 or more at the end of the consecutive mode or chance mode B. Can be lowered. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

  In the present modification, the ultra-short variation (0.7 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol because the remaining lottery times in the consecutive mode, chance mode A, or chance mode B are 5 It was assumed that the number of times was within, but this is not a limitation. For example, the configuration may be such that the super short variation (0.7 seconds) is selected only once, and in the state of the right-handed gaming method, the super short variation (0.7 seconds) is performed regardless of the number of lotteries. It is good also as composition chosen.

  In this modification, in the normal mode, when there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, the variation time of the first special symbol is extremely long (10 minutes). The condition for switching to the super long fluctuation (600 seconds) is not limited to this. For example, when there is an ordinary symbol holding ball, a very long variation (600 seconds) may be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

  In the present modification, an effect (see FIG. 10B) is given to notify the player to return to the left at the timing when the chance mode A ends (timing when the last variation display in the chance mode A ends). Although it was configured, the execution timing of this effect is not limited to this. For example, an effect (see FIG. 10B) for notifying the player to return to the left at the start of the last variation display in the chance mode A may be executed. It is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation (refer FIG.10 (b)) notified to a player so that it may return to the left strike at the timing which determined that the hold ball for the mode A completion | finish was hold | maintained. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a state in which a plurality of reserved balls of the second special symbol exist at the end of the chance mode A.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. In the first embodiment described above and the modification of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit in the normal mode, the variation time of the second special symbol is short (the lottery of the second special symbol). In the disadvantageous normal state, the game can be inflated even if it is not a big hit.

  In contrast, in the second embodiment, when a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) is set after a big hit, a special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is set. The normal mode and the chance mode A are switched according to the number of times. Thereby, it is set as the structure by which chance mode A is set regularly, and the suppression with respect to a game becoming monotonous in the normal state most disadvantageous for a player is aimed at.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the content of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. The content of the RAM 203 provided in the control device 110 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. is there. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the ROM 202 in the second embodiment has the small hit type selection table 202e deleted from the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. In addition, a variation pattern scenario table 202f is newly added. Details of the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 76B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f. This variation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines the correspondence (variation pattern scenario) between the number of special symbol lotteries and the variation pattern table used to select the variation pattern for each previous jackpot type. . At the end of the jackpot, a scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set out of the variation pattern scenarios defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202f, and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table defined in the scenario at the beginning of the variation. The

  First, if the previous jackpot type is other than jackpot D (that is, jackpot A to C, jackpot E, F) (if the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation state is given 100 times, and the V winning switch In the case of a jackpot in which the time-short state is given 100 times if it does not pass 65e3) will be described. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), among the variation pattern scenarios set when the previous jackpot type is other than jackpot D, the range of 1 to 100 lottery special symbols is displayed as a variation pattern table. The mansion / chance B table 202d2 (see FIG. 16A) is associated. Thus, even if the probability change state (long game mode) is set after the big hit or the short time state (chance mode B) is set, the player can aim the second entrance 640 by hitting the right side. It is possible to form a state in which an advantageous second special symbol discrimination is easily performed.

  In addition, the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the range of the special symbol lottery count of 101 to 150 as the variation pattern table. For this reason, when the consecutive house mode or chance mode B is set after the jackpot, and the lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot, the super long variation (600 Only) is selected. Therefore, if the first special symbol lottery is not executed by left-handed, the gaming efficiency can be extremely deteriorated (the special symbol lottery can be executed only once every 10 minutes if right-handed). .

  Further, a chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the range of 151 to 160 special symbol lotteries as a variation pattern table. For this reason, if a special symbol lottery is executed 50 times after exiting the consecutive house mode or the chance mode B, it is possible to shift to the chance mode A over the 10 special symbol lotteries thereafter. Therefore, even if the extended game mode (probable change state) advantageous to the player or the chance mode B (short-time state) ends and the mode is shifted to the most disadvantageous normal mode, the game is continued until the chance mode A is set. You can make the player think to continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation for the game is reduced in the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player.

  A special table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the range of 161 to 200 lottery times for special symbols as a variation pattern table. In other words, the normal mode continues for 40 special symbols. Although omitted in the drawing, the configuration is such that 10 chance modes A and 40 normal modes are repeated alternately. That is, the number of special symbol lotteries is in the range of 201-210, 251-260, 301-310,... (Every special symbol lottery is executed 40 times in the normal mode, 10 special symbol lotteries. The chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is referred to. On the other hand, the number of special symbol lotteries is within a range of 211 to 250, 261 to 300, 311 to 350,... (Every special symbol lottery is executed 10 times in chance mode A. Over the lottery), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is referred to.

  In this way, every time a special symbol lottery is executed 40 times in the normal mode, the game mode is shifted to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode. Can be thought of as continuing. Therefore, since the player's motivation for the game can be improved, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the previous jackpot type was a jackpot D (when the short time state of the normal symbol is not given after the jackpot), the number of lottery times for the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 25, the normal table 202d1 ( (See FIG. 15B). For this reason, after the jackpot D is over, when the second special symbol lottery is executed over 25 special symbol lotteries, only the super long fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected. Therefore, if the first special symbol lottery is not executed by left-handed, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated (if the right-handed, the special symbol lottery is executed only once every 10 minutes).

  Further, the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the range of 26 to 50 special symbol lotteries as a variation pattern table. For this reason, if the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times after the jackpot D is completed, the chance mode A can be shifted over the 25 special symbol lotteries thereafter.

  Thereafter, the normal mode over 25 special symbol lotteries and the chance mode A over 25 special symbol lotteries are alternately repeated. Therefore, the number of special symbol lottery times in one chance mode A is greater (10 times → 25 times) than after being in other jackpot types and after exiting the consecutive mode or chance mode B. The number of special symbol lotteries in the normal mode is reduced (40 times → 25 times). That is, an opening / closing pattern (see the middle part of FIG. 7) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is set, and as a relief for the most unfavorable big hit that is not given the short time state of the normal symbol, the normal state after the big hit is set. , It can be more advantageous than other jackpot types (the ratio of chance mode A can be increased). Therefore, even when the most unfavorable jackpot D is achieved, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from decreasing.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, in the most disadvantageous normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the normal mode and the chance mode A are set according to the number of lotteries for the special symbol. It is set as the structure switched, and it is set as the structure which transfers to chance mode A periodically. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the most disadvantageous normal state.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 77, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment in that the small hitting medium flag 203w and the chance mode counter 203x are deleted, and the variation counter 203ab and scenario storage area 203ac are newly added.

  The variation counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the jackpot ends. Based on the value of the variation counter 203ab and the variation pattern scenario set at the end of the previous jackpot, a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the scenario storage area 203ac (FIG. 79, S622). The value of the variation counter 203ab is incremented by 1 each time the gaming state update process 3 is executed (see S411 in FIG. 78). Unless the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value of the variation counter 203ab is retained even when the power is turned off, and is reset to 0 when the jackpot is ended (see S2213 in FIG. 80).

  The scenario storage area 203ac is a storage area for storing a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the previous jackpot type. When a special symbol lottery is executed, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac and the value of the variation counter 203ab described above. Is done. The scenario storage area 203ab stores a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot (see S2212 in FIG. 80).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. First, the game state update process 3 (S321) executed in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment will be described. This game state update process 3 (S321) is a process for updating a counter and the like relating to the state of the pachinko machine 10 as in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing gaming state update processing 3 (S321). Of the game state update process 3 (S321) in the second embodiment, the processes of S401 to S404, S407, and S408 are respectively S401 to S404 of the game state update process (see FIG. 30) of the first embodiment. The same processes as those in S407 and S408 are executed.

  In the gaming state update process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the gaming state has not been changed (S407: No), or the gaming state is the normal state. When the status command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the changed gaming state (normal state) is set (S408), the value of the variation counter 203ab is set. 1 is added and updated (S411), and this process ends. By updating the variation counter 203ab during the game state update process 3 (see FIG. 78), when the variation pattern is subsequently determined, the variation pattern table is stored based on the exact number of special symbols drawn. You can choose.

  Next, referring to FIG. 79, the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) is executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. One special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322), similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed. This is a process for selecting.

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (see FIG. 79), in the processing of S601, S602, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32). The same processes as those of S601, S602, and S608 to S610 are executed.

  Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win (S601), and a big win When the jackpot type selection processing (S602) in FIG. 5 is completed, the value of the variation counter 203ab is read.

  Next, a variation pattern table corresponding to the value of the read variation counter 203ab is specified based on the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S622), and the process proceeds to S608. Thereby, in the processing of S608, the variation pattern corresponding to the current lottery result is selected with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of variations after the jackpot and the variation pattern scenario set at the end of the jackpot. Can do. That is, when selecting the variation pattern table, the degree of advantage can be varied according to the number of lotteries by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to according to the number of lotteries for special symbols. In particular, in the normal state that is most disadvantageous for the player (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), it is possible to periodically shift to advantageous chance mode A, so that the game in the normal state is It can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, although illustration was abbreviate | omitted, in this 2nd Embodiment, it replaces with the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (refer FIG. 37) in 1st Embodiment, and the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 3 is performed. The The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 is performed in accordance with the value of the variation counter 203ab and the set variation pattern scenario, as in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79). Thus, a process of selecting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is executed. The contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 are the same as those of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) described with reference to FIG. 79, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot end process 3 (S2121) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment will be described. . This jackpot end process 3 (S2121) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, similarly to the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80). Of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, the processes of S2201 to S2206 are the same as the processes of S2201 to S2206 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

  Further, in the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the process of S2206 is finished, next, from the variation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 76 (b)), it corresponds to the current jackpot type. The fluctuation pattern scenario is read (S2211), and the read fluctuation pattern scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S2212).

  More specifically, if the jackpot type of this time is other than jackpot D (jackpots A to C, E, F), the special resort / chance B table 202d2 is run over 100 special symbols after the jackpot ends. In the 101 to 150 times, the normal table 202d1 is referenced, and thereafter, the chance A table 202d3 is referenced over 10 special symbol lotteries (chance mode A) and 40 times. A scenario is set in which the state (normal mode) in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to is repeated alternately over the special symbol lottery. On the other hand, if the current jackpot is a jackpot D, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to over 25 special symbol lotteries (chance mode A) and normal over 25 special symbol lotteries. A scenario is set in which a state (normal mode) in which the table 202d1 is referenced is alternately repeated.

  When the process of S2212 is completed, the value of the variation counter 203ab is then reset (S2213), and this process ends. By executing the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80), a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type can be set, and thus the variation pattern scenario can be diversified.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in a normal state, a variation pattern table referred to select a variation pattern according to the number of special symbol lotteries after the jackpot ends. In the normal state, the mode is switched to a chance mode A that is more advantageous than the normal mode. Thereby, in the normal state which is the most unfavorable for the player, the degree of advantage can be changed periodically, thereby suppressing the monotonous game.

  Also, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern scenario set after the jackpot is changed according to the jackpot type, and when the disadvantageous jackpot type (jackpot D) is reached, an advantageous variation pattern scenario is set. It is configured. That is, the number of special symbol fluctuations until the end of one chance mode A is large, and the number of special symbol lotteries from the end of one chance mode A until the next chance mode A is set is The configuration is such that few scenarios are set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's gaming motivation from being reduced in the case of an unfavorable jackpot, and to continue the game for a longer time by the player. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern table to be referred to is switched according to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the jackpot is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on), the variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched according to the number of lottery special symbols. . That is, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the scenario set at the end of the jackpot D may be stored in the scenario storage area 203ac with reference to the variation pattern scenario table 202f, for example. By configuring in this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is easy to shift to the chance mode A, and it is possible to achieve an advantageous state in which the number of special symbol lotteries in one chance mode A is long. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 when the hall is opened, expecting that the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Moreover, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pachinko machine 10 that has not been won once per jackpot from being shunned by the player, and to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the second embodiment, the mode is periodically shifted to the chance mode A in the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a special symbol lottery is executed for a first predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) after the gaming state becomes the normal state, the chance mode A is set to a second number (for example, a predetermined number). , 1000 times) special symbol lottery may be set. Then, after the second number of times has elapsed, the normal mode may continue until the next big hit. By configuring in this way, when the first number (500 times) is continuously removed in the normal state, an advantageous state is set over the second number of times, so-called large hookup occurs. In this case, it is possible to provide relief (providing a so-called ceiling). Therefore, even if many deviations occur in the normal state, it can be considered that the player is approaching an advantageous state, and the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. In the second embodiment described above, assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is given a probability variation state of 100 special symbols after the jackpot ends when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot, the gaming state is the normal state. Then, the disadvantageous normal mode and the advantageous chance mode A are switched according to the number of special symbol lotteries executed.

  On the other hand, the third embodiment has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 of each of the above embodiments, and is configured to have a small winning variable winning device 65b that is opened during the small winning game. In addition to the big win in the special symbol lottery, the big win is also started when the special symbol lottery results in a small win and the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 in the small bonus variable winning device 65b. The specification assumes a pachinko machine 10 (a so-called two-type mixing machine). More specifically, there are only two types of gaming states, a short time state and a normal state, and the probability of winning a small hit when the second special symbol lottery is executed rather than the first special symbol lottery. By setting it high, the ball is easy to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the time-short state (it is easy to win a big hit). In addition, in the case where a big hit is made during the time reduction state, the setting ratio of the time reduction state after the end of the big hit is higher than in the normal state. In this specification, the third embodiment is configured to switch between the normal mode and the chance mode A when the short time state is not set (the normal state is set) after the big win won during the short time state. Yes. As a result, even if the advantageous short-time state ends, the chance mode A is set in the normal state that is set thereafter, so that the chance mode The game can be continued until the game ends.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that a variable winning device 65b for small hits is provided in the game board 13 instead of the variable winning device 65. The second variable prize-winning device 650 is provided in the lower left of the front view with respect to the first entrance 64, and the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed. On the other hand, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. It is a point. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 81, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a small winning variable winning device 65b is disposed on the upper right in front of the second entrance 640. The variable winning device 65b is opened when a special symbol lottery is won. The structure of the small winning variable winning device 65b is the same as that of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2 are provided therein. In the present embodiment, the big hit is started after the small hit is completed by passing the V winning switch 65e3 provided in the special discharge channel 65e2 during the small hit. In other words, in addition to the case where a big win is won in a special symbol lottery, a chance to win a big win is also given in the case of a big win.

  In the game board 13, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed at the lower left in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. When the second variable winning device 650 is a big hit, the ball can be entered by opening the second specific winning port 650a which is normally closed, and each time one ball is entered. It is a winning entrance to pay out 15 prize balls. That is, in the third embodiment, the second specific winning port 650a is opened instead of the specific winning port 65a in the case of a big win. The second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened according to an opening / closing pattern determined according to the small hit type when the small hit is made. As a result, in the case of a big hit, the second specific winning opening 650a can be left-handed so that when the big hit is not given a short time state, It is possible to prevent the ball from entering 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol is suspended).

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 82A, the ROM 202 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment in that a small hit type selection table 202e is added. Although details will be described later, the contents of the first random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from the second embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 82B, details of the first random number table 202a in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the first per-random number table 202a in the present embodiment, only “0” is defined as a determination value (random number value) determined to be a special symbol big hit. Of the 300 counter values that can be taken by the first per-random number counter C1, the counter value (random number value) that is a big hit is one, so the probability of a big hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/300. As described above, in the third embodiment, only the short time state and the normal state are provided as the gaming state, and the jackpot is always drawn with a constant lottery probability (1/300).

  Also, in the first random number table 202a, “1 to 299” is defined as a determination value (random value) determined to be a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a big hit (1/300) or a small win (299/300) is obtained. In the small hit, a ball enters the small winning prize winning port 65c, and when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharge channel 65e2, the big hit is started after the end of the small hit. In other words, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol is not drawn because the lottery result is directly won or it is a small bonus that is a chance to pass the V winning switch 65e3. It is advantageous to the player compared to

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, when it becomes "small hit E" selected in 5% of small hits, the opening / closing pattern which a ball | bowl is easy to enter into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided. Is set.

  Next, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types (big hits GI) that can be determined when a special symbol lottery is won. Based on having passed the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit, there are provided three types of big hit types (big hit J to L) that can be started after the small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (c), among the three types of jackpot types that can be determined when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a lottery, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “ “Big hit G” is associated with the range of “0 to 49”. This “big jackpot G” is a jackpot type (short-term jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the short-time state is given 100 times after the jackpot is over. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) corresponding to “big hit G” is 50. The rate at which “big hit G” is determined is 50% (50/100). When the time is short, the advantageous second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed. Therefore, the “big hit G” is advantageous to the player.

  Further, “big hit H” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”. The “big jackpot H” is a big jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the normal state is set after the jackpot is finished (no time-saving state is given). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit H”. The ratio at which “big hit H” is determined is 30% (30/100). Since a normal state that is more disadvantageous than the short-time state is set after the jackpot, the “jackpot H” is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the “jackpot G”.

  “Big jackpot I” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”. This “big jackpot I” is a big jackpot type (special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is four and the game state set after the jackpot is varied according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. More specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the “big hit I” is a normal state, the normal state is set even after the jackpot ends, and the gaming state at the time of winning the “big hit I” is a short-time state. For example, the time-saving state is set 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit I”, so when a special symbol lottery is won The rate at which “big hit I” is determined is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when the “big hit I” is reached, the short-time state is not given, and the number of rounds is the smallest among the big hit types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if a “big hit I” is achieved during the short-running state, the number of rounds is small, but there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again during the short-running state. It is advantageous to the player compared to.

  On the other hand, among the three types of big hit types that can be determined when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49" "Is associated. This “big jackpot J” is a jackpot type (short time jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the short-time state is given 100 times after the jackpot is over. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since 50 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit J”, the V winning switch 65e3 is turned on while the ball is hitting a small amount. The rate at which “big hit J” is determined when it passes is 50% (50/100). This “jackpot J” is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and an advantageous time saving state is given.

  In addition, “big hit K” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”. The “big hit K” is a big hit type (normal big hit) with 16 rounds and a normal state set after the big hit is over (no short-time state is given). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit K”. The rate at which “big hit K” is determined when passing is 30% (30/100). Although the number of rounds is large and is most advantageous for the award sphere, the normal state is set after the jackpot, so the state after the jackpot is disadvantageous.

  “Big hit L” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”. This “big jackpot L” is a big jackpot type (special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is four and the gaming state set after the jackpot is varied according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. It should be noted that the correspondence relationship between the game state at the time of winning and the game state after the jackpot is the same as the above-mentioned “jackpot I”. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit L”. The rate at which the “big hit L” is determined when passing is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when the “big hit I” is reached, the short-time state is not given, and the number of rounds is the smallest among the big hit types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if you get a “big hit I” during the short-running state, the number of rounds is small, but there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again during the short-running state. Will be advantageous to the player.

  Note that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 basically only during the time-short state. That is, it is only the case where a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol that is executed based on the right-handed ball entering the second entrance 640. Therefore, when the big win is caused by the passing of the ball through the V winning switch 65e3, basically, the big win J, L, so that the short-time state is given after the big win. That is, if the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the time-shortening state, the time-shortening state is entered again at a rate of 70%. Therefore, once it shifts to the short time state, the big hit and the short time state are easily repeated, which is extremely advantageous for the player.

  In the normal state, basically, the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 and does not win a big hit. However, it is possible to execute an irregular game method in which the second special symbol is drawn by intentionally right-handing in the normal state and the ball is expected to pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit. There is sex. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the “big hit L” is obtained in the normal state, the ratio in which the short time state is given when the big hit is achieved is 50% by adopting a configuration in which the short time state is not given. (In the normal state, it is the same as the case where a big win is won in the special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is made by right-handed, the degree of expectation given to the short-time state is not different from that in the case of left-handed, so the merit of right-handing in the normal state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right hand is made even in a normal state.

  In the present embodiment, only “big jackpot L” is configured as a special jackpot that changes whether or not a short-time state is given depending on the gaming state, but “big jackpot J” may also be a special jackpot. That is, when a big hit is made by passing the V winning switch 65e3 in the normal state, the normal state may be set after the big win. By comprising in this way, the inhibitory effect with respect to the irregular game method which always strikes right can be heightened more.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is a big hit, an advantageous time-short state is given only in the case of “big hit G”, and “big hit H” is given. Or, when it becomes “big hit I”, the normal state is set. Therefore, when the big hit is made in the normal state, the ratio of the short time state being given is 50%. In the short-time state, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed, and the second special symbol lottery has an open / close pattern that makes it easy to enter the special discharge flow path 65e2 with a probability of 1/20. The small hit type set (small hit E). Therefore, if the ball is launched by aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handing during the short-time state of 100 times, it is possible to form a very advantageous state where a big hit is made again with high probability.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery executed in the short-time state is a big hit, in addition to the “big hit G”, the short-time state is also given after the big hit is ended. In other words, when a special symbol lottery is won during the time-short state, the time-short state is given at a rate of 70%. That is, in the time-saving state, even if a special symbol lottery is won or a big win is achieved by passing through the V winning switch 65e3, the time-saving state is given at a rate of 70%. Therefore, once the short-time state is reached, the jackpot and the short-time state are repeated with a high probability (about 70%), which is extremely advantageous for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83A, details of the small hit type selection table 202e in the third embodiment will be described. In the small hit type selection table 202e in the third embodiment, the small hit type is associated with each value range of the small hit type counter C5 and is defined.

  More specifically, “small hit D” is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 94”. This “small hit D” is similar to the first round of “big hit C, D” in the first embodiment (see the middle row in FIG. 7), and the small winning prize winning opening 65c is short (0.2 seconds). Since an opening / closing pattern that is only opened is set, it is an unfavorable small hit type that makes it difficult to enter the small winning winning opening 65c (it is difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). Since the flow path solenoid 65k also performs the same operation as the first round of the big hit in the first embodiment or the like (see the upper part of FIG. 7), the ball hits the small hitting prize opening 65c during the open period of 0.2 seconds. If it is possible to enter the ball, the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2. That is, when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e, the big hit is started after the small hit. Out of 100 random number values (counter values) that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 95 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “small hit D”. In this case, the ratio of “small hit D” is 95% (95/100).

  “Small E” is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “95 to 99”. This “small hit E” is similar to the first round of “big hit A” in the first embodiment (see the lower part of FIG. 7), and the opening period of the small hit prize winning opening 65c and the flow solenoid 65k is turned on. Since an opening / closing pattern that matches the period (the opening period of the special discharge flow path 65e2) is set, it is easy to enter the small hitting winning opening 65c (the ball is easy to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). It is a hit type. When the ball passes the V winning switch 65e during the small hit, the big win is started after the small hit. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the random number value (counter value) corresponding to “small hit E” is five. In this case, the ratio of “small hit E” is 5% (5/100).

  When the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is a small hit with a probability of 299/300. Then, 5% (1/20) of the small hit becomes “small hit E” where the ball easily passes the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, if you make a right-hand hit during the 100 short-time states, you have a chance to win a special symbol lottery with a probability of 99% or more, or at least one “small hit E” within the short-time number (No. 1) 2) The probability of 100 consecutive “small hits D” by lottery of special symbols is 0.42%). Therefore, if the time is shortened, it will be a big hit with a probability of 99% or more. Once the time is short, the special symbol lottery will result in a “hit H” (distribution 30%) or when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed. The jackpot and the short-time state are repeated until the normal status is set after the jackpot. That is, it becomes a very advantageous state in which the jackpot and the short time state are repeated with a probability of about 70%.

  Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the third embodiment. This variation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines the variation pattern scenario for each previous jackpot type, similarly to the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the second embodiment.

  First, the variation pattern scenario set when the previous jackpot type is jackpot K (16 round normal jackpot) will be described. As described above, the jackpot K is one of the jackpot types that is started after the jackpot is ended based on the fact that the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the normal state is set after the jackpot. . As described above, it is basically during the short time that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and becomes a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot K is a jackpot that triggers the return to the disadvantageous normal state after the advantageous state in which the jackpot and the short-time state are likely to be repeated ends.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the jackpot type is jackpot K, among the variation pattern scenarios set at the end of the jackpot K, the number of lotteries for special symbols is in the range of 1 to 25 times. A normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated as the variation pattern table. Thereby, immediately after the big hit K is completed, a disadvantageous state (normal mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is set.

  In addition, the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated as a variation pattern table with a range of 26 to 35 special symbol lottery times. For this reason, when the winning of the special symbol is over 25 times after the jackpot K ends, the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed over the 10 special symbol lotteries. (The variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol) (chance mode A is entered). For this reason, while the chance mode A is set, it is easier to win a small hit by playing the game with the right hand hitting the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the chance mode A, since the possibility that the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit is increased, an advantageous state in which a big hit is likely to occur is obtained. Note that, as described above, the small hit E where the opening / closing pattern in which the sphere easily flows down to the special discharge channel 65e2 is set is selected at a rate of 5% (1/20) when the small hit is reached. Therefore, in the chance mode A, if the right-handed operation is continued, the jackpot is made with a probability of about 1/20. The ratio of all 10 special symbol lotteries executed in chance mode A to small hit D (a small hit type that makes it difficult for the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2) is the small bonus in the special symbol lottery. To the 10th power (about 57.9%) obtained by multiplying the probability (1/300) by the probability (19/20) of the small hit D. Therefore, since the ratio (expectation) that is a big hit in one chance mode A is about 42.1%, when shifting to the chance mode A, the player is expected to have a big hit Can do. In addition, since the chance mode A is a kind of normal state as a gaming state, when the special big hit (big hit I, L) is reached, the normal state is set after the big hit. That is, the degree of expectation that is a big hit is high, but the degree of expectation that a time-short state is given when the big win is reached is 50%, which is the same as in the normal mode.

  The special table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated as the variation pattern table after the special symbol lottery number is 31 or more. For this reason, when the chance mode A ends, the normal mode is disadvantageous for the player until a big hit is made thereafter.

  In this way, when the jackpot K, which is the main trigger for the end of the short-time state, which is extremely advantageous for the player, is reached, the expectation of the jackpot is high because the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times after the jackpot K ends. The mode is shifted to the chance mode A. By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends and the normal state is entered, the chance mode A set after that becomes a big hit and the time-saving state is set again. The game can be continued at least until the chance mode A ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately after the advantageous time-short state is ended, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is other than jackpot K (jackpot G to J, L), and the short-time state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot (special jackpot in the case of a short-term jackpot, or during the short-time state) In the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 100 times (that is, the number of lotteries in which the normal symbol is in the short-time state), the range pattern / chance B table 202d2 (see FIG. 16 (a)) is associated. As a result, during the time saving state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal mode, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily performed, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, when the number of lotteries for the special symbol exceeds 100, the normal state is returned from the short-time state, so that the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. )) Is associated. Thereby, after shifting to the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is very difficult to be executed (the variation time becomes a very long fluctuation of 10 minutes), so that the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by left-handed be able to.

  When the jackpot type is other than the jackpot K (jackpot G to J, L), and the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot (the short-time state is not given) (when the jackpot H becomes H, or In the case of a special jackpot during the normal state), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated as a variation pattern table regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. Therefore, after the big hit, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes difficult to be executed without depending on the number of lotteries of the special symbol, so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed by left-handed.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the player wins a big hit K in the short time state that is advantageous to the player, and the player shifts to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a special number of special symbols is drawn. Is executed, the mode is shifted to the chance mode A which is relatively advantageous to the player. In the chance mode A, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and it is easy to win a small hit and make the ball flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the expectation of a big hit is increased. Therefore, even when the advantageous time-short state has ended, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued until the chance mode A ends at the minimum. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's willingness to play when the most advantageous state has ended.

  In the third embodiment, when a special jackpot is made in the chance mode A, the game state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a normal state may be set when a special big hit is obtained in the normal mode, and a short time state may be set when the short time state and the special big hit are obtained in the chance mode A. By configuring in this way, when the chance mode A is a big hit, the expectation degree of the short time state can be made equal to the big hit in the short time state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further increased. be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the gaming state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e may be easily set when a small hit is made. More specifically, for example, when the small hit is made in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or the small hit type is not changed and the small hit E is changed. The opening / closing pattern of the small winning winning opening 65c may be the same as the small winning D in the normal mode (opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). By configuring in this way, it is difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 even if the right-handed operation is always performed during the normal mode, so that the merit of performing the right-handed operation during the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn during the normal mode.

  In the third embodiment, after the jackpot K is over, the special mode lottery number is in the range of 26 to 35 times, so that the chance mode A is set. However, the lottery number for shifting to the chance mode A and the chance The number of lotteries in which mode A continues may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set in the range of 91 to 100 special symbol lotteries. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it seem that the game is to be continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot K ends. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which becomes the chance mode A in the range of the number of lottery times of a special symbol 26 times-30 times. By reducing the number of times of entering the chance mode A, the chance mode A after the short-time state ends can be a big hit, and the ratio of pulling back the short-time state can be reduced, so that the gambling of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Conversely, the number of lottery times for the chance mode A may be increased. If the number of lottery times for chance mode A increases, the expectation that will be a big hit in chance mode A will increase, so that when the short-time state ends, the game can be continued more reliably until chance mode A ends. it can.

  In the third embodiment, the mode is shifted to the chance mode A only after the jackpot K is completed, but the mode may be shifted to the chance mode A even when another jackpot is reached. For example, when the jackpot is H, the mode may be shifted to the chance mode A. With this configuration, the chance mode is obtained when a special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) when the normal state is set and the normal state is set in the short-time state. Since the process shifts to A, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the reduction of the player's willingness to play when the time-saving state ends and shifts to the normal mode. In this case, when a big hit H is obtained in the normal state, a variation pattern scenario to which the chance mode A is given is not set, and the chance mode A is given only when the big hit H is given during the short-time state. It is good also as a structure which sets a fluctuation pattern scenario. Thereby, only the normal state after the completion of the time reduction state can be made advantageous without changing the advantageous degree of the normal state other than the normal state set after the completion of the time reduction state.

  In the third embodiment, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set regardless of the gaming state at the time when the jackpot K is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot K is set. The scenario set according to the gaming state and mode at the time of winning may be made different. More specifically, for example, in the normal mode, when the big hit K is won by right-handed, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to regardless of the number of times is set, and the big hit is made in the short-time state or the chance mode A If K is reached, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the merit in the case of right-handed in the normal mode, so it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method in which right-handed is always performed.

  In the present embodiment, only one number of lottery times to shift to the chance mode A after the big win is provided, but the number of lottery patterns to which the number of lottery times to shift to the chance mode A is different is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which provides a scenario. More specifically, a plurality of normal jackpots (jackpots K1, K2,...) Are provided as jackpot types that start when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, and chances are given for each jackpot type. It is good also as a structure which sets the fluctuation pattern scenario from which the number of lottery transfers to mode A differs. More specifically, for example, the jackpot K1 is 25 times, the jackpot K2 is 50 times, the jackpot K3 is 75 times, etc., and the number of lottery transitions to the chance mode A may be varied by 25 times. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify when to move to the chance mode A.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set after the jackpot is set, the chance mode A is set only once. However, the chance mode A is set multiple times. Also good. Specifically, for example, after the jackpot K ends, the chance mode A may be set in a range of 26 to 35 times, a range of 101 to 105 times, and a range of 1000 to 2000 times. Good. Thus, even after the first chance mode A is finished without winning the jackpot, it is possible to make it seem that the game is continued until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even if a big hook occurs, the game can be made to continue until the third chance mode A is entered. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 77) in that the probability variation counter 203g, the probability variation setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, and the probability variation valid flag. 203o and the probability variation valid timer 203p are deleted, and a jackpot start flag 203ad, a V pass counter 203ae, a V pass valid flag 203af, a V pass valid timer 203ag, and a winning status storage area 203ah are added.

  The jackpot start flag 203ad is a flag indicating whether the jackpot is started after the jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203ad is on, the jackpot start is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2512 in FIG. 87), and if the jackpot start flag 203ad is off, the jackpot is terminated as it is. The big hit start flag 203ad is set to ON when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit. Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 87).

  The V passage counter 203ae, the V passage validity flag 203af, and the V passage validity timer 203ag correspond to the probability variation passage counter 203i, the probability variation validity flag 203o, and the probability variation validity timer 203p in the second embodiment, respectively. These contents are the same as the probability variation pass counter 203i, the probability variation valid flag 203o, and the probability variation valid timer 203p in the second embodiment, except that they are referred to or updated during the small hit. That is, the number of balls that have passed the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit is counted by the V passing counter 203ae. The V pass valid flag 203af is used to determine whether or not the pass of the V winning switch 65e3 is valid. Furthermore, a period during which passage of the V winning switch 65e3 is effective after the passage solenoid 203k is set to OFF is set by the V passage effective timer 203ag.

  The winning state storage area 203ah is a storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a short time state. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the short-time state (if the value of the short-time / medium counter 203r is 1 or more), the winning state storage area 203ah includes “ 01H "is stored. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is 0), “00H” is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah as information indicating the normal state. Is done. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203ah is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the special jackpot ends (see S2223 in FIG. 86). That is, at the end of the special jackpot, if “01H” indicating that the gaming state at the time of winning is in the time-saving state is stored in the storage area 203ah at the time of winning, the time-shortening state is set as the gaming state after the winning of the jackpot, If “00H” indicating that the game state at the time of winning is the normal state is stored in the storage area 203ah at the time of winning, the normal state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process 4 (S2021) executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  The jackpot control process 4 in the third embodiment is a process for opening or closing the second specific prize winning opening 650a for each jackpot round. Of the jackpot control process 4 (S2021), the processes of S2101, S2102, and S2104 to S2111 are respectively S2101, S2102, and S2104 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing as that in steps S2111 is executed. On the other hand, in the jackpot control process 4 (S2021), the processes of S2103, S2112 and S2113 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) are deleted. These processes are processes for executing the operation of the flow solenoid 65k in the small winning variable winning device 65b, the monitoring of the V winning switch 65e3, and the like, and the second variable winning device 650 is activated during the big hit. This is because the process is unnecessary in the third embodiment.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 85) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2111 that the jackpot end timing is reached (S2111: Yes), the jackpot end process in the second embodiment is performed. Instead of 3 (see FIG. 80), jackpot end processing 4 is executed (S2131), and this processing ends. Details of the jackpot end process 4 (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 4 (S2131). This jackpot end process 4 (S2131) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, similarly to the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

  Of the jackpot end process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment, in the processes of S2204 and S2211 to S2213, S2204 and S2211 of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S2213 are executed.

  Further, when the jackpot end process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is a short-time jackpot (that is, jackpot G, J) (S2221). If the time is big hit (S2221: Yes), the process moves to S2204, and the value of the hour / medium counter 203r is set to 101, so that after the big hit, the time is shortened until the 101st special symbol lottery is executed. Settings are made so that a state is assigned (S2204). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2221 that the time-hit big hit is not (S2221: No), then it is determined whether the current big hit type is a special big hit (big hit I, L) (S2222). In the processing of S2222, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a special jackpot (S2222: Yes), information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is read from the winning status storage area 203ah (S2223), It is determined whether or not the game state at the time of winning is a short time state (S2224).

  In the processing of S2224, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is the short-time state (S2224: Yes), the processing proceeds to S2204 in order to set the gaming state after the big hit to the short-time state. On the other hand, in the processing of S2224, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the time saving state (that is, the normal state) (S2224: No), the processing proceeds to S2225 without setting the time saving state. . Also, in the processing of S2222, even when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not a special jackpot (S2222: No), the current jackpot is a normal jackpot, and it is not necessary to set the value of the hour and middle counter. Goes to S2225.

  In the processing of S2225, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state according to the value of the hour / medium counter 203r is set (S2225), the jackpot flag 203v is set to OFF (S2226), The process proceeds to S2211. By executing the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 86), it is possible to accurately set the time reduction state according to the gaming state and the jackpot type at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the small hit control process 4 (S2022) executed in place of the small hit control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. . FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this small hitting control process 4 (S2022).

  Of the small hitting control process 4 (see FIG. 87), in each process of S2501 to S2510, each of S2501 to S2510 of the small hitting control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

  Further, in the small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the small hit end timing (S2509: Yes), the big hit start flag 203ad is turned on. If it is determined that it is on (S2511: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S2512). At this time, information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah from the value of the hour / short counter 203r. Next, the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is reset to 0 (S2513), and the process proceeds to S2510.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2511 that the big hit start flag 203ad is not on (that is, it is off) (S2511: No), the processing of S2512 and S2513 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2510. .

  Further, in the small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, if it is determined that it is not the small hit end timing in the process of S2509 (S2509: No), a winning process (S2514) and an abnormal process are performed. (S2515) is executed. Each of these processes is the same process as the winning process (see FIG. 49) and the abnormal process (see FIG. 50) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and will be described in a simplified manner. When the process is executed (S2514), it is monitored whether or not it is an effective period and whether or not the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, and it is determined that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the effective period. The jackpot start flag 203ad is set on. As a result, it is possible to set the big hit start only when it is ON with reference to the state of the big hit start flag 203ad at the end of the big hit.

  In the abnormal process (S2515), the number of balls that have entered the small winning prize opening 65c, and the number of balls that have been discharged to the outside through the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e3, Are compared to determine whether all the balls that have entered the inside of the small winning variable winning device 65b are normally discharged, and an error is notified when the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged do not match. Is done. Thereby, when troubles, such as a ball clogging, generate | occur | produce in the inside of the variable prize apparatus 65b for small hits, the malfunction can be alert | reported to the store clerk etc. of a hall | hole early.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is based on the pachinko machine 10 provided with only two types of a normal state that is disadvantageous as a gaming state and an advantageous short time state. In the third embodiment, when it is determined that a big hit K is obtained in an advantageous time-short state and a transition to an unfavorable normal state is established, a special symbol lottery is executed the first number of times (25 times). The mode is shifted from the normal mode to the relatively advantageous chance mode A. This chance mode A continues for the second number (10 times) of the special symbol lottery, and if the big win is not performed during the second number of special symbol lotteries, It is configured to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode. Thereby, even if it transfers from an advantageous short time state to an unfavorable normal state, a game can be continued in anticipation of the chance mode A which transfers after that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being reduced at the time when the advantageous time saving state is ended, and to maintain the player's willingness to play until at least the chance mode A ends.

  In the third embodiment, when a special jackpot is made in the chance mode A, the game state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a normal state may be set when a special big hit is obtained in the normal mode, and a short time state may be set when the short time state and the special big hit are obtained in the chance mode A. By configuring in this way, when the chance mode A is a big hit, the expectation degree of the short time state can be made equal to the big hit in the short time state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further increased. be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the gaming state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e may be easily set when a small hit is made. More specifically, for example, when the small hit is made in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or the small hit type is not changed and the small hit E is changed. The opening / closing pattern of the small winning winning opening 65c may be the same as the small winning D in the normal mode (opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). By configuring in this way, it is difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 even if the right-handed operation is always performed during the normal mode, so that the merit of performing the right-handed operation during the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn during the normal mode.

  In the third embodiment, after the jackpot K is over, the special mode lottery number is in the range of 26 to 35 times, so that the chance mode A is set. However, the lottery number for shifting to the chance mode A and the chance The number of lotteries in which mode A continues may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set in the range of 91 to 100 special symbol lotteries. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it seem that the game is to be continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot K ends. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which becomes the chance mode A in the range of the number of lottery times of a special symbol 26 times-30 times. By reducing the number of times of entering the chance mode A, the chance mode A after the short-time state ends can be a big hit, and the ratio of pulling back the short-time state can be reduced, so that the gambling of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Conversely, the number of lottery times for the chance mode A may be increased. If the number of lottery times for chance mode A increases, the expectation that will be a big hit in chance mode A will increase, so that when the short-time state ends, the game can be continued more reliably until chance mode A ends. it can.

  In the third embodiment, the mode is shifted to the chance mode A only after the jackpot K is completed, but the mode may be shifted to the chance mode A even when another jackpot is reached. For example, when the jackpot is H, the mode may be shifted to the chance mode A. With this configuration, the chance mode is obtained when a special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) when the normal state is set and the normal state is set in the short-time state. Since the process shifts to A, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the reduction of the player's willingness to play when the time-saving state ends and shifts to the normal mode. In this case, when a big hit H is obtained in the normal state, a variation pattern scenario to which the chance mode A is given is not set, and the chance mode A is given only when the big hit H is given during the short-time state. It is good also as a structure which sets a fluctuation pattern scenario. Thereby, only the normal state after the completion of the time reduction state can be made advantageous without changing the advantageous degree of the normal state other than the normal state set after the completion of the time reduction state.

  In the third embodiment, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set regardless of the gaming state at the time when the jackpot K is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot K is set. The scenario set according to the gaming state and mode at the time of winning may be made different. More specifically, for example, in the normal mode, when the big hit K is won by right-handed, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to regardless of the number of times is set, and the big hit is made in the short-time state or the chance mode A If K is reached, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the merit in the case of right-handed in the normal mode, so it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method in which right-handed is always performed.

  In the present embodiment, only one number of lottery times to shift to the chance mode A after the big win is provided, but the number of lottery patterns to which the number of lottery times to shift to the chance mode A is different is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which provides a scenario. More specifically, a plurality of normal jackpots (jackpots K1, K2,...) Are provided as jackpot types that start when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, and chances are given for each jackpot type. It is good also as a structure which sets the fluctuation pattern scenario from which the number of lottery transfers to mode A differs. More specifically, for example, the jackpot K1 is 25 times, the jackpot K2 is 50 times, the jackpot K3 is 75 times, etc., and the number of lottery transitions to the chance mode A may be varied by 25 times. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify when to move to the chance mode A.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set after the jackpot is set, the chance mode A is set only once. However, the chance mode A is set multiple times. Also good. Specifically, for example, similarly to the second embodiment, a state in which a variation pattern is determined with reference to the normal table 202d1 (normal mode) and a variation pattern is determined with reference to the chance A table 202d3. It is good also as a structure which switches a state (chance mode A) periodically. More specifically, for example, as a variation pattern scenario set at the end of jackpot K, the normal table 202d1 is associated with a range of 1 to 25 special symbol lottery times (the value of the variation counter 203ab). In addition, the chance A table 202d3 is associated with the range of 26 to 35 times, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the range of 36 to 60 times, and thereafter, for 10 special symbol lotteries. The chance A table 202d3 and the normal table 202d1 for 25 special symbol lotteries may be repeated. Further, as another example of shifting to the multiple chance mode A, for example, in the range of 26 to 35 times, the range of 101 to 105 times, and the range of 1000 to 2000 times after the big hit K ends. The chance mode A may be set. Thus, even after the first chance mode A is finished without winning the jackpot, it is possible to make it seem that the game is continued until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even if a big hook occurs, the game can be made to continue until the third chance mode A is entered. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 102, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment described above, the first entrance 64 that allows a ball to easily enter by left-handed hitting and the second entrance 640 that allows a ball to easily enter by right-handed hitting are provided. The winner of the second special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the mouth 640 is the big winner in the first special symbol lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 It is configured to be more advantageous to the player than to become (the probability variation state is easily given after the big hit). And in a normal state, the structure which switches the disadvantageous normal mode in which the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is not easily executed, and the advantageous chance mode A in which the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is easily executed according to the lottery number of the special symbol I was trying.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are easily executed by left-handed, and the second special symbol lottery is executed by right-handed. The board surface is configured so that it can be easily done. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 having a control specification that executes a lottery to determine whether or not the special symbol lottery condition is to be dropped from the probability variation state every time the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied is assumed. Based on these assumptions, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage (easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol) is determined according to the timing (number of lotteries) when falling from the probability variation state to the normal state. The structure is different. More specifically, it is specified by setting a scenario that refers to the variation pattern table in which the first special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed until the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times after the transition to the probability variation state. In the case of falling to the normal state before the number of special symbol lotteries is executed, an advantageous state is formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed even if the left-handed is returned. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide relief for a case where the player has fallen quickly from the probability change state to the normal state, so that the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in configuration in that a distribution unit 660 is provided in the game board 13 instead of the first entrance 64. The contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partly changed, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partly changed, and the main controller 110 A part of the process executed by the MPU 201 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 88, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting unit 660 is disposed at a position (below the variable display device unit 80) where the first entrance 640 is disposed in the second embodiment. Is different. Although details will be described later, the sorting unit 660 is configured such that a ball can enter through a passage opening provided in an upper portion thereof. Inside the sorting unit 660, a first entrance slot 64 where a lottery of the first special symbol is executed when a ball enters the ball, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball. A central second entrance 640c is provided, and a ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 through the passage is distributed to any of these entrances. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed by launching a ball aiming at the sorting unit 660 by left strike.

  Here, the configuration of the sorting unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 660. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front surface side, and the cover body is made of a member that can be seen through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), an upper part of the sorting unit 660 is provided with a passing port through which a sphere can enter, and transmission that can detect that the sphere has passed through the passing port. A type of incoming ball sensor 660a is arranged. A distribution member 900 for distributing the spheres to the first entrance 64 or the central second entrance 640c is provided below the passage. A first entrance 64 is disposed in the lower left direction of the sorting member 900 when viewed from the front, and a central second entrance 640c is disposed in the lower left direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front. The balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first entrance opening 64 and the central second entrance 640c.

  The sorting member 900 is configured to be able to receive a ball that has entered the sorting unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When a ball is received in the housing portion 900a, the entire sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front depending on the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is inclined in a downward direction toward the lower left direction (see FIG. 89B), and as a result, the first input disposed in the lower left direction as viewed from the front with respect to the sorting member 900. A sphere falls toward the sphere port 64a (the sphere is guided to the first entrance port 64). Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b. Yes.

  On the other hand, the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660 has a back side (passage opening) where the magnet 900b is disposed in a state where the sorting member 900 is not rotating clockwise or counterclockwise. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed at a position on the center line). The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side.

  The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 is located at a position where the sorting member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b is located directly above (on the center line of a space where a game ball at the passage opening can be inserted by about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), there is no stopping at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly upwards. It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 900b is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upward position), the sorting member 900 is repelled by the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, so that the sorting member 900 is either left or right. It rotates and either the accommodating part 900a or the accommodating part 900b turns to the side (game machine upper side) which receives the ball | bowl which enters into the distribution unit 660. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b and causing the clogging of the ball.

  Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 are repelled, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the ball to the first entrance 64a. It is possible to prevent 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the sphere to the first entrance 64, the accommodating portion 900c is directed upward, and the accommodating portion 900c receives the sphere that has entered the sorting unit 660 next. When the accommodating portion 90c receives the sphere, the sorting member 900 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise by the weight of the received sphere, and the accommodating portion 900c is inclined in a direction inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere falls from the housing portion 900c and enters the central second entrance 640c (the sphere is guided to the central second entrance 640c). As described above, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the balls entering the sorting unit 660 to the first entrance 64 and the center second entrance 640c. The balls can be distributed evenly to the center second entrance 640c and awarded. Thereby, the lottery of the 1st special symbol and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be executed simultaneously.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 90A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90A, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the second embodiment in that a falling lottery table 202g is added. Further, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment.

  The falling lottery table 202g is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the probability variation state to the normal state (falling lottery) in the probability variation state of the special symbol. Counter value) is stored. In the special symbol probability changing state, each time the special symbol lottery is executed, the falling lottery table 202g is referred to and it is determined whether or not to fall into the normal state. Details of the falling lottery table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90B, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment will be described. As in the second embodiment, the first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which a jackpot type is defined in association with each possible value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the fourth embodiment, four jackpot types are provided. That is, “big hit M” and “big hit N” that can be determined when the first special symbol wins, and “big hit O” that can be determined when the big special lottery wins, “Big hit P” is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), if the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of “0 to 69”, the big hit type is “big hit” M "is determined. This “big hit M” has 16 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening / closing pattern (see the middle of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the largest in the jackpot, it is advantageous to the player in terms of the number of winning balls that can be acquired, but since the probability change state is unlikely to be set after the jackpot, it is disadvantageous as the gaming state after the jackpot Become.

  Further, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of “70 to 99”, “big hit N” is determined as the big hit type. This “big hit N” has 4 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening / closing pattern (see the middle of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the smallest and it is unlikely that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot, the “jackpot N” is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of “0 to 69” in the case of the big win in the second special symbol lottery, “Big hit O” is determined. This “big hit O” has 16 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which an easy opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the largest and the probability variation state is likely to be set after the big hit, the “big hit O” is the most advantageous jackpot type.

  Further, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of “70 to 99”, “big hit P” is determined as the big hit type. This “big hit P” has 4 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which an easy opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. Although the number of rounds is the smallest, there is a high probability that a probabilistic state will be set after the jackpot, so “Big Jack P” is a game after jackpot than the jackpot (jackpot M, N) determined by the lottery of the first special symbol The situation is advantageous.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the big win is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability variation state is hardly given (it is difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3), and only the big hit type is determined. It is configured. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, only the jackpot type that is likely to be given a probability change state (a ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3) is determined. Thereby, the advantage in the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed can be further increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when left-handed, the balls are configured to easily enter the sorting member 900. The distribution member 900 is configured to alternately distribute the first entrance 64 provided in the interior and the central second entrance 640c every time a ball enters. For this reason, even in a normal state unfavorable to the player, left-handed makes it possible to perform the disadvantageous first special symbol lottery and the advantageous second special symbol lottery almost in half. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the normal state in the hope that the player will win a big win through an advantageous second special symbol drawing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90C, details of the second random number table 202c in the fourth embodiment will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments (first to third embodiments), the normal symbol hit state, the normal symbol hit probability, the normal symbol variation time, and the normal symbol hit are obtained in the normal state of the normal symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol. In this case, there is no great difference in the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is significantly reduced compared to the short time state (high probability state) of the normal symbol. ing.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), only “0” is defined as the value of the second random number counter C4 that is a normal symbol hit in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. ing. On the other hand, the same random number value (counter value) as that in each of the above embodiments is defined for the short time state (high probability state) of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is 1/240. Therefore, even if the right-hand strike is executed in the normal state, the normal symbol is rarely hit.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol is 30 seconds (3 seconds in the short time state), and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the normal symbol Is 0.2 times x 1 time (1 second x 2 times in the short-time state). Therefore, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, it takes time until the normal symbol lottery result is obtained after passing through the through gate 67, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol becomes extremely low, and the normal symbol Even when the symbol is hit, an opening period in which it is difficult to enter the ball during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set. Therefore, in the normal state, in the expectation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed and win a big game, it is possible to enhance the deterrent effect against the irregular gaming method in which the player always makes a right turn.

  Next, the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 91A, the variation pattern table 202d of the fourth embodiment is provided with two types of variation pattern tables. Specifically, a normal table 202d1 and a probability change granting table 202d4 are provided.

  The normal table 202d1 is referred to when determining the variation pattern mainly in the normal state, as in the above embodiments. In the present embodiment, the normal table 202d1 is referred to when determining the variation pattern even in the time-short state or part of the probability variation state.

  The probability change granting table 202d4 has a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the jackpot is over when the game state after the big hit becomes a probable change state when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot. ) Is a table that is referenced throughout the lottery of special symbols. Although details will be described later, during the period when the probability change granting table 202d4 is referenced (within 20 or 50 times after the end of the jackpot), the lottery of the first special symbol becomes long fluctuation, so left-handed And, while the first special symbol is fluctuating long, the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times. That is, when left-handed, it can be biased to the advantageous second special symbol lottery. Note that, during the probability variation state, only the second special symbol that is advantageous to the right hand can be drawn, so there is no merit of executing the left hand. For this reason, the benefit of the probability variation granting table 202d4 can be benefited from the probability variation state within a specific number of times, falling to the normal state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 even if it is hit to the right. This is the case.

  Next, the details of the normal table 202d1 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the present embodiment, the same variation pattern is used as long as the stop type and the variation type counter CS1 are the same in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Is selected. Note that the correspondence relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 (counter value) and the variation pattern is the same as the correspondence relationship (see FIG. 15B) for the first special symbol in the normal table 202d1 in each of the above embodiments. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the details of the probability variation granting table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the first special symbol lottery is associated with the long fluctuation (120 seconds) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence as that defined in the normal table 202d1 is defined. For this reason, a probability variation state is given after the jackpot, and falls to the normal state within a period in which this probability variation granting table 202d4 is referenced (a period until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times or 50 times), and left When returning to the strike, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes longer. Therefore, by continuing to the left, the second special symbol can be drawn more than once while the first special symbol is fluctuating for a long time. It is possible to focus on the lottery. Therefore, in the case of falling from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage, it is possible to make a relatively advantageous state, so that the player's motivation for the game after falling to the normal state is reduced. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines a variation pattern scenario for each jackpot type, as in the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (b), the jackpot is M, O (16 rounds jackpot), and if the probability change state is given after the jackpot (if the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot), it fluctuates. As a pattern scenario, the probability variation granting table 202d4 is associated with a range of 1 to 20 special symbol lotteries. Further, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 21st and subsequent times. Therefore, if it becomes a big hit M, O, the ball can be passed through the V winning switch 65e3, and if it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within 20 times, the first special symbol will be given when left-handed Only the fluctuations in the above are long fluctuations (120 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which a plurality of lotteries of the second special symbol can be executed during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, so early (after the probability variation state is set) Even if the special symbol lottery falls to the normal state (within 20 times), it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation to be reduced. In addition, when it falls to a normal state after exceeding 20 times, since the normal table 202d1 is referred, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed almost in half.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the jackpot is N, P (4 rounds jackpot) and a probable change state is given after the jackpot (when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot) As a variation pattern scenario, the probability variation granting table 202d4 is associated with a range of 1 to 50 special symbol lotteries. Further, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 51st and subsequent times. Therefore, if it is a big hit N, P, the ball can be passed to the V winning switch 65e3, and if it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within 50 times, the first special symbol will be given when left-handed Only the fluctuations in the above are long fluctuations (120 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which a plurality of lotteries of the second special symbol can be executed during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, so early (after the probability variation state is set) Even if the special symbol lottery falls to the normal state (within 20 times), it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation to be reduced. In addition, in the case of a probable change after 4 rounds of jackpot, relief for disadvantageous jackpots on the award sphere is made by increasing the number of lotteries to which the probability change granting table 202d4 is referenced, compared to 16 rounds of jackpot. Can be achieved. In addition, when it falls to the normal state after exceeding 50 times, since the normal table 202d1 is referred, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed almost in half.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the probable change state is not given after the big hit (when the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the big win), the number of special symbol lotteries as the variable pattern scenario Regardless of the normal table 202d1, the normal table 202d1 is associated. Therefore, the disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed in half continues until at least the next big hit.

  In this way, the variation pattern scenario of the fourth embodiment is when the probability change is given over the special symbol lottery of the specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) when the game state after the big hit becomes the probability variation state. The table 202d4 is referred to. When the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referenced, the long fluctuation (120 seconds) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, when falling from the probabilistic state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and returning from right-handed to left-handed, the second special symbol will be changed several times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. A lottery can be executed. That is, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more than the lottery of the first special symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the jackpot is finished. It is easy and advantageous. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probability change state to the normal state early (within a specific number of times) after the big hit, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

  Next, the details of the falling lottery table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the falling lottery table 202g stores random values (counter values) determined to fall in the falling lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 93A, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, two determination values “100, 101” corresponding to the fall to the normal state (special symbol low probability state) are provided. A random value (counter value) is defined. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the special symbol probability changing state, the value of the falling lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random value (counter value) corresponding to the fall specified in the falling lottery table 202g. When the values match, it falls to the normal state. The falling lottery counter (not shown) is a loop counter that is updated periodically (for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed) in the range of “0 to 299”. Of the 300 random number values (counter values) that the falling lottery counter can take, two random numbers that are determined to fall are defined, so the probability that a single falling lottery will determine that a fall has occurred is 1/150. It is. Note that the random number values determined to be a big hit in the probability variation state (the value of the first random number counter C1) are four (1 to 4) (see FIG. 13B), and the jackpot is in the probability variation state. Since the probability is 1/75, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be higher than the probability of falling determined by the falling lottery during the probability variation state. Therefore, once the state is changed to the probable state, the player can be expected to win a large number of times before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in the game in the probable state can be improved. it can.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 93B, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 77) in that the probability variation counter 203g is deleted and The difference is that a stop flag 203ai, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj, and a probability change flag 203ak are added.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol starts to be executed while the first special symbol is variably displayed. When the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. The temporary stop indicates a display mode in which the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the detachment is stopped as a temporary stop symbol, and the third symbol is vibrated and displayed without being stopped completely. . In this way, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is started, by turning on the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai to temporarily stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the lottery result is confirmed and displayed with a jackpot (the jackpot by the first special symbol lottery starts during the jackpot by the second special symbol lottery). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to ON when it is determined in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit ( (See S1214 in FIG. 100). Further, after the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on and the big special winning by lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) executed first is executed in S712. Set to off. When the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set from on to off, the temporary stop is released and the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is resumed.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variably displayed. When the second fluctuation stop flag 203aj is turned on, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and when it is turned off, the temporary stop is released and the fluctuation display is resumed. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to ON when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 97, refer to S714), and after the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is set to OFF in the processing of S1212 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) executed first.

  In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result is held as it is without rewriting the lottery result of the other special symbol even when the special symbol of one special symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the jackpot. Then, when the variation time of the variation display corresponding to the jackpot has elapsed and the jackpot is started, the corresponding flag of the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai or special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is turned on. By doing so, the other variable display is temporarily stopped for the jackpot. Then, after the big hit, the temporary stop is canceled and the variable display is resumed. By configuring in this way, when a special symbol lottery is won, and when the other special symbol lottery is displayed while the change is being displayed, the other special symbol lottery is based on the special symbol lottery. It is possible to prevent the jackpot based on the special symbol lottery from being started, and to start the jackpot based on the lottery of both special symbols at different timings. Therefore, it can be advantageous for the player to the configuration of each of the embodiments described above, which may be overwritten even if it is a big hit.

  The probability variation flag 203ak is provided in place of the probability variation counter 203g in each of the above embodiments. In this embodiment, the probability variation state continues until a lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained by the fall lottery. That is, the number of special symbol lotteries until the probability variation state ends is indefinite. Therefore, it is configured to indicate whether or not the state is the probability variation state depending on whether or not the probability variation flag 203ak is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the correspondence relationship between the gaming state and the scenario in the fourth embodiment will be described with a specific example. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the game state after the end of the jackpot and the transition of the referenced variation pattern table when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot P (4 rounds jackpot).

  As shown in FIG. 94, when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot P, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability change state. In the probabilistic state, in addition to increasing the probability of winning a big symbol in the special symbol lottery, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (30 seconds → 3 seconds), and the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased (1/240 → 1 / 1.2), when the normal symbol is hit, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer (0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times). Therefore, by making a right-hand hit, it becomes easy to enter the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to efficiently execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 94, when the game state after the jackpot P is set to the probable change state (the probability change state is given), 1 to 50 special symbols lottery after the jackpot as the variation pattern scenario A variation pattern scenario (see FIG. 92B) in which the probability change granting table 202d4 is referred to is set.

  If the lottery result corresponding to the fall is reached when the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times, then the state shifts to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 94, even if the normal state is entered, the set variation pattern scenario is unchanged, so the probability variation grant table 202d4 is referred to until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times. That is, when the first special symbol lottery is executed over the 20 special symbol lotteries after the fall, the long fluctuation (120 seconds) is selected. As described above, in the normal state, even if the right hand is made, the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed, and the left hand is more advantageous. Then, as described above, each time a ball enters the sorting unit 660 that can enter when left-handed, the first entrance 64 and the central entrance are arranged by the sorting member 900 provided therein. The two entrances 640c are alternately distributed (see FIGS. 89A and 89B). In this case, when the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to, while the long variation is set in the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol (second special symbol) is performed by the simultaneous variation method. Can be executed. That is, since it can be concentrated on the lottery of 2 special symbols, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation with respect to the probability variation state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 94, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the jackpot P is over 50, the normal table 202d1 is referred to according to the set variation pattern scenario. Switch. That is, when left-handed, a disadvantageous state in which an unfavorable first special symbol lottery and an advantageous second special symbol lottery are equally performed.

  In this way, if the player falls to the normal state (a state where left-handed is advantageous) after 30 hits after the jackpot where the probability variation state is given, even if left-handed, the special symbol lottery is selected. 2 Can be biased to lottery of special symbols. Therefore, in the case where the player has fallen to the normal state within 50 falling lotteries after the probability variation state is set, the game is performed in a relatively advantageous state until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the first special symbol variation start process 5 (S211) executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. The first special symbol variation start process 5 (S211) is performed on the lottery result of the first special symbol, similarly to the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for setting a corresponding variation pattern.

  Of the first special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S301 to S304 and S322, S301 to S304 of the first special symbol variation start process in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same processes as those in S322 are executed. In the first special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S304 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the variation counter 203ab (S331), and the first special symbol variation is started. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 is performed to determine whether or not the lottery is a lottery (S332), and the process proceeds to S322.

  Next, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) described above will be described with reference to FIG. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S501 to S504 and S510 are respectively the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. ) S501 to S504 and S510, the same processing is executed.

  Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress in the process of S502 (the probability change flag 203ak is on) (S502: Yes), The value of the falling lottery counter is compared with the random value (counter value) corresponding to the falling specified in the falling lottery table 202g (S511), and whether the value of the falling lottery counter matches the random value corresponding to the falling ( Whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been determined) is determined (S512).

  If it is determined in the process of S512 that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been reached (S512: Yes), the game state is dropped to the normal state by setting the probability variation flag 203ak to OFF (S513), and the fall ( A state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the gaming state has been changed to the normal state is set (S514). Next, a lottery result as to whether or not a big hit is obtained by referring to the first random number table 202a for low probability (S504), and the process proceeds to S516. On the other hand, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not obtained in the process of S512 (S512: No), the process proceeds to S503, and the big hit is made by referring to the first random number table 202a for high probability. Whether or not the lottery result is acquired (S503), and the process proceeds to S516.

  In the process of S516, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S515). If it is determined that the lottery is a jackpot (S515: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot ( S516), a jackpot symbol is set as a symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S517), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S515, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (S515: No), the process proceeds to S510.

  In this manner, by executing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96), it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is determined by taking into account the result of the falling lottery.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the first special symbol variation stop process 5 (S212) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process 5 (S212). The first special symbol variation stop process 5 (S212) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for stopping and displaying the changing symbol when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

  Of the first special symbol variation stopping process 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment, the processes in S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710 are respectively in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those of S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special diagram variation stop flag 203ai is on (S711), and is on. Is determined (S711: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) of this time is the first special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) executed first after the big hit. It means that the change display of the first special symbol was temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to OFF (S712), and the special figure 1 for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to OFF. A change stop command is set (S713), and this process is terminated. By executing the processing of S712 and S713, the first symbol and the third symbol that have been temporarily stopped in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can be variably displayed again. . In addition, this fluctuation display is displayed by the amount of the remaining fluctuation time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the jackpot from the set fluctuation time.

  In the process of S711, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is off (S711: No), each process of S701 to S703 is executed. In the process of S703, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S703: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to ON (S714), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is also performed. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203aj is set to ON is set (S715). Thus, while the jackpot won in the first special symbol lottery is being executed, the first symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the variation time of the second special symbol from ending during the jackpot, the symbol indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is stopped during the jackpot, and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot. Can be prevented.

  After the processing of S715, the start of jackpot is set (S706), the values of the probability variation flag 203ak and the hour / minute counter 203r are reset (S716), and the process proceeds to S709.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the second special symbol variation start process 5 (S213) in the fourth embodiment will be described. The second special symbol variation start process 5 (S213) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the embodiment (and the first embodiment), this is a process for setting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

  Of the second special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S901 to S904 and S922, S901 to S904 of the second special symbol variation start process in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same process as each process of S924 is executed. In the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, 1 is added to the value of the variation counter 203ab after the processing of S904 is completed (S931). A second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 is performed to determine whether or not a lottery will be won (S932), and the process proceeds to S924.

  Next, the details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) described above will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to SS1010, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36), the same processes as those of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1010 are executed.

  Further, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change is being made in the process of S1002 (the probability change flag 203ak is on) (S1002: Yes), The value of the falling lottery counter is compared with the random value (counter value) corresponding to the falling specified in the falling lottery table 202g (S1011), and whether the value of the falling lottery counter matches the random number corresponding to the falling ( Whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall has come) is determined (S1012).

  In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has come (S1012: Yes), the gaming state is dropped to the normal state by setting the probability variation flag 203ak to off (S1013), and the fall ( A state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the gaming state has been changed to the normal state) is set (S1014). Next, a lottery result as to whether or not a big hit is obtained by referring to the first random number table 202a for low probability (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1006. On the other hand, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not obtained in the process of S1012 (S1012: No), the process proceeds to S1003, and the big hit is made with reference to the first random number table 202a for high probability. Whether or not the lottery result is acquired (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1006.

  As described above, by executing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99), it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is determined by taking into account the result of the falling lottery.

  Next, the details of the second special symbol variation stopping process 5 (S214) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process 5 (S214). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (S214) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for stopping and displaying the changing symbol when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

  Of the second special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment, the processes in S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209 are respectively in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as the processes of S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203aj is on (S1211), and is on. Is determined (S1211: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) of this time is the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) executed first after the big hit. It means that the change display of the second special symbol was temporarily stopped during the big hit. Therefore, in this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to OFF (S1212), and the special figure 2 for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to OFF. A change stop command is set (S1213), and this process is terminated. By executing the processing of S1212 and S1213, the first symbol and the third symbol that have been temporarily stopped in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can be variably displayed again. . In addition, this fluctuation display is displayed by the amount of the remaining fluctuation time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the jackpot from the set fluctuation time.

  In the process of S1211, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is off (S1211: No), each process of S1201 to S1203 is executed. In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (S1203: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to on (S1214), and the special figure 1 fluctuation is also performed. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203ai is set to ON is set (S1215). Thus, while the jackpot won in the second special symbol lottery is being executed, the first symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the variation time of the first special symbol from ending during the jackpot, the symbol indicating the lottery of the first special symbol is stopped during the jackpot and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot. Can be prevented.

  After the process of S1215, the start of the jackpot is set (S1206), the values of the probability variation flag 203ak and the hour / minute counter 203r are reset (S1216), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  Next, details of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S121) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The normal symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct and setting a normal symbol variation display when it passes.

  Of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S1401 to S1416 and S1418 to S1423, the normal symbol variation process (and the first embodiment) respectively ( The same processes as S1401 to S1416 and S1418 to S1423 of FIG. 40) are executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S1414 and S1415, the current time is not in a time-saving state (S1414: No), or the time-shortening state is in progress and the jackpot is being hit. (S1414: Yes, and S1415: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 second x 1 time, and the process is performed. The process shifts to S1432.

  In the process of S1432, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening state is in effect (whether the value of the time-shortening counter 203r is 1 or more or whether or not the probability variation flag 203ak is on) (S1432). If it is determined that there is one (S1432: Yes), the process of S1419 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1432 that the time reduction state is not in effect (S1432: No), the normal symbol variation time is set to 30 seconds (S1433), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is greatly reduced, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is greatly increased. In this case, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is extremely short. As a result, even in the normal state, even if an irregular game method in which the player makes a right-hand hit at any time in order to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Is extremely difficult, and it is possible to increase the possibility of losing. Therefore, the deterrent effect with respect to the irregular game method which always makes a right strike can be heightened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the jackpot end process 5 (S2141) executed instead of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot end process 5 (S2141) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, similarly to the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

  Of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 102), the processes of S2201, S2204, and S2206 are respectively the processes of S2201, S2204, and S2206 of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment. The same process is executed.

  In the jackpot end process 5 (S2141) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ak is set to on. (S2231) Then, based on the respective values of the probability change flag 2003ak and the hour and middle counter 203r, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state after the jackpot is set (S2232), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S2206.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the game state after the big hit becomes a probable change state, a certain change is given over a special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times). The time table 202d4 is referred to. When the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referenced, the long fluctuation (120 seconds) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, when falling from the probabilistic state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and returning from right-handed to left-handed, the second special symbol will be changed several times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. A lottery can be executed. That is, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more than the lottery of the first special symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the jackpot is finished. It is easy and advantageous. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probability change state to the normal state early (within a specific number of times) after the big hit, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

  In the fourth embodiment, a variation pattern scenario in which a special symbol lottery count and a referenced variation pattern table are associated is set at the end of the jackpot, and is related to the timing of falling from the probability variation state to the normal state. However, the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to only by a specific number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability change granting table 202d4 may be referred to over a special symbol lottery a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) triggered by the fall from the probability change state to the normal state. In this case, a special symbol lottery is performed a specific number of times after the fall (for example, 10 times) only when the number of lotteries for the special symbol executed before the fall from the probability variation state to the normal state is within 20 times, for example. It is good also as a structure which refers to the table 202d4 for probability change provision over the whole. By configuring in this way, when the probability variation state ends with a small number of lotteries (for example, within 20), it is possible to give an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Therefore, even if the probability change state ends, the player's motivation can be maintained. Whether it falls in the first fall lottery or in the 20th fall lottery, it can be given the same number of advantageous states, so if it falls within a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) In addition, the subsequent advantage can be made equal.

  In the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation granting table 202d4 only for a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probability variation state is imparted. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the same way as in the first embodiment, when a small hit is made in the normal state, a special change is given over a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) of lottery of special symbols after the small hit ends. The variation pattern table may be determined with reference to the table 202d4. Thereby, since the advantageous state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed can be formed while continuing the left handing, it is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the right handing and the left handing during the normal state. In addition, for example, as in the second embodiment, the disadvantageous state of determining the variation pattern table with reference to the normal table 202d1 according to the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the normal state, and the probability change granting time It may be configured to repeatedly switch between advantageous states for determining the variation pattern with reference to the table 202d4. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the normal state from becoming monotonous.

  In the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation granting table 202d4 only for a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probability variation state is imparted. However, it is not limited to this. For example, this control may be applied to the normal state. Specifically, when a time-short state is set after a big win, a special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) is executed after, for example, 50 special symbols are drawn after the time-short state ends. The variation pattern scenario table 202f may be configured such that the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to over the lottery. As a result, even if the short-time state ends without winning the jackpot, it is possible to continue the game at least until the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol set thereafter is likely to be executed ends. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, for example, as in the first embodiment, a small winning pattern can be selected in the first special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery is performed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) after the small winning is achieved. You may comprise so that the table 202d4 for probability change provision may be referred. Thereby, in the normal state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed, it is possible to shift to the advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed without changing the gaming state in response to the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the normal state from becoming monotonous.

  In the fourth embodiment, by referring to the probability variation granting table 202d4, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, and left-handed and continuous When a ball enters the sorting unit 660, the frequency at which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is reduced. The configuration for reducing the frequency at which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed Is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the sorting unit 900 of the sorting unit 660 can be controlled by a motor or the like, and the direction can be electrically switched by the motor in accordance with the number of balls that have entered the sorting unit 660. In a normal state, each time one sphere enters, the motor is controlled so that the sphere is guided in a direction different from the direction in which the sphere is guided. On the other hand, the frequency at which the balls are distributed (guided) to the central second entrance 640c as the arrangement of the distribution unit 900 within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times) after being set to the probability variation state. Becomes higher than the frequency at which the ball is distributed to the first entrance 64 (for example, each time the ball is set to be guided to the central second entrance 640c for five consecutive times, the ball is placed in the first entrance 64. The motor may be controlled so as to be set once in the arrangement to be guided to. By comprising in this way, the same effect as the said 4th Embodiment can be show | played.

  In the present embodiment, a distribution unit 660 that alternately distributes the balls to the first entrance 64 and the central second entrance 640c is provided. However, the game board 13 ( (See FIG. 2). That is, a game in which the first entrance 64 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when left-handed, and the second entrance 640 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when right-handed. It may be applied to the board 13. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the normal table 202d1 is selected, only the very long fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the probability change is given. Then, the probability change granting table 202d4 may be referred to within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times), during the short-time state, and during the probability variation state. By comprising in this way, when it falls within the specific number of times from the probability variation state, the lottery frequency of the first special symbol is reduced, and the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed more. Relief can be made against a player who has fallen.

  In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, and the modified example of the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which are special during a big hit. The game state after the big hit is set to the probable change state by passing the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 provided on the downstream side of the discharge flow path 65e2, but it is not limited to this. For example, according to the jackpot type, it may be a specification that determines in advance whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probable change state. By comprising in this way, since the structure of the variable prize-winning apparatus 65 can be simplified, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, when a right-hand hit is made and a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is easy to win a jackpot type in which an advantageous gaming state is easily set. However, the method that is more advantageous is not limited to this. For example, when a big hit is made by lottery of the second special symbol executed by making a right strike, it may be configured to easily win a big hit type having a large number of rounds.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability variation counter 203g and the hourly / short-time counter 203r are updated at a stage before the determination as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured such that various counters are updated after determining whether or not it is a big hit first. As a result, it is not necessary to set a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of lotteries for the special symbol for the counter value, so that it is possible to perform parameter setting that is easier to understand.

  In each of the above embodiments, the first special symbol variation display executed based on the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol variation display performed based on the second special symbol lottery are simultaneously performed. The simultaneous variation method that can be executed in parallel has been adopted, but is not limited thereto. For example, you may employ | adopt as the system which performs only 1 fluctuation display at a time. In this case, it is good also as a system which performs a variable display one by one in the order which detected the start winning prize, and when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is put on hold, the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is given priority It is good also as a system which performs. By comprising in this way, control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

  In the first embodiment, the chance mode A is always set (when the chance A table 202d3 is referred to) when a special symbol is won in the lottery, and in the second and third embodiments, the chance mode A is set. The chance mode A is always set when the number of lotteries determined in the variation pattern scenario is reached. In the fourth embodiment, a certain number of times (20 (Or 50 times) lottery, the probability change granting table 202d4 is referred to, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which whether or not to refer to the chance A table 202d3 and the probability variation granting table 202d4 is determined by lottery. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is made in the first embodiment, or when the number of lotteries predetermined in the variation pattern scenario is reached in the second and third embodiments (transition to chance mode A) If the conditions are met), a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to chance mode A (for example, a lottery to shift to chance mode A with a probability of 2/3) is performed, and only when winning in that lottery, A configuration for shifting to the chance mode A may be adopted. Also, in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation state is to be given after the big hit, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to refer to the probability variation granting table 202d4, and only when winning in the lottery, After the jackpot, the probability variation granting table 202d4 may be referred to over a special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times). With such a configuration, when the condition for shifting to the chance mode A is established, the lottery result can be confirmed in an interesting manner, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Moreover, when performing lottery, it is good also as a structure which varies a lottery probability according to a time slot | zone, for example. Specifically, an RTC (Real-Time Clock) for measuring the time is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110, and the main control device 110 is accessed by accessing the connected RTC. The current time can be grasped by the MPU 201. And, for example, in the morning time zone (for example, AM 10: 00 to AM 12:00) or in the evening time zone (for example, PM 5: 00 to PM 7:00), lottery than other time zones The probability may be set high (2/3 → 9/10). By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the operation especially in the time zone where the lottery probability is high. For example, the number of players who go to the hall can be increased. Therefore, the operating rate of the hall can be improved.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Depending on one lottery result, the degree of advantage of the other variation pattern is varied)
The first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first condition, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first discrimination means by the first discrimination means. Based on the determination, or on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination by the second determination means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the establishment of the specific condition Identification in a gaming machine comprising a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including one gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state Display means capable of displaying information, first dynamic display executing means for causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means, and the display means The judgment of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the result, One dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least a dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period in which the first dynamic display period has a different degree of advantage for the player The ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means based on the first game state being set by the period selection means and the game state setting means A first setting unit that sets a first selection state lower than a selection ratio and a determination of the first determination by the first determination unit when the first selection state is set by the first setting unit. The result is the specific format Based on the special determination result different from the result, the second selection state in which the ratio of the period setting means to select the second dynamic display period is higher than the first selection state can be set. A gaming machine A1 comprising two setting means.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, one of a normal state in which the winning state is drawn with a normal probability and a probability fluctuation state in which the winning state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state, triggered by the end of the winning state (For example, JP 2006-000392 A).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the normal state is set at the end of the hit state, the disadvantageous state in which the win state is drawn with a lottery probability lower than the probability variation state is at least the next hit state Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the normal state.

  Further, some of the above-described conventional gaming machines have a plurality of start ports and can perform symbol change display simultaneously for each start port. Furthermore, by changing the degree of advantage in the case of winning for each start opening where a start winning has occurred, it is expected that the player will win first with a variable display corresponding to the advantageous start opening. Some are trying to improve their interest. In this conventional type gaming machine, for example, when a win is made, the start prize for the start opening with a low advantage is less than the fluctuation display fluctuation time based on the start win for the start opening with a high degree of advantage. There is a configuration in which the variation time of the variation display based on the configuration is long, and a variation display with a high degree of advantage can be executed more times during the long variation time.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the variation time is changed with a win as a trigger, it becomes a disadvantageous state that many variable displays with a low degree of advantage are executed unless it is a win. Therefore, there was a problem that the game until winning was monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first identification information indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination unit is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display execution unit on the display unit configured to display the identification information. The second identification information that is displayed and indicates the discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display execution means. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, the first dynamic display period and the first dynamic display period are advantageous to the player. One dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least different second dynamic display periods. Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the first selection state in which the ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means is lower than the ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period Is set by the first setting means. When the first selection state is set by the first setting means, the period setting is based on the fact that the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. The second selection state is set by the second setting unit so that the ratio of the means to select the second dynamic display period is higher than the first selection state.

  Thus, at least in the first selection state, even if the specific determination result is not obtained by the first determination, the special determination result is obtained, so that the degree of advantage when the second determination is executed can be varied. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress at least the game in the first gaming state from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1, there is provided selection means for selecting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means from a plurality of periods. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the ratio of selecting each of the plurality of periods is the same between the selected state and the second selected state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is selected from the plurality of periods by the selection means. In the first selection state and the second selection state, each of the plurality of periods is selected by the selection means at the same rate.

  Accordingly, when the special lottery result is obtained by the first determination, the advantage degree when the second determination is executed is changed without changing the advantage degree when the first determination is executed. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the first gaming state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. In the state, the game can be performed in the hope that the first determination results in a special determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the first gaming state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

  As a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided. The type selection means includes a type selection means for selecting one of the types of the privilege game from a plurality of types including the classification selection means and the specific determination result in the second determination as compared to the first determination. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that a ratio of selecting the second privilege game becomes higher when the second dynamic display period becomes shorter, and the second dynamic display period is shorter than the first dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. One type is selected by means. Compared to the first determination, when the second determination results in a specific determination, the type selection means selects the second privilege game at a higher rate. The second dynamic display period is configured with a period shorter than the first dynamic display period.

  Accordingly, when the second selection state is set by obtaining a special determination result by the first determination, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second determination is shortened. It is possible to shorten the execution interval of the determination. Therefore, since it becomes easy to perform the 2nd discrimination | determination which is easy to select an advantageous 2nd privilege game when it becomes a specific discrimination | determination result, it expects that it will be in a 2nd selection state with respect to a player. A game in the gaming state can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second setting means includes a timekeeping means for keeping timekeeping information, wherein the timekeeping information timed by the timekeeping means is within a predetermined range, and the determination result of the first determination is the special result The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the second selection state is set based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, time information is timed by the time measuring means. The second selection state is set by the second setting means based on the fact that the timing information counted by the timing means is within a predetermined range and the discrimination result of the first discrimination is a special discrimination result.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the advantageous degree of a 1st game state can be varied according to the time information which time-measurement means time-measures.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation, a first route through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass, and the first route A second path different from the first path and the first path and the first path means for entering the game ball and the second path means for entering the game path and the second path for entering the game ball, The first condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second condition is that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means. A gaming machine A6 that is established based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the player's operation, a game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means, and a first route through which the game ball launched by the launching device can pass, and a second route different from the first route, Is provided in the game area. The first condition is established based on the game ball entering the first entry means, and the second condition is established based on the game ball entering the second entry means.

  Thereby, in a state where the dynamic display period having a high degree of advantage is easily selected by the period selection unit, the game ball is launched to the second path, and conversely, the dynamic display period having a high degree of advantage is selected by the period selection unit. In a difficult state, the game ball can be launched to the first path. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the direction in which the game balls are fired, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a normal dynamic display period and the normal dynamic display period Selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of periods including at least a special dynamic display period different from the first dynamic display period. The normal dynamic display period is a case where the first determination results in the specific determination result, or a difference determination result different from the specific determination result and the special determination result. The special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means when the first determination results in the specific determination result or the special determination result. Gaming machine A7, characterized in that it is made possible.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are produced. That is, as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means, a normal dynamic display period and a special dynamic display period different from the normal dynamic display period One dynamic display period is selected from the plurality of periods including at least by the selection means. The second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. The normal dynamic display period is configured to be selectable by the selection means when the first determination results in a specific determination result, or when the specific determination result is different from the special determination result. . On the other hand, the special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means when a specific determination result or a special determination result is obtained by the first determination.

  Thereby, when the special dynamic display period is selected, the special game is executed, or the advantageous second dynamic display period is easily selected by the period selection means, so the special dynamic display period is selected. There is an effect that the player can be pleased when the player recognizes that.

  As a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in the gaming machine A7, a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. As the type of the second selection state set by the type selecting means for selecting the type of the one of the award games and the second setting means, the second over the second determination of the first number of times. It is possible to select at least a small selection state in which a selection state is set and a multi-selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the second number of times greater than the first number of times. Based on selection of the dynamic display period by the state type selection means and the selection means, an effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect within the dynamic display period, and the special executed by the effect execution means. Dynamic display As the predetermined effect corresponding to the normal effect, there is provided an effect selection means capable of selecting at least a normal effect and a special effect different from the normal effect. The special effect is determined by the first determination. And when the first privilege game is determined by the type selection means and when the special determination result is obtained by the first determination and the multi-selection state is selected by the state type selection means. The gaming machine A8 is selected only in any of the cases.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of privilege game is selected by the type selection means. As a type of the second selection state set by the second setting means, a small selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the first number of times and a second number greater than the first number of times. The multiple selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the number of times is configured to be selectable by at least the state type selection means. Based on the fact that the dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means, a predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means within the dynamic display period, and corresponds to the special dynamic display period executed by the effect execution means. As the predetermined effect, a normal effect and a special effect different from the normal effect can be selected at least by the effect selecting means. The second privilege game is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. When the first determination results in a specific determination and the first selection game is determined by the type selection means, and when the first determination results in a special determination result and the state type selection means selects a multi-selection state Only in any case, the special effect is selected by the effect selecting means.

  Thereby, in the dynamic display of the first identification information in which the special dynamic display period is set, the first privilege game is executed when the player recognizes that the special effect has been executed, or multiple selection is performed. There is an effect that the player can recognize that the state is set.

  In the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is greater than the number of times of the first determination executed when a game is performed using a game ball that can be acquired by the player in the first privilege game. A gaming machine A9 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is executed when a game is played using a game ball that can be acquired by the player in the first privilege game. Since the number of determinations is greater than the number of times of determination, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a novel game that makes it expected that the first identification information indicating a specific determination result is not displayed when a special effect is executed.

<Characteristic B group> (Chance zone after falling by 1 type and 2 types)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discriminating condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result of discrimination by the discriminating means, and dynamic display for executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means A period determining means for determining one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means and the dynamic display executing means; In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming machine, a first entry position where a gaming ball can enter, a first position where the gaming ball can enter the first entry position, and a gaming ball that enters the first entry position. Variable means capable of changing to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and variable control means for changing the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the determination means. The entrance means Based on the fact that the entered game ball has entered a specific area provided inside the entry means, the award game execution means for executing an award game advantageous to the player and the award game execution means As a gaming state after the executed award game is finished, one gaming state is selected from a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A game state setting means to be set and a counting means for counting the number of times of discrimination executed by the discrimination means after the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and the number of times counted by the counting means are predetermined. As the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, the proportion of the advantageous period that is advantageous to the player is higher than the other dynamic display periods. Gaming machine B1, characterized in that it comprises a favorable state setting means for setting a benefit status,.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning is a win, a win state that is advantageous to the player is given (for example, JP-A-2006-000392). Publication). Among such conventional gaming machines, one that can set either a normal state in which a start winning is less likely to occur or a short-time state in which a start winning is more likely to occur than the normal state, as a winning game state There is. In addition, there are those having a entrance that increases the entrance rate of game balls during the short-time state. A specific area is provided inside the entrance to trigger a winning state when a game ball can enter. In other words, during the short-time state, a win state is given when a lottery based on a start prize is won and when a ball enters a specific area, which is advantageous compared to the normal state. It becomes.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is common that only the above-described two kinds of gaming states (normal state, short-time state) are provided (so-called probabilistic state is not provided), and advantageous short-time state When is finished, the most disadvantageous normal state is set. That is, when the most advantageous state ends, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game is greatly reduced.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, it is variable between an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means more easily than the first position. The means is configured to be variable. The variable means is varied by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the entrance means has entered a specific area provided inside the entrance means. As a gaming state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is ended, 1 is selected from a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state is set by the game state setting means. The number of times of determination performed by the determining means after the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is counted by the counting means, and the number of times counted by the counting means is a predetermined specific number of times. Based on this, as the dynamic display period determined by the period determining unit, the advantageous state setting unit sets an advantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period advantageous to the player is higher than other dynamic display periods.

  Thereby, after the bonus game is finished, when the first gaming state having a lower advantage than the second gaming state is set, the specific number of times is determined with the aim of shifting to the advantageous state. Until at least the game can be continued. Therefore, when the first game state is set, there is an effect that motivation for the player's game can be improved.

  Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set in the gaming machine B1, the advantageous state setting means and the advantageous state setting means for setting a disadvantageous state in which the determination rate of the advantageous period is lower than the advantageous state. Based on the determination of the first number of times by the determination means after the advantageous state is set, the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means for setting the disadvantageous state and the second disadvantageous state setting means. A gaming machine B2 comprising: a second advantageous state setting means for setting the advantageous state based on a determination that the determination means executes the second number of times after the setting.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the setting of the first gaming state, the first disadvantageous state setting means sets a disadvantageous state in which the advantageous period determination rate is lower than the advantageous state. A disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means based on the determination by the first number of determination means being performed after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means. An advantageous state is set by the second advantageous state setting means based on the second number of times of determination performed by the determination means after the disadvantaged state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means.

  Thereby, even if the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means ends, the game can be continued aiming at the advantageous state set by the second advantageous state setting means thereafter. Therefore, there is an effect that motivation for the player's superiority can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B2, the second disadvantageous state setting unit executes the determination by the determining unit for the first number of times after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting unit or the second advantageous state setting unit. Based on this, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the disadvantageous state is set.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the determination by the determining means for the first number of times has been performed after the advantageous state has been set by the advantageous state setting means or the second advantageous state setting means. Since the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means, the gaming state over the first number of times and the disadvantageous state over the second number of times can be alternately repeated. . Therefore, even if one advantageous state is completed, the player can be made to think that the game is continued until the next advantageous state, so that the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advantageous period is shorter than a disadvantageous period in which the ratio determined by the period determining unit is high when the number of times counted by the counting unit is less than a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine B4 characterized by a length period.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the number of times counted by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, the proportion determined by the period determining means is higher than the disadvantage period However, since the advantageous period is configured with a short length, it is possible to execute discrimination by the discriminating means at short intervals in the advantageous period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the game efficiency when the advantageous state is set.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the privilege game execution means can execute the privilege game based on a special determination result different from the specific determination result determined by the determination means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the bonus game executing means performs the special game based on the fact that the discrimination means has determined a special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. Since this is executed, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a special determination result will be obtained.

  In the gaming machine B5, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and A first entry means provided in the first path and capable of entering a game ball; and a second entry means provided in the second path and capable of entering a game ball. First discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first entrance means and second discrimination based on the game ball entering the second entrance means And a second discriminating means for executing the game machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching unit based on the player's operation. A first path through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass and a second path different from the first path are provided. The first route is provided with first entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the second route is provided with second entry means for allowing a game ball to enter. Based on the fact that the first determination means executes the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball enters the second ball input means in the determination means. Then, the second determination unit executes the second determination.

  This allows the player to select whether to launch a game ball on the first route or to fire a game ball on the second route, so that it is possible to provide gameability that matches the taste of each player. it can.

  In the gaming machine B6, the period determining means has a higher ratio of determining the advantageous period as the dynamic display period when the determination by the second determining means is executed in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state is set. When the determination by the second determination unit is performed in a state where the determination is not performed, the rate of determining the disadvantageous dynamic display period is higher than when the determination by the first determination unit is performed. Yes The gaming machine B7, wherein the first discrimination has a lower probability of being the specific discrimination result than the second discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the advantageous state, when the determination by the second determining means is executed, the ratio of determining the advantageous period by the period determining means increases. On the other hand, when the advantageous state is not set, when the determination by the second determination unit is executed, the disadvantageous dynamic display period is more disadvantageous than when the determination by the first determination unit is executed. The ratio determined by becomes higher. The first determination is configured with a lower probability of a specific determination result than the second determination.

  Thereby, in an advantageous state, a game ball can be aimed at a 2nd path | route, and in a state other than an advantageous state, a game ball can be aimed at a 1st path | route. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the firing direction of the game ball according to the state.

  In the gaming machine B7, the probability that the first determination results in the special determination result is the same as the probability that the second determination results in the special determination result.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, the probability of the special discrimination result by the first discrimination is configured to be the same as the probability of the special discrimination result by the second discrimination. Therefore, when a game ball is launched aiming at the first route, there is an effect that the game can be performed in anticipation of a special discrimination result.

<Characteristic C group> (Simultaneous variation, variable time can be changed according to the reservation of the other special figure under specific conditions)
A first entrance means capable of entering a game ball, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and a first entrance means based on a game ball entering the first entrance means. The ball information is acquired, and the ball acquisition information acquiring means for acquiring the second ball input information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball input means, and the ball acquisition information acquiring means acquired before First discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the first entrance information and second discrimination based on the second entrance information acquired before the entrance information acquisition means Display means capable of displaying two identification means, first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination, and second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination, and the first identification by the display means First dynamic display execution means for performing dynamic display of information and dynamic display of the second identification information by the display means While the second dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executing means are executing dynamic display of the second identification information, a new game ball has entered the second entering means. Second entry information storage means capable of storing at least the second entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means based on the above until the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed. And storage of the second entry information stored in the second entry information storage means as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means A gaming machine C1 comprising: period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods based at least on the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a winning (start winning) at a start opening provided in the game board is a win, a win state advantageous to the player is given. There are some (for example, JP, 2006-000392, A). Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with a plurality of start ports, and the start ports where balls can easily enter vary depending on the gaming state. In addition, for a gaming machine having a plurality of start ports, if an irregular game is aimed at a start port where it is difficult for a ball to enter, for example, a penalty such as an extremely long change time will be imposed. There is something that can be done.

  However, the conventional gaming machine that is applied has a problem that the effect of suppressing the irregular gaming method is insufficient.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the first entry information is acquired by the entry information acquisition unit based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry unit, while the second entry unit receives the first entry information. Second entry information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball. First discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the first entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the second discrimination means is executed based on the second entrance information. A second determination is performed. First identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination are displayed on the display means. In the display means, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed by the first dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means. While the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed by the second dynamic low display executing means, it is acquired by the incoming information acquisition means based on the fact that a game ball has newly entered the second incoming means. The second entry information is stored at least until the second entry by the second entry means is executed by the second entry information storage means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is based at least on the number of stored second entry information stored in the second entry information storage means. The period selection means selects one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods.

  As a result, the frequency of the first discrimination by the first discriminating means varies depending on the number of stored second entry information, so only the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information are possible. In addition, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of stored second entry information. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed, the first dynamic display execution means performs the first identification information while executing the dynamic display of the second identification information. A game machine C2 that is capable of executing dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed, the first dynamic is displayed while the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed. Since the dynamic display of the first identification information is executable by the display execution means, the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means can be executed more efficiently. effective.

  In the gaming machine C 1 or C 2, the period selection means stores the second entry information storage means in the second entry information storage means, compared to the case where at least one second entry information is stored in the second entry information storage means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that when the second entry information is not stored, the ratio of selecting an advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player is high.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second entry information storage is more effective than the case where at least one second entry information is stored in the second entry information storage means. When the second entry information is not stored in the means, the ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player by the period selection means increases, so the second entry information storage means stores the second entry information in the second entry information storage means. There is an effect that the game can be performed so as not to memorize the entry information.

  A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that a specific determination result predetermined in the first determination or the second determination is obtained in the gaming machine C3, and the privilege game As a type of the award game executed by the execution means, one of the award games out of a plurality of types including a first award game and a second award game that is more advantageous to the player than the first award game. Selecting means capable of selecting a type, wherein the selecting means has a specific determination result in the second determination rather than a specific determination result in the first determination. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the ratio of selecting the second privilege game is high.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. That is, on the basis of the fact that a specific determination result determined in advance in the first determination or the second determination is reached, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of the plurality of types including a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is selected by the selection means. The type of privilege game is selected. The ratio at which the second privilege game is selected by the selection means when the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination is higher than that in the case where the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination.

  Thereby, since it can be made to play a game expecting that it will become a specific discrimination | determination result in a 2nd discrimination | determination means, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  As a gaming state after the bonus game is ended in the gaming machine C4, a first gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than in the second determination, and the second determination in comparison with the first gaming state. A game state setting unit capable of setting at least a second game state in which the second game state is likely to be executed, and the period setting unit stores the second ball entry information in the second ball entry information storage unit in the first game state. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when it is not stored, the set ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period is high.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game, the first gaming state in which the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination, and the second determination in which the second determination is easier to execute than the first gaming state. The gaming state can be set at least by the gaming state setting means. In the first gaming state, when the second entry information is not stored in the second entry information storage means, the ratio of setting the advantageous dynamic display period by the period setting means increases.

  As a result, an irregular gaming method is executed in an attempt to execute the second determination in the first gaming state in which the first determination is easily performed, and the second entry information is stored in the second entry information storage means. Then, since the advantageous dynamic display period is difficult to set, there is an effect that the irregular gaming method can be suppressed.

  One dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means in the gaming machine C5. Proportion of selecting an unfavorable dynamic display period that is disadvantageous to a player when the first gaming state is set rather than the second gaming state, the second period selecting unit comprising a second period selecting unit A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the game machine becomes higher.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of periods predetermined by the second period selection means. Selected. When the first game state is set, the proportion of the disadvantageous display period that is disadvantageous to the player by the second period selection means is higher than that in the second game state.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method that attempts to execute the second determination in the first gaming state.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, there are provided a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation and the first entrance means, and a first path through which the game ball can pass and the first A gaming machine C7, wherein two gaming units are provided, and the second path is different from the first path.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching unit based on the operation of the player. A first entry means is provided, and a first path through which a game ball can pass and a second entry means are provided, and a second path different from the first path is provided in the game area.

  Thereby, since a launch direction can be varied according to the type of the ball entry means that the player wants to enter, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic D group> (Make it difficult for one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 to be executed)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball; a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means; and a game ball entered into the first ball entry means. A first determination by the first determination means and the first determination means by the first determination means and the second determination means to execute the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, Alternatively, based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means being a specific determination result, the privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege executed by the privilege game executing means As a gaming state after the game has ended, a first gaming state in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to a first probability, and a second gaming state set to a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming state can be set from among a plurality of gaming states including at least When the second gaming state is set by the skill state setting means and the gaming state setting means, the third determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the predetermined determination by the third determination means Based on the result, the first game state change means for changing the game state from the second game state to the first game state and the game state change means in a state where the first condition is satisfied. Frequency suppression means for suppressing the frequency at which the first determination is executed by the first determination means when compared with the frequency at which the second determination is executed by the second determination means when the game state is changed. And a gaming machine D1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is advantageous to the player when a lottery is executed based on the starting ball. Among such conventional gaming machines, there is a game in which a probability variation state in which a winning lottery probability is higher than usual is set after winning. Further, a gaming machine is known that executes a lottery (falling lottery) on whether or not to shift from a certain change state to a normal state together with a lottery on whether or not to win. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to predict how long the probability variation state will continue, so that the game can be performed in the hope that the probability variation state will continue for a longer time.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that if the probability variation state ends early (with a small number of lotteries), the player's motivation for the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Based on the ball, the second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means. Based on the first determination by the first determination unit or the second determination by the second determination unit, a specific determination result is obtained, and a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit. As a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is finished, a first gaming state in which the probability of a specific discrimination result is set to the first probability, and a second probability higher than the first probability One gaming state is configured to be settable by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state set to. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the determination is executed by the third determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the predetermined determination result is obtained by the third determination means. Accordingly, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means. The frequency at which the first determination is executed by the first determination unit when the game condition change unit is changed to the first game state while the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the frequency suppression unit by the second determination. The frequency of the second determination is suppressed by the means.

  This makes it possible to vary the frequency at which the first determination is executed depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the game state is changed to the first gaming state. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the first discrimination means executes a first discrimination when a predetermined first discrimination condition is satisfied after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The second discriminating means executes the first discrimination when a predetermined second discriminating condition is satisfied after the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the frequency suppressing means The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the predetermined first determination condition is controlled to be less likely to be established than the predetermined second determination condition.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, after the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied. After the game ball has entered the second entry means, the second discrimination means executes the second discrimination when a predetermined second discrimination condition is satisfied. The predetermined first determination condition is controlled by the frequency suppression unit so that it is less likely to be established than the predetermined second determination condition.

  Thus, since the frequency with which the first determination is executed can be varied by varying the ease with which the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming state setting means, when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, the game after the executed privilege game is ended. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a ratio of setting the second gaming state as a state is high.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the second discrimination rather than the first discrimination, the executed bonus game is ended. Since the ratio at which the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state is configured to be high, the player can be suppressed by suppressing the frequency at which the first determination is executed by the frequency suppressing means. It is advantageous for. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game when the game is changed to the first game state in a state where the specific condition is satisfied.

  Display means capable of displaying identification information in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, and dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination on the display means, and the second discrimination A game machine D4, comprising: dynamic display execution means capable of respectively executing dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the determination result of

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information can be displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means performs dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination, respectively, on the display means. Executed.

  Thereby, even if the dynamic display of one identification information is being executed, the dynamic display of the other identification information can be executed, so that the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed more efficiently. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine D4, the frequency suppression means extends a start interval from the start of dynamic display of the first identification information to the start of dynamic display of the first identification information. A gaming machine D5, which is controlled by

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are produced. That is, it is controlled by the frequency suppressing means so that the start interval from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information to the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information is increased.

  Thereby, since the frequency with which the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed can be reduced, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  A period in which a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means in the gaming machine D4 or D5 is set from a plurality of predetermined periods. The plurality of predetermined periods provided with setting means includes at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period, and the frequency The suppressing means is configured such that a ratio at which the second dynamic display period is set by the period setting means as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information is higher than the first dynamic display period, and As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information, a state in which the ratio of the first dynamic display period selected by the period setting means is higher than the second dynamic display period is set. To be Game machine D6 to butterflies.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set from a plurality of periods predetermined by the period setting means. The plurality of predetermined periods include at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period. The rate at which the second dynamic display period is set by the period selection means as the dynamic display period of the first identification information is higher than the first dynamic display period, and the dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information As the period, a state in which the ratio at which the first dynamic display period is selected by the period selection unit is higher than that of the second dynamic display period is set by the frequency suppression unit.

  As a result, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information is likely to be shorter than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information. There is an effect that the frequency of execution can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation, a first route through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass, and the first route A second path different from the first path and a game ball that has passed through the second path are provided at positions where the ball can enter, and the second determination unit executes the second determination based on the game ball entering. A third ball entry means, and the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at positions where a game ball that has passed through the first path can enter the ball. The first gaming state is such that a gaming ball that has passed through the second route is less likely to enter the third entering means as compared to the second gaming state, and the gaming state setting means includes the first gaming state The second determination results in the specific determination result rather than the determination of Gaming machine D7, characterized in that if the are those proportions which sets the second game condition as a game state after the award game executed is completed is high.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the player's operation, a game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means, and a first route through which the game ball launched by the launching device can pass, and a second route different from the first route, Is provided. At a position where a game ball that has passed through the second path can enter, there is provided a third entrance means for executing the second discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the entrance of the game ball. . The first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at positions where game balls that have passed through the first path can enter. The first game state is configured so that it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the second route to enter the third ball entry means as compared to the second game state. When the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, the ratio at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the executed privilege game is completed is It is configured to be high.

  As a result, when the second gaming state is set, it is easier to execute a second determination that is advantageous by launching the game ball to the second route, so that the gaming state after the bonus game ends There is an effect that a game can be performed in the hope that the second game state is set.

  In one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a passing means through which a game ball can pass, a first guiding state for guiding the game ball that has passed through the passing means to the first entering means, and a second entering means are guided. Based on the guiding means that can be changed to the second guiding state, and the gaming ball is guided to the first entering means by the guiding means, the guiding means is changed to the second guiding state, and the gaming ball is A gaming machine D8 comprising: variable means for changing the guiding means to the first guiding state based on being guided by the second ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the following effects are produced. That is, passage means through which game balls can pass is provided. The guiding means is configured to be variable between a first guiding state for guiding the game ball that has passed through the passing means to the first entering means and a second guiding state for guiding to the second entering means. The guide means is changed to the second guide state by the variable means based on the fact that the game ball is guided to the first entrance means by the guide means. On the other hand, the guidance means is changed to the first guidance state by the variable means based on the game ball being guided to the second entry means.

  As a result, each time the game ball passes through the passing means, the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means can alternately enter the game balls, so the first determination is executed by the frequency suppressing means. When the frequency to be performed is not suppressed, there is an effect that the frequency at which the first determination is executed and the frequency at which the second determination is executed can be easily equalized.

  A counting means for counting the sum of the number of times the first discrimination is executed and the number of times the second discrimination is executed in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, and the specific condition is the second game A gaming machine D9, which is established when the count value counted by the counting means after the state is set is in a range equal to or less than a specific count value.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the following effects are produced. That is, the sum of the number of times the first determination is performed and the number of times the second determination is performed is counted by the counting means. The specific condition is established when the count value counted by the counting means after the second gaming state is set is in a range equal to or less than the specific count value.

  As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of times of the first discrimination and the second discrimination executed until the game state is changed to the first gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be made.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First entrance (first entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
112 Firing control device (firing means)
640 Second entrance (second entry means)
S503, S504 First determination means S608 Selection means S609 Second dynamic display execution means S706, S1206 Special game execution means, type selection means S803, S805, S806 Second setting means S1003, S1004 Second determination means S1108 Period selection means S1109 Second dynamic display execution means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, one of a normal state in which the winning state is drawn with a normal probability and a probability fluctuation state in which the winning state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state, triggered by the end of the winning state Some are set to.

JP 2006-000392 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the normal state is set at the end of the hit state, the disadvantageous state in which the win state is drawn with a lottery probability lower than the probability variation state is at least the next hit state Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the normal state.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 performs a first determination unit that executes a first determination based on the establishment of the first condition and a second determination based on the establishment of the second condition. Based on the second determination means to be executed and the first determination result by the first determination means, or the first determination result by the second determination means by the second determination means, it is advantageous to the player Among a plurality of gaming states including a bonus game executing means for executing a special bonus game, a first gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state And a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a determination result of the first determination by the first determination means on the display means , and the determination result of the second determination by the second determining means A dynamic display execution means that perform dynamic display of to the identification information, as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed by its dynamic display executing means, first dynamic display period And a period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least a second dynamic display period having a different degree of advantage for the player from the first dynamic display period And the ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A first setting unit that sets a lower first selection state, and when the first selection state is set by the first setting unit, the determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit is wherein the first determination result and the Made on the basis of the fact that a second determination result, the period selection means capable of setting a second selection state in which the rate of selecting the second dynamic display period is higher than the first selection state of the second It includes a setting means, a.

According to a second aspect of the present invention , in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the dynamic display executing means includes first identification information indicating a determination result of the first determination by the first determination means on the display means. First dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the second dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means on the display means The period selecting means selects a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display executing means .

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein as the type of the special game executed by the special game execution means, a first special game and the first special game are provided. There is provided a type selection means for selecting one of the types of the privilege game from a plurality of types including at least a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the game, and the type selection means is configured to perform the first determination. In comparison, if the second determination results in the first determination result, the ratio of selecting the second privilege game is high, and the second dynamic display period is the first dynamic display period. It is shorter than the target display period.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising timing means for timing timekeeping information, wherein the second setting means has timing information counted by the timing means. When the determination result of the first determination becomes the second determination result within a predetermined range, the ratio of setting the second selection state is higher than when the timekeeping information is outside the predetermined range. It will be.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first determination unit that executes the first determination based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second determination that executes the second determination based on the establishment of the second condition. And a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the first determination result in the first determination by the first determination unit and the second determination by the second determination unit. One gaming state out of a plurality of gaming states including a privileged game executing means, a first gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state A display unit capable of displaying identification information, a determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit on the display unit. The identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination by As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, a first dynamic display period, and a first dynamic display thereof A period selecting means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least a second dynamic display period having a different degree of advantage for the player, and the game state setting means Based on the setting of the first gaming state, a first selection state in which a ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection unit is lower than a ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period. A first setting means for setting, and when the first selection state is set by the first setting means, the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is the first determination result. Different second discrimination results Based on the fact that a, and a second setting means capable of setting a second selected state is higher than the period selection means said second dynamic display period selection to proportion the first selection state The

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the dynamic display executing unit determines whether the display unit has the first determination by the first determination unit. First dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result, and second display information indicating the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means on the display means are dynamically displayed. Second dynamic display execution means, and the period selection means selects a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means. The

Thereby, when the second determination result is obtained by the first determination, the degree of advantage when the second determination is executed can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved .

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. Monodea Ru.

Thereby, in the first gaming state, the game can be performed in expectation that the first determination results in the second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the first gaming state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the first privilege game And a type selection unit that selects one of the types of the privilege game from a plurality of types including at least a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game, and the type selection unit includes: Compared to the first determination, the ratio of selecting the second bonus game is higher when the second determination results in the first determination, and the second dynamic display period is Ru der shorter than the first dynamic display period.

Thus, when the second selection state is set by the first determination a second determination result, since the dynamic display period of dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second determination is shortened The execution interval of the second determination can be shortened. Therefore, since it becomes easy to perform the 2nd discrimination | determination which is easy to select the advantageous 2nd privilege game when it becomes a 1st discrimination | determination result, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, the gaming machine further comprises a timing means for timing time information, wherein the second setting means is the timing means. When the timekeeping information to be measured is within a predetermined range and the determination result of the first determination is the second determination result, the second selection state is greater than when the timekeeping information is outside the predetermined range. Ru der what proportion increases to set.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the advantageous degree of a 1st game state can be varied according to the time information which time-measurement means time-measures.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus of La-La cross section, (b) is Lb-Lb sectional drawing, (c) is a top view of a variable winning apparatus. (A)-(b) is a partial rear view of a variable prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the operation | movement of a flow-path solenoid and operation | movement of an opening-and-closing plate in 1 round of big hits. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of reach production, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents of special super reach production which is one mode of reach production. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of rushing into chance mode A, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of completion | finish of chance mode A. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the 1st random number counter C1 in 1st Embodiment, and the jackpot judgment value in a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 in 1st Embodiment and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 in the first embodiment and the winning in the normal symbol, and (b) is a small hitting type counter in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of C5 and the small hit type in a special symbol. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for consecutive resorts / chance B in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the content of the table for chance A in 1st Embodiment typically. It is the shown schematic diagram. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the transition method of the game state in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surfaces BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the game state update process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the chance mode setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation monitoring process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud monitoring process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the opening command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. . It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is for normal (when there is special figure 2 holding) in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for consecutive resorts / chance B (second half) in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is the chance in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for A (second half). It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is the flowchart which showed the selection process at the time of chance A performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is the main control in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal time selection process performed by MPU in an apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the selection process at the time of extended resorts performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 2nd Embodiment. is there. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the game state update process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process 3 which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the 1st per-random number counter C1 in 3rd Embodiment, and the jackpot judgment value in a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st winning type counter C2 in 3rd Embodiment and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the small hit classification counter C5 in 3rd Embodiment and the small hit determination value in a special symbol, (b) is a fluctuation pattern in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the scenario table typically. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit control processing 4 which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 3rd execution form. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A), (b) is a front view of the distribution unit in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a response | compatibility with the 1st hit type counter C2 in 4th Embodiment, and the jackpot type in a special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd per random number counter C4 in 4th Embodiment and the hit in a normal symbol. (A) is the block diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation | variation pattern table in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for normal in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the table for probability change provision in 4th Embodiment, (b) showed the content of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in 4th Embodiment typically. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fall lottery table in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main controller in 4th Embodiment. . It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of transition of the game state after the jackpot end in 4th Embodiment, and the fluctuation pattern table referred. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation start process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol jackpot determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation stop process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, entrance holes 64, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach, etc., and play the role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects a game ball launched by the ball launch unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball launch unit 112a. It may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a start port or the like is disposed, Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball enters the normal entrance. When passing 67, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are 6 types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”. After the special game state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to the results of the jackpot game Value (game value) is given to the player. Note that the four types of “hits A to D” are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is performed in the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The two types of jackpots E and F are jackpot types that can be determined when a lottery is executed in response to a ball entering the second entrance 640. Hereinafter, for simplification of explanation, the lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as “the first special symbol lottery”, and the ball is the second entrance. The lottery executed when the ball enters the mouth 640 is referred to as a “second special symbol lottery”.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each of the balls is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric ball 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.9 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 Opened. In addition, at the normal time, since the electric accessory 640a is disposed at the closed position, the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, when the normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  When the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and the lottery result is shown after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Normal symbols are stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are six types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack F”. When the “big hit A” and the “big hit E” are reached, a special game state (16 rounds big hit) with 16 rounds is set. On the other hand, when “Big Bonus B” and “Big Bonus C” are reached, the number of rounds is 12 special rounds (12 rounds of big jackpot), and when “Big Bonus D” and “Big Bonus F” are both rounds. Becomes a special game state of 4 rounds (4 rounds jackpot). Further, when a specific condition is satisfied during the jackpot game (when the ball passes a V winning switch 65e3 described later), the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during special symbol change) after the jackpot ends. When a high probability state of a special symbol is given, the high probability state of the special symbol continues from the end of the jackpot until the variation of the special symbol is completed 100 times (until the 101st variation is started). . Although details will be described later, the jackpots A and B and the jackpots E and F are configured so that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. On the other hand, the jackpots C and D are configured such that the ball does not easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Therefore, in the second special symbol in which either the big hit E or F (that is, the big hit that the ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3) is determined rather than the lottery of the first special symbol in which the big win C and D can be determined. The lottery is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, after the jackpots other than “Big Jack D” are completed, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends, and the second special symbol changes. Time is shortened. The state where the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased continues after the jackpot is finished until the variation of the special symbol is completed 100 times (until the 101st variation is started). Thereby, since it becomes easy to enter a ball into the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to perform the lottery of the 2nd special symbol advantageous for a player. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player. In the normal state of the normal symbol, basically, the variation time (10 minutes) of the second special symbol is extremely longer than the variation time (7 seconds to 90 seconds) of the first special symbol. For this reason, when the game is played aiming at the second entrance 640 in the normal state of the normal symbol, the game efficiency is remarkably lowered, so that the game can be played aiming at the first entrance 64.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called “high probability state of a special symbol” (special symbol probability variation state), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). Also, the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol high probability state) means that the normal symbol hit probability is increased and the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the second special symbol lottery is executed. An easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (ordinary symbol low probability state), which is a normal symbol hit probability normal state, that is, shorter than the short-time state Indicates that the hit probability is low.

  Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a special symbol probability change period. Further, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as a normal symbol short time period.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the jackpot varies according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. Further, instead of changing the period of time when the “normal symbol is in a short time state”, the electric accessory is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or at the time of one ordinary symbol. The number of times may be changed. In the present embodiment, if the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” is maintained from the end of the jackpot until the variation of the special symbol ends 100 times. The probability variation period of the special symbol is not limited to 100 times and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the high probability state of the special symbol may be continued until the next big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. Thereafter, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the game shifts from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol time-short state”. In this case, the set “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued after the jackpot ends until the special symbol variation display is completed 100 times. If the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the 100 special symbol lottery after the special symbol jackpot, the game returns to the “normal state of normal symbols”. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously executing a variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and a variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol (using the simultaneous variable method). ) For this reason, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the other special symbol may be executed in a state where the variation display of the 100th special symbol in the time reduction state is being executed, and the variation display may be started. In this case, the time reduction state is configured to end when the 101st special symbol lottery condition is satisfied after the time reduction state is set. Thereby, when a relatively long variation time (for example, 90 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the 100th variation display, the short variation time is continuously selected in the other special symbol lottery, It is possible to prevent (suppress) a problem that the number of time reductions substantially increases.

  If a new jackpot type other than jackpot D is continued while “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, then “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased to 100 special symbols after the end of the new jackpot. It continues until the variable display is finished.

  The same applies to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Of the 100 probability variation states, when the lottery condition for the 101st special symbol is satisfied during the execution of the variable display based on the lottery of the 100th special symbol. At that time, the probability variation state is terminated, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set. Thereby, it can prevent (suppress) that the lottery of the 101st special symbol will become a high probability.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in a part when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the specific winning opening 65a is won for a predetermined time (for example, until 3 seconds elapses or 10 balls are awarded). There is a small hit to be opened. The game state is not changed because this small hit is a type of loss, but the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) after the small hit is completed. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display associated with the lottery is shortened (to 3 seconds). As described above, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol becomes very long (600 seconds), so if the ball is continuously launched aiming at the second entrance 640, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated. , Disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, by shortening the variation time over a predetermined number of fluctuation displays after the small hit is completed, the second special is achieved by launching a ball aiming at the second entrance 640 during the predetermined number of times. The symbol lottery can be easily executed. That is, the player is in an advantageous state for a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) that is the gaming state in which the game stays for the longest time, the game can be performed with the expectation that it will be a small hit. In addition, since it is possible to shift to an advantageous state without going through a jackpot, the game in the normal state can be sharpened. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In the following description, a state where the lottery of the second special symbol set a predetermined number of times after the small hit is easy to be executed is referred to as “chance mode A”. On the other hand, among the states in which the “chance mode A” is not set, the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol are “normal mode”, the low probability state of the special symbol, and The normal symbol time-short state is referred to as “chance mode B”, the special symbol high-probability state, and the normal symbol time-short state is referred to as “rengo mode”.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball that has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of reserved spheres, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres), is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be suspended up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are being hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (special symbols corresponding to the jackpots A to D) (First symbol) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning prize), a change display of a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 to be described later. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 8-10, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 11) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the 3rd symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or longer), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot) It is possible to suppress overlooking. Also, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

  Further, when the combination of the 3rd symbols displayed in a stopped state is a combination corresponding to detachment and there is a holding ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after the stopping display for 1 second. . If there are a plurality of holding balls, a lottery is executed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol detachment is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where there is no reserved ball, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to have a ball entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has fired the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). There are many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the player has left the game, and the game by the pachinko machine 10 is not performed at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variation display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not yet been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image. In addition, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with different types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) that are likely to be selected in accordance with the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery is easily executed in the current gaming state. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to be executed in the current gaming state is executed is displayed.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display region Dm are displayed for the small right region Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and When a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the number of times of entering the ball is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is It is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol (second symbol) displayed in the lower half The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed, while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the reach effect in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9A shows an example of reach production. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the main symbol with the same number on the effective line L1 of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed, and only the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed. When it is in the state, the characters “Leach!” Are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the reach state (the chance that the main symbols with the same numbers are aligned on the active line L1) has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as a mode of variation production in which reach production occurs, normal reach with a short variation time and a low expectation level where the same main symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (which is a big hit) and a long variation time. In addition, a super-reach with a high expectation degree in which the same main symbols are aligned (a big hit) is provided on the effective line L1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9B, a display mode of special super reach in the present embodiment will be described. This special super reach is an aspect in the above-described super reach, and can be selected only when a lottery result of a special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. Specifically, the most unfavorable jackpot type (a jackpot D in which the number of rounds is four and the ball is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 and no short-time state is given) or the most advantageous jackpot type (chance mode) This special super reach is selected only when A becomes the small hit C) set 100 times.

  FIG. 9B shows a display mode when the speed of the middle symbol row Z2 that is variably displayed becomes low after the special super reach is selected and the reach effect (see FIG. 9A) is executed. It is the figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the special super reach, the character of the boy character displayed in the small area Ds2 looks like a flame, and the character “Large Chance” appears in the small area Ds3. A speech bubble appears inside. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the current variation display is likely to indicate a lottery result advantageous to the player. In the special super reach, the symbols scrolled from top to bottom at a low speed in the middle symbol row Z2 are the symbols with the word “chance mode” and the symbols with the numbers to which the reach is applied. There are only two types. Here, the symbol with the “chance mode” means the transition to the chance mode A. When the symbol is stopped on the active line L1, it becomes a small hit C, and 100 times after the small hit ends. The chance mode A is set.

  Even if the jackpot is D, the number of winning balls is small, and neither the probability change state nor the short-time state is given after the jackpot, so the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, since the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed is set over a maximum of 100 variation displays after the small hit C is completed, 100 for the player. You can get almost the same profit as if you set a short period of time. Therefore, when special super reach is executed, a game can be performed in the hope that a small hit C will be achieved rather than a big hit D.

  In a general pachinko machine, when a variation display is executed, a game is played in the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers are aligned (that is, a big win). In the machine 10, when the special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numerals are not arranged. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which a game can be played in the expectation that the degree of advantage will be off (small hit C) rather than the big hit (small hit D) with a low degree of advantage.

  FIG. 10A is a diagram showing the display contents when the symbol with the word “chance mode” is stopped and displayed on the active line L1. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the symbol indicating the transition to the chance mode A (the symbol with the word “chance mode”) is stopped and displayed, “chance mode GET !! "Appears in the small area Ds3. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the mode has shifted to the chance mode. Further, it is possible to make the player easily understand that a right strike (a game method in which a ball is launched on the right path of the game board 13 and aims at the second entrance 640) should be performed. In addition, a display area having a substantially rectangular shape with the characters “100 remaining times” is displayed at the lower left of the small area Ds3. This display area indicates the remaining number of lotteries in chance mode A, and the number of times displayed is decremented by one each time a change is started. This display area allows the player to easily understand the remaining number of lotteries in chance mode A.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram showing display contents at the time when the number of lotteries set as the chance mode A is completed. As shown in FIG. 10B, when the chance mode A is completed, a balloon with a letter “End of the chance mode ... please return to the left!” Is displayed in the small area Ds3. . Thus, the player is informed that the chance mode A has ended and that the player should make a left strike (a game method in which a ball is launched in the path on the left side of the game board 13 to aim at the first entrance 64). Can be easily understood.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, the symbol “O” as the symbol “2” and the symbol “×” are displayed. Fluctuation display in which symbols are alternately turned on is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is only for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is limited to 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. It becomes easy to enter the first entrance 64 when a ball is launched into the left path of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed). Further, although the rate of entering the ball is lower than that of making a left-hand hit, the ball is also shot when the ball is launched to the path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called right-hand hit). May enter the ball.

  A second entrance 640 into which a sphere can enter is disposed on the lower right side in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the second entrance 640 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a that can be opened and closed on the right side, and when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, It becomes easy to enter the ball. Therefore, in order to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it is basically sufficient to make a right turn. Although the rate of entering the ball is lower than that of the right-hand hit, it is possible to enter the second entrance 640 even when the left-handed ball flows down to the right side of the first entrance 64. There is sex.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed in the upper right of the second entrance 640 in front view, and a horizontally long specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed in the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed so as to become a big hit stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won). That is, the opening / closing plate 65f1 that normally closes the specific winning opening 65a is opened by a big hit, and a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. Also, the special winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 0.5 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won) even when the special symbol lottery is a small hit.

  In addition, a plurality of flow paths (normal discharge flow path 65e1 and special discharge flow path 65e2) through which a sphere can pass are provided inside the variable winning device 65. The game balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 65 flow down one of the flow paths (the normal discharge flow path 65e1 and the special discharge flow path 65e2) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The special discharge channel 65e2 is provided with a V winning switch 65e3 to which a high probability state (probability variation state) of a special symbol is given after a big hit by passing a sphere. The special discharge flow path 65e2 can pass only in the first round of the big hit. In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, a ball | bowl can enter into the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of jackpot (the opening-and-closing plate 65f1 is opened), and a ball | bowl is a special discharge passage. The period during which 65e2 can flow down is configured to vary depending on the jackpot type.

  More specifically, as the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of jackpot, the opening time is relatively short, and it is difficult to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1. Either the opening / closing operation (opening / closing pattern) or the opening / closing operation (opening / closing pattern) that allows the ball to easily enter the specific winning opening 65a during the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is relatively long. The jackpot type is set according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 7). During the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1, the ball can flow down through the special discharge channel 65e2, so pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a in the first round of the big hit. A game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game that is a big hit from becoming monotonous.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 4-6, the structure of this variable prize-winning apparatus 65 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 is combined with the opening forming member 65 b that protrudes from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 65 b, so that the variable winning device 65 is A base member 65c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 65c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The LED board 65d that is disposed, the back cover body 65e that holds the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65d are provided. The open / close unit 65f, the flow path cover body 65g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, the back cover body 65e, and the flow path cover body A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by 5g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i that is engaged with the switching member 65h, and a back surface that is disposed on the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. The cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k that is fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 65j and operates the link member 65i, and covers the flow path solenoid 65k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 65j with screws. And a fixing cover body 65m.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable winning device 65 is formed with a specific winning port 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can be entered. The specific winning opening 65a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is inclined to the lower left so that it is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor 65c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is disposed at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is in an open state in which a game ball can enter by an open / close plate 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be projected and retracted from the game board 13 side, and in a non-entry state. It can be changed to a possible closed state (difficult to enter). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing plate 65f1, and the upper part of the opening / closing door is configured to allow the game ball to roll. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the specific winning opening 65a by being retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

  With such a configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the variable winning device 65 and is guided to the second entrance 640 side. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 while keeping the right hit state even during the short-time game (including during the probability change game), and the game method to the left strike immediately after the big hit game It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

  Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can be won in the specific winning opening 65a efficiently. Therefore, the time required for the big hit game can be shortened and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  Fig.5 (a) is La-La sectional drawing shown in FIG.5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2 to be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is pivotally supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 65g. It is configured to be possible to arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 65e2. The The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 65e2 is detected by the V winning switch 65e3 configured by a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge flow path 65e2, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. Is discharged.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state after the big hit game is a high probability gaming state (by passing the V winning switch 65e3 described above during the big hit game, Probability game state) is set. That is, the V winning switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for giving a probability change gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to the low probability gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  As described above, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow route of the game balls that won the specific winning slot 65a during the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game. . The time required to pass from the opening of the variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 0.2 seconds at the shortest. Yes. As for the operation of the switching member 65h, the operation timing and the operation time are set in association with the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, the switching member 65h is operated for 3 seconds after the first round of the jackpot is started, and the special discharge flow continues to the V winning switch 65e3. The path 65e2 is allowed to pass.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, a case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 will be described. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 65e2.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and is guided to the normal discharge channel 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge flow path 65e1, a discharge confirmation switch 65e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Thereby, it can be determined by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 and the V winning switch 65e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. Therefore, when a defect such as a ball clogging occurs in the variable winning device 65, the defect can be detected early.

  In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a in the variable winning device 65 is detected by the magnetic sensor 65c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball as a privilege (in this embodiment, 15 for one ball prize). Award balls). Further, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass to the V winning switch 65e3, so that a lottery to determine whether or not to give a probability change gaming state can also be executed. it can. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving the probability-changing gaming state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 in the first round of jackpot is made variable according to the jackpot type, thereby making it easy to flow the sphere down the specific discharge flow path 65e2. Yes. In the present embodiment, two types of patterns (patterns that are difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a and patterns that are easy to enter) are provided as the opening / closing patterns of the opening / closing plate 65f1.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically illustrating a change in time of the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and a change in time of the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a for each jackpot type. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 7, the flow path solenoid 65k is kept in the off state before one big hit round is started. That is, before the start of one round, the sphere can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 65e1 (see FIG. 6B). This off state continues until one round starts. When the first round is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the on state for 3 seconds. That is, the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 (see FIG. 6A). When the three-second on-state period ends, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to the off-state again, and thereafter the off-state is maintained until the jackpot ends.

  Further, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 7, when either of the big hits C or D is reached, when one round starts, the closed opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened. When the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, a ball can enter the variable winning device 65. This open state continues only for 0.2 seconds. After 0.2 seconds have passed since the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened, one round is completed, and the closed state is maintained until two rounds are started after an interval period of 5 seconds. In addition, one round in this embodiment is complete | finished when three balls pass after ten balls enter into the specific winning opening 65a or one round is started. Since it is very difficult to make the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a in 0.2 seconds, in most cases where the jackpot C, D, the ball flows down to the special discharge channel 65e2. The jackpot ends without being able to. In other words, since the ball cannot pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the special symbol probability change state is not given after the jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot is C or D, the gaming state after the jackpot is disadvantageous for the player as compared to other jackpot types. Although the probability is low, if the ball can be entered into the special winning opening 65a within 0.2 seconds when the opening and closing plate 65f1 is opened, it is possible to shift to a special symbol probable state after the end of the jackpot. Can do. Therefore, even when the jackpot type is either jackpot C or D, it is possible to play a game with the expectation that the probability variation state will be set after the jackpot ends.

  Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 7, when the jackpot is A, B, E, or F, the opening / closing plate 65f1 is opened for 3 seconds after the first round of jackpot is started. That is, the period during which the flow path solenoid 65k is turned on coincides with the period during which the opening / closing plate 65f1 is set in the open state. Therefore, the V winning switch 65e3 can be easily passed by allowing the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a during a relatively long open period. Therefore, when the jackpot is A, B, E, or F, the ball can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, so even the ball is launched toward the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, after the big hit, it is possible to shift to a certain symbol probable state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ease of shifting to the probable change state varies depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, a game can be performed in anticipation that an opening / closing pattern that is easy to shift to a probability change state is set.

  In the present embodiment, the opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 and the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k, which are set when the jackpot is A, B, E, F, are made to coincide with each other. It is not a thing. For example, the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k may be configured to be longer by a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). With this configuration, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the opening / closing period of the opening / closing plate 65f1 is allowed to flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2 for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the probability variation state is not given even though the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not won any prize opening is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For the jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery (and the jackpot) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set initial values for the first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type counter C3 used for selecting the stop-type, the variation-type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern, and the first per-random-number counter C1. A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selection of the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 46). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning for the first entrance 64 and the winning for the second entrance 640. A second special symbol holding ball storage 203b to be stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of 4 reserved balls, and a total of up to 8 reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not being a big hit game, each counter value is set to the first counter value. When a special ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and a game ball wins the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to an execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner (dynamic Various settings and control processing for display) are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Various settings and control processes are executed.

  On the other hand, during the period when the special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, or during the period when the special symbol cannot be drawn, such as during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the first entrance 64. Alternatively, when winning at the second entrance 640, if the number of reserves for the winning entrance (starting entrance) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired. And stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning entrance. In addition, when the number of reserves for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and 5 winning balls (in this embodiment) Only the prize ball is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is not limited to this, and is less than 4 (for example, 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined in the big hit random number table (see FIG. 13B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot stipulated in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are set. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is “0” in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of “1 to 4”. If it is in the range of “1 to 4”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Furthermore, regardless of the gaming state, in the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is within the range of “295 to 299”, and the range of “295 to 299”. If it is within, it is determined that it is a small hit.

  Here, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b must be a random number that is a small hit. That is, if the random number is a special symbol small hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol small hit.

  On the other hand, a random number in which the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is a big hit of the special symbol. If so, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random value “0” is the first random number table as described above. 202a. In this way, since the total number of random numbers that is 300 is the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability that the special symbol is a jackpot is “1/300”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first per-random number counter C1, which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random numbers “1-4” are the first per-random number table as described above. 202a. Thus, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 4 among the total number of random number values of 300, the probability that a special symbol jackpot will be “1/75”.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13C). The Rukoto. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In this embodiment, the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, it is different from the symbol that has reached reach as the final stop symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected: “reach out” (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and “complete out” (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in the probable state of special symbols, since a big hit is likely to occur, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide as 0 to 89 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. The table is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected, and “reach out” is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that “reach out” is difficult to select. Also, if the special symbol is in a low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. The table for the low probability is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out”, and the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “out of reach” is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done.

  Further, the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type (small hit A) is based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14B). ~ C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern table. In this variation pattern, a variation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 46) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15 and 16) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 15B and 16). In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables dedicated to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, respectively, and a variation pattern table is set for each of the determination results. Yes. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and the ball has passed through the right or left normal starting port (through gate) 67. Is detected and stored in the ordinary drawing execution area of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 14A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. If the value matches the value of the random number that is the winning specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the second random number table 202c, when the normal symbol has a low probability (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are 199 random number values that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-203”. . Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, since the total number of random number values that can be hit is 199, the probability of winning a normal symbol is “199/240”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the short time state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. Among the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second per-random number counter C4, the total number of random number values that can be won is 200, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “1 / 1.2”. . In this way, in this embodiment, since the random number value that is a normal symbol hit is only one difference between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the hit probability is almost equal. Yes. Also, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol is hit are the same. Therefore, the ease of entering the second entrance 640 is the same in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. However, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is larger than the variation time in the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol. Become extremely long. As a result, in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), the lottery of the second special symbol is less likely to be executed than the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol, so the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol In this case, it is possible to cause the player to play a game aiming at the first entrance 64.

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol fluctuation display is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 3 seconds. Then, in the normal symbol low probability state, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 203”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened “0.9 seconds × one time”. On the other hand, if the obtained value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204” in the high probability state of the normal symbol, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended. Later, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened “for one second × one time”. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the gameability is not impaired.

  The normal variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol variation pattern is selected based on the value of the general variation variation counter CS2. Specifically, a variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds is selected in the range of the normal variation type counter CS2 in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range).

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 46).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 46), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 45) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the first hit random number table 202a and the second hit random number table 202c already described above. It has been.

  First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 13C) is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored for each special symbol type, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2 is performed. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (c), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from “0 to 9” is defined in association with “big hit A”. . This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Among the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become “big hit A”, so “big hit A” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This “big hit A” is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (in FIG. Since the lower reference) is set, the probability variation state is easily given after the big hit. For this reason, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player.

  Further, “big hit B” is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “10 to 49”. This “big hit B” is a big hit with 12 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 40 counter values that become “big hit B”, so “big hit B” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 40% (40/100). Although this “big hit B” has fewer rounds than “big hit A”, as with “big hit A”, the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a that can pass (easily) the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit Since the pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set, the probability variation state is easily given after the big hit. For this reason, it is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous to the player, although it is inferior to “jackpot A” (and “jackpot E” described later).

  In addition, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 69”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. This “big hit C” is a big hit with 12 rounds, similar to “big hit B”. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 20 counter values that are “big hit C”, so “big hit C” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 20% (20/100). The “big hit C” has a smaller number of rounds than the “big hit A”, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that makes it difficult to pass the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (see the middle row in FIG. 7) is set. Therefore, it is difficult to give a probable change state after a big hit (a short time state (chance mode B) of a normal symbol is likely to be set after a big win). For this reason, it becomes a disadvantageous jackpot type as compared to “big hit A” and “big hit B” in which a probability variation state (long-run mode) is easily set.

  Further, the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 “70 to 99” is defined in association with “big hit D”. This “big hit D” is a big hit with four rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 counter values that become “big hit D”, so “big hit D” is determined when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. The ratio is 30% (30/100). This “big hit D” has the smallest number of rounds among the six big hit types, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (see the middle of FIG. 7) ) Is set, it is difficult to give a probable change state after a big hit (a short time state (chance mode B) of a normal symbol is likely to be set after a big win). For this reason, it becomes the most unfavorable jackpot type among all jackpot types.

  On the other hand, for the second special symbol, a range of “0 to 69” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit E”. This “big hit E” is a big hit with 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 70 counter values that are “big hit E”, so “big hit E” is determined when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol The ratio is 70% (70/100). This “big hit E” has the largest number of rounds among the six types of big hit types, and the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a that can pass (easily) the V winning switch 65e3 in the first round of big hit (FIG. 7). Therefore, the probability variation state is likely to be given after the big hit. For this reason, it is one of the most advantageous jackpot types for the player, similar to “Big Jack A”.

  Further, for the second special symbol, a range of “70 to 99” of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit F”. This “big hit F” is a big hit with four rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 counter values that will be “big hit F”, so “big hit F” is determined when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. The ratio is 30% (30/100). The “big hit F” has the smallest number of rounds among the six types of big hit types, but the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a (as shown in FIG. Since the lower reference) is set, the probability variation state is easily given after the big hit. For this reason, although it is disadvantageous in the award sphere, it is easy to become the next big hit with a relatively small number of lotteries, and is advantageous compared to “big hit C” or “big hit D”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol is a lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning port 65a that can pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 50% (easy) is set. When the big win type (big hit A, B) is determined, but when the big special is drawn in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 100% (easy). The jackpot type (jackpot E, F) for which the opening / closing pattern of the winning opening 65a is set is determined. Therefore, once the consecutive-villa mode (special symbol probability change state and normal symbol short-time state) is set, the second special symbol lottery is made by winning to the second entrance 640 by right-handed. The state where it is easy to execute and the jackpot are easily repeated. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the consecutive resort mode. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the normal mode (special symbol low probability state and normal symbol normal state), the probability of winning a big symbol in the special symbol lottery is low, and basically the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed. , I will aim for a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol. However, even if the first special symbol wins, the open / close pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) that can easily pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is set only at a rate of 50%. Even if it is not a big hit or a big win, the normal mode that is disadvantageous for the player will continue for a long time because the open / close pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 (see the middle part of FIG. 7) is set. There is a case. If the disadvantageous state continues for a long time, the player may lose motivation for the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the normal mode, when the first special symbol lottery results in a specific lottery result (small hit), chance mode A in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed temporarily. It is configured to be able to migrate to. With this configuration, if the big win is obtained by executing the lottery of the second special symbol while the chance mode A is set, the V winning switch 65e3 can be passed (easily) at a rate of 100%. Since the jackpot type (jackpot E, F) for which the opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a is set is determined, it is possible to increase the player's motivation for the game when the chance mode A is set. In addition, the game in the normal mode can be performed in the hope that not only the jackpot but also the chance mode A is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14B, details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described. This small hitting type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of small hitting when the first special symbol lottery is won. In the small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each range of values of the small hit type counter C5.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, “small hit A” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 39”. This “small hit A” is a small hit type in which the chance mode A is set over 10 special symbol lotteries after the small hit ends. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hitting type counter C5, there are 40 random number values that are “small hitting A”, so when the special symbol lottery is won, “small hitting A” is obtained. The ratio is 40% (40/100).

  Further, in the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “40 to 79”, “small hit B” is defined in association with it. This “small hit B” is a small hit type in which the chance mode A is set over 20 special symbol lotteries after the small hit ends. Of the 100 random number values that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, there are 40 random number values that are “small hit B”, so when the special symbol lottery is won, “small hit B” is obtained. The ratio is 40% (40/100).

  Furthermore, “small hit C” is defined in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “80 to 99”. This “small hit C” is a small hit type in which the chance mode A is set over 100 special symbol lotteries after the small hit ends. Of the 100 random number values that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 20 random number values that become “small hit C”, so when the special symbol lottery is won, it becomes “small hit C”. The ratio is 20% (20/100).

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which transfers to the chance mode A more advantageous than a normal mode with a small hit as an opportunity. When the chance mode A is entered, the second special symbol variation time is short (3 seconds), which is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery (when the jackpot is reached, the second special mode is easy to set) Since it is easy to execute the lottery, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that the player will win a big hit. In addition, in the normal mode, since it is possible to shift to the chance mode A without going through the jackpot, even if the player has not won the jackpot for a long period of time, the game can be inflected. Therefore, even if a so-called big hook has occurred, motivation for the player's game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. Furthermore, the length of the chance mode A to be given (number of lotteries) is different for each small hit type. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has detected that the game has been won to play a game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a type of a small game set for a longer period. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. As described above, the variation pattern table 202d defines a random value for determining a variation pattern (variation time) for variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the normal mode, a extended mode (probable change state), and a chance mode B (short time). At least) includes a resort / chance B table 202d2 for determining the variation pattern in the state) and a chance A table 202d3 for determining the variation pattern in the chance mode A.

  First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 15B, the normal table 202d1 includes a random number (variation type counter value) for determining a variation pattern type (variation time) for each special symbol type and special symbol stop type. CS1 counter value) is defined.

  Specifically, when the first special symbol is drawn out and it is determined that the complete stoppage is determined as the stop type, the change of the change type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 98” and the fluctuation is short (7 seconds). Patterns are associated with each other, and a fluctuation pattern of extraordinary (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “99 to 198”. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is missed and the leaching reach is determined as the stop type, various values of the normal reach (30 seconds) in the range of “0 to 198” (that is, all ranges) as the value of the variation type counter CS1. Are associated. Also, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, which is a type of losing, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198” (that is, the entire range), with various super reach (60 seconds). ) Are associated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a lottery, the normal type (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0-50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the range of “51-179” Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with "180 to 198". That is, 60 seconds is selected as the variation time of the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol only in the case of a small hit or a big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the player enters the chance mode A or becomes a big hit when it develops into super reach. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security during the fluctuating time after recognizing that it has been reversed to super reach. Also, since the special reach with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds can be selected only in the case of a jackpot, when the fluctuation time exceeds 60 seconds (development into a special reach), the lottery result of this first special symbol will be It is possible to make the player recognize that it was a big hit. Therefore, the player can have a greater satisfaction.

  On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal mode, the super long variation (600 seconds) is applied to the values of all the variation type counters CS1 regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is associated. Thus, in the normal mode, when a game is played aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed in order to execute an advantageous lottery of the second special symbol, at least once every 10 minutes (600 seconds) However, the special symbol lottery is not executed, and the game efficiency can be extremely low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player always makes a right turn in the normal mode. As described above, the present embodiment employs the simultaneous variation method (a method in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel). Therefore, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 in the normal mode without being maliciously caused by a player's operation mistake or the like, and the 10-minute fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, it is left-handed. By aiming at the first entrance 64, the variation of the first special symbol can be executed during the variation of the second special symbol.

  Next, the details of the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 included in the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 is a table used to determine a variation pattern in the extended holiday mode (probability change state) and the chance mode B (short time state).

  In this consecutive resort / chance B table 202d2, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same variation type counter CS1, the same variation pattern (variation time) Is configured to be determined. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery is lost and the complete type is determined as the stop type, a short deviation (7 seconds) is associated with the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of “0 to 190”. , “191 to 198” is associated with extra long (10 seconds). As described above, in the consecutive-village mode (probability change state) and chance mode B (short-time state), when the special symbol lottery is missed, and when the perfect stop is determined as the stop type, the ratio of being out of the normal mode. Is set to be high. Thereby, the game efficiency in the extended game mode and chance mode B which are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode can be improved.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery is lost and the reach type is determined to be out of reach, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is set to a range of “0 to 198” (that is, all ranges) and various types of normal reach (30 seconds). Are associated. Also, when the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, which is a type of losing, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198” (that is, the entire range), with various super reach (60 seconds). ) Are associated.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol is a lottery, the normal type (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0-50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the range of “51-179” Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with "180 to 198".

  Thus, unlike the normal mode, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the extended-village mode (probability change state) and the chance mode B (short-time state) in which the extended-village / chance B table 202d2 is set. The variation time determined in (1) is equivalent to the lottery of the first special symbol. Thereby, the lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be efficiently performed by striking a ball aiming at the 2nd entrance 640 by right-handing. In other words, an advantageous state is obtained in which a probable variation state is easily provided when a big hit is achieved. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with a strong expectation that it will be a big hit.

  Next, details of the chance A table 202d3 included in the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The chance A table 202d3 is a table used for determining a variation pattern in the chance mode A as described above.

  In the chance A table 202d3, the correspondence between the variation display variation time based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same as the normal table 202d1. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. On the other hand, the variation display variation time based on the lottery of the second special symbol is determined to be 3 seconds irrespective of the lottery result of the second special symbol. In other words, since the variation time is shorter than the variation display executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol, by making a right strike at the second entrance 640, the game efficiency is better than the left strike. Become. Therefore, since the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be efficiently executed, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the chance mode A, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the specified period (the special symbol lottery is finished 10, 20, or 100 times after the end of the small hit. Is set). Since the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed in the normal mode, by shifting from the normal mode to the chance mode A through the jackpot, it is possible to make the player advantageous without going through the jackpot. . Therefore, in the normal mode, even if the player has not won a big hit for a long period of time (even if a so-called big hook has occurred), the motivation for the player's game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. it can. Furthermore, as described above, the length of the chance mode A to be given (number of lotteries) is different for each small hit type. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has detected that the game has been won to play a game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a type of a small game set for a longer period. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the chance mode A, a variation pattern of 3 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result. Is not something It may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. For example, if the lottery of the second special symbol is out of place, a variation pattern of 3 seconds is set uniformly, and if it is a win, the same variation pattern as that in the case of winning in the lottery of the first special symbol is selected. It is good also as a structure.

  Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second Special symbol holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, Probability change valid flag 203o, probability change valid timer 203p, discharge number counter 203q, hour and middle counter 203r, hit flag 203s, special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u, big hit medium flag 203v, small hit medium flag 203w ,chance Dokaunta 203x, abnormality monitoring flag 203Y, abnormality monitoring counter 203Aa, other and at least a memory area 203Z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery of special symbols is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  Similar to the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reservation areas. Each counter value acquired based on the start winning to the 2nd entrance 640 is memorized in this 2nd special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c includes one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding). 4th area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, which is the same as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed into the reserved area having the area number one smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S1304 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S303 in FIG. 29).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 29, FIG. 39). (See S1305). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of suspended balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the sound lamp control device 113 is affected by the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the variable display held at 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the second entrance 640 (start prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S1310 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 every time a new special symbol variation display is executed (see S903 in FIG. 35). Similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a change display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1505 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1503: No in FIG. 41). ).

  The probability variation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (a high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. If the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). In addition, as described above, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the normal symbol is in a short time state. Therefore, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and that the normal symbol is in the short-time state (the extended game mode).

  The initial value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0, and when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, 101 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2202 in FIG. 48). Further, in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) executed when starting the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S402 in FIG. 30). ). Further, the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38).

  The probability variation counter 203g is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36). (See S502 in FIG. 31 and S1002 in FIG. 36). Specifically, when the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) are executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is referred to. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 based on the first random number table 202a for time, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, the special symbol is selected based on the first random number table 202a for low probability. The lottery will be held.

  The probability variation counter 203g is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a time-short state in the normal symbol variation process (S1408, S1414 in FIG. 40). Specifically, in the normal symbol variation process, the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the hour / medium counter 203r are referred to. If any counter value is 1 or more, the second random number for high probability is used. If the normal symbol lottery is performed on the basis of the table 202c and the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / minute counter 203r are both 0, the normal symbol is drawn based on the second per random number table 202c for low probability. A lottery will be held. Further, in the normal symbol variation process, it is also referred to when determining the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit (see S1414 in FIG. 40).

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability changing state is determined by whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. Here, when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, the pachinko machine 10 is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. The flag 203h may be officially set to ON and returned. In this case, whether or not the V winning switch 65e3 passes before the power is turned off can be determined based on whether or not a probability variation passing counter 203i described later is a value greater than zero. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h and turning on the power again in a state where the power is turned off, and reducing damage on the amusement store side. it can.

  The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the V winning switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (one round in the present embodiment). Note that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203q described later. The probability variation passing counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed (S2311 in FIG. 49). Further, after executing the process of determining whether the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S2411 in FIG. 50). The probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of game balls won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65, one is added and updated (S2303 in FIG. 49). . On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning prizes in the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged prizes (the total value of the discharging number counter 203q and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether it is correct, the initial value is reset to “0” (see S2411 in FIG. 50). The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excited). In the present embodiment, when one round of big hit is started, the flow path solenoid 65k is set on for 3 seconds (see FIG. 7). In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set when one round of jackpot is started. On the other hand, 1 is subtracted and updated in the process of S2309 of the winning process (FIG. 49, S2113) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to an initial value of 0 in the initialized state.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, a later ball timer 203n, which will be described later, is added and updated by 1 (see S2405 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing plate 65f1 is closed, and for determining whether the time necessary for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Counter.

  The remaining ball timer 203n is a game that won the variable winning device 65 when one preset round (one round of jackpot in the present embodiment) is finished and the open / close plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for discriminating whether or not the time necessary for discharging the ball has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required until the game ball won in the variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n in advance. Is set as Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203n has reached the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dischargings (see FIG. S2407 in FIG. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, it can be notified at an early stage that the game balls are jammed in the variable winning device 65. In addition, the ball is illegally left inside the variable winning device 65, and the ball flows down after the next round of jackpot is started (that is, after the state that can flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2). Thus, an illegal act of passing the V winning switch 65e3 can be detected at an early stage.

  If the number of winning and the number of discharging does not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. If the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203h even if the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3. A configuration may be adopted in which is not set to ON. By comprising in this way, it can suppress that a probable state is provided improperly.

  The probability variation valid flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to OFF. When the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) based on the flow path solenoid 65k being ON is awarded V prize. It shows that the time is less than the time required to pass through the switch 65e3. That is, it is indicated that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time since the probability variation valid flag 203o described above is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by the probability variation valid timer 203p, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the V winning switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has entered the special discharge channel 65e2 to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds. Thereafter, even if the V winning switch 65e3 is passed, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to pass.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (see FIG. 6B), the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge flow path 65e2 and the game ball is passed through the V winning switch 65e3. Damage caused by fraud in which a game ball is pushed up by a piano wire or the like from the lower side of the V winning switch 65e3 or passed through a magnetic sensor or erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharge counter 203q is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S2411 in FIG. 50).

  The short / medium counter 203r is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the short time state. At this time, the short / medium counter 203r is set to 101 when the probability variation setting flag is OFF at the end of the big hit game. Similar to the probability variation counter 203g, the short / medium counter 203r is decremented by one in the game state update process executed when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started to be displayed (FIG. 30). S404). By adopting a configuration in which the time-saving state is terminated at the start of the fluctuation, the time-varying state (chance mode B) is set after the big hit, and the time when the 101st fluctuation display is started is in the middle of the 100th fluctuation display. Even the short-time state is terminated.

  The winning flag 203s is based on the fact that the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is a big hit or a small hit at the start of fluctuation based on having entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. This flag is set to ON when determined (see S507 in FIG. 31 and S1007 in FIG. 36). The hit flag 203s is set to OFF when displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit or the small hit (see S707 in FIG. 33 and S1207 in FIG. 38). Note that a 2-bit storage area is allocated to the hit flag 203s, and information corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the upper bits and information corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the lower bits. More specifically, if the winning flag 203s is “10H”, it indicates that the lottery of the first special symbol is a big win or a small win, and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the winning flag 203s is “01H”, it indicates that the lottery of the second special symbol is a big win and that the lottery result is being displayed. On the other hand, if the hit flag 203s is “00H”, it indicates that neither a big hit change nor a small hit change is executed.

  When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to ON at the start of the fluctuation, the winning flag 203s may be a big hit or a small win if the other lottery result is The winning flag 203s is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same way as a miss. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously subjected to the variable display that triggers the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. In other words, when one of the special symbols starts the fluctuation display that is a big hit, on the other side, the fluctuation display that becomes the big hit or the small hit is not started, and only the deviation fluctuation mode is displayed. The

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are constituted by the common hit flag 203s. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol have independent hit flags. It is also possible to configure such that a variable display that is a big hit or a small win is executed simultaneously for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By adopting such a configuration, even when the fluctuation display that becomes the big hit D is started with the first special symbol during the probability variation state, the fluctuation time is set long and the short fluctuation time with the second special symbol. By making it easy to make a lottery, it is possible to make a big hit with the second special symbol until the big hit D is started. Therefore, an effect that informs the player of the time until the jackpot D is started (that is, the period until the probability variation gaming state is finished) is executed, and the player is rushed to win the jackpot with the second special symbol. It is possible to execute an effect for playing a game. Therefore, a fresh performance can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S609 in FIG. 32). Thereafter, in the process of S701 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), the counter value corresponding to the elapsed fluctuation time (in this embodiment, one by one) is subtracted and updated.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a counter for counting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. When the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S1109 in FIG. 37). Thereafter, in the process of S1201 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 38, S207), the counter value (one by one in this embodiment) corresponding to the elapsed fluctuation time is subtracted and updated.

  The big hit flag 203v is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit. If the jackpot flag 203v is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot is not hit. This jackpot flag 203v is set to ON at the start of jackpot in the jackpot control process (see S2004 in FIG. 47) (see S2104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, it is set to off in the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot (see S2206 in FIG. 48).

  The small hitting flag 203w is a flag indicating whether or not the small hitting is in progress. If the small hitting flag 203w is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting small, and if it is off, it indicates that the small hitting is not being hit. The small hitting flag 203w is set to ON at the start of the small hits in the small hitting control process (see S2005 in FIG. 51) (see S2503 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, it is set off at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 51).

  The chance mode counter 203x is a counter indicating whether or not the current mode is the chance mode A. If the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 1 or more, it means that the current mode is the chance mode A. Therefore, when the variation pattern is selected, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the chance A table 202d3 described above. Is done. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0, it means that the current state is other than the chance mode A (normal mode, extended mode, or chance mode B). (One of the normal table 202d1 and the extended resort / chance B table 202d2) is read from the variation pattern table 202d and used to determine the variation pattern (variation time). The chance mode counter 203x is set to a value corresponding to the small hit type when the first special symbol lottery is won (see S803, S805, and S806 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, when the special symbol variation display is started, the value is subtracted by 1 (see S406 in FIG. 30).

  The abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing a game with a correct game method (a game method advantageous to the player) corresponding to the current game state. If this abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on, it indicates that the player may be playing an illegal (disadvantaged) gaming method, and if it is off, the player is playing the correct gaming method. Indicates that the

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the extended-village mode (probability variation state), chance mode A, and chance mode B, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened (see FIGS. 16A and 16B), It becomes easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to play the game by aiming at the second entrance 640 by making a right turn, so that a right turn is the correct gaming method. In this case, the lottery is usually executed with the second special symbol, and during the period when the game is being executed with the first special symbol, the player plays an illegal (unfavorable) game method. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON. When the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON, a period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is continuously ON is counted by an abnormality monitoring counter 203aa to be described later, and a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20 seconds). If it becomes above, abnormality alert | report (it displays an audio | voice and a warning image) will be performed.

  In the normal mode (the normal state in which the chance mode A is not set), it is a correct gaming method to play left-handed, but the second entrance 640 that should only enter right-handed or normal When it is determined that a ball has entered the entrance 67 and the second special symbol variation display or the normal symbol variation display has been executed, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON and abnormality notification is executed. It is configured as follows.

  The abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is a counter for counting (counting) a period during which there is a high possibility that a game is being performed by an unauthorized gaming method. When the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa reaches a count value corresponding to 20 seconds, abnormality notification is executed. The abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is updated by 1 when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is turned on during the fraud monitoring process (see S1702 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off, it is reset to 0 (see S1705 in FIG. 43).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

  Next, details of mode transition performed by using various tables provided in the ROM 202, various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, four types of modes are provided. Specifically, “normal mode” and “chance mode A” set in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), and a probability variation state (a high probability state of a special symbol, In addition, there are provided a “long-run mode” set as a normal symbol time-short state) and a “chance mode B” set as a time-short state (low probability state of a special symbol and a normal symbol time-short state). ing.

  The “normal mode” shown on the upper left side of FIG. 18 is the most disadvantageous state for the player because it is difficult for the second special symbol to be drawn. Since it is difficult to execute the lottery of the second special symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting the ball aiming at the first entrance 64. As shown in the upper left of FIG. 18, in the “normal mode”, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a special symbol lottery is won or a big hit. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the jackpot type is jackpot A or B, the mode shifts to the “renso mode”. If the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 due to the fact that the ball was not launched in the first round of the jackpot, etc., even if the jackpot is A, B, the “rensou mode” is set. No (chance mode B is set).

  Also, if the special symbol lottery results in a big hit and the jackpot type is a big hit C, the mode shifts to “chance mode B”. In the first round of jackpot, if the ball is entered into the specific winning opening 65a during the extremely short opening period of the opening / closing plate 65f1, and the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3, “Renso mode” is set (chance mode B is not set). Furthermore, when the special symbol lottery is a small hit, the process shifts to “chance mode A” after the small hit is completed. The number of lotteries that the “chance mode A” continues is different depending on the small hit type (see FIG. 14B).

  The “chance mode A” shown on the upper right side of FIG. 18 is the same as the “normal mode” as a gaming state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), but the second special symbol Since the fluctuation pattern table (chance A table 202d3) with a short fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is referred to (chance A table 202d3), it is a mode in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more easily performed than the “normal mode”. As described above, when the big special is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, as the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, there is a pattern (open / close pattern with a long opening time) that the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3. Since it is always set, it is more advantageous for the player than a big win in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the state more advantageous than the “normal mode” while being in the same gaming state.

  In the “chance mode A”, there is a possibility that the game will be a big hit or, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after entering the chance mode A, the mode may be shifted to another mode. Specifically, when a special symbol lottery is won, and when the jackpot E or F is reached, as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern in which a ball easily passes the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). Therefore, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot mode is set to the “renso mode”. Even if the jackpot is E or F, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it does not shift to the “renso mode” (only the short time state of the normal symbol is given) As a result, it shifts to chance mode B). Further, in the “chance mode A”, when the lottery of special symbols of the specified number of times (10 times, 20 times, or 100 times) is completed without making a big hit, the process returns to the “normal mode”.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the normal state, the two modes of the disadvantageous “normal mode” and the “chance mode A” which is more advantageous than the “normal mode” can be switched back and forth. . By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage can be switched according to the progress of the game even in the normal state which is more disadvantageous than the “renso mode” or the “chance mode B”. Therefore, even if it is not a big hit, the game can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The “chance mode B” shown in the middle part of FIG. 18 is a mode indicating a short time state as described above. In the short time state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to strike the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 by hitting right.

  In this “chance mode B”, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode when a special winning lottery is executed for a specified number of times (100 times) after the chance mode B is reached. is there. Specifically, when a special symbol lottery is won, and when the jackpot E or F is reached, as an opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1, an opening / closing pattern in which a ball easily passes the V winning switch 65e3 (see the lower part of FIG. 7). Therefore, when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, the jackpot mode is set to the “renso mode”. Even if the jackpot is E or F, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, it does not shift to the “renso mode” (only the short time state of the normal symbol is given) As a result, the chance mode B is looped). Further, in the “chance mode B”, when the lottery of the special symbol for the specified number of times (100 times) is completed without making a big hit, the process proceeds to the “normal mode”.

  The “renso mode” shown in the lower part of FIG. 18 is a mode indicating a probability variation state as described above. In the probability variation state, as described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, and the probability of winning the special symbol lottery increases (1/300 → 1/75), which is extremely advantageous for the player. It becomes.

  In the “renso mode”, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) after becoming the “renso mode”, there is a possibility of shifting to another mode. Specifically, in the “renso mode”, when the lottery of the special symbol is lost for 100 consecutive times, the mode shifts (falls) to the “normal mode”. On the other hand, basically, the jackpot does not shift to another mode (the “renso mode” is looped). Therefore, if you enter the “renso mode”, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is high, and if you win a big hit, the “renso mode” is set as the gaming state after that jackpot. This is a very advantageous mode in which the jackpot and the “renso mode” are easily repeated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the goal of shifting to the “renso mode”, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Even if the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot E or F, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the “renso mode” is not looped and the chance mode B is switched to. And migrate.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which traverses the some game state from which an advantage degree differs. In addition, it is possible not only to go back and forth between different gaming states, but also to go back and forth between modes with different degrees of advantage in the same gaming state. That is, in the most disadvantageous normal state, the degree of advantage can be varied according to the game situation. Therefore, even if the special symbol lottery continues for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous due to the change in the degree of advantage.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the opening / closing plate 65f1 for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a are opened and closed. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid or a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205. Various processes are executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and variable display effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 by the sound lamp control device 113. The variation content indicated by the variation pattern command (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)). ) Is used to determine more detailed variation content. As a result, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from the main control device 110.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2, Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2, secondary special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e, secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f, effect counter 223g, and game state storage area 223h And at least other memory area 223z.

  The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 54) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are fluctuating effects (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter that counts up to four times for each special symbol type the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 corresponds to the variable number of reserved balls based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is a variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol. Corresponds to the number of balls held.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reservation ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203e cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2. The number of reserved balls is managed for each special symbol type.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls for variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110, a special symbol When the change display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. The ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol is received from the reserved ball number command. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (see S4211 of FIG. 54). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2. At the same time, in order to notify the display controller 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display controller 114. Send.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113, the second special symbol. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of retained balls corresponding to the value of the retained ball number counter 223b2 is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 are the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. The value is changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It is possible to change while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 are respectively received when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 54) and turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4402 and S4407 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 receive the first special symbol stop type command and the second special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110. (See S4202 in FIG. 54), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4412 in FIG. 55). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a big hit type in the case of a big win). It is determined.

  The slave special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223e and the slave special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f are counters for counting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, respectively.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by incrementing the value by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed. .

  The gaming state storage area 223h is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time the status command output from the main control device 110 is received, the game status storage area 223h is updated to information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command (S4011, FIG. 52). (See S4215 in FIG. 54). More specifically, the game state storage area 223h is allocated with a 3-bit storage area, and whether the special symbol is in a probabilistic state or not in the normal symbol time-saving state in order from the upper bit. A value indicating whether or not the chance mode A is set is stored. For example, if the value of the game state storage area 223h is “110H”, it means that the special symbol is in a probable change state, and that the normal symbol is in the short time state (that is, the extended game mode), and if it is “010H”. This means that the special symbol has a low probability state and the normal symbol has a short time state (that is, the chance mode B), and “001H” means the chance mode A. On the other hand, if the information stored in the game state storage area 223h is “000H”, it means that the mode is the normal mode.

  By updating the game state storage area 223h according to the state command output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory 234a is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, the NAND flash memory 234a reads the instructions constituting the control program. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 57) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 26) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 59B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a generally facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image for displaying a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 57).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 21, a power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 21 shows that the display controller 114 turns on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of the “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and the entrance was detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21B and 21C are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. If an incoming ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the hour main image is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back image and the back image will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 22B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the rear surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, “river stage”, and “empty stage”, respectively. . FIG. 23 shows the rear surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the back images corresponding to the respective back surfaces A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the change of the back face type is determined based on the back face type selection table and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 displays the corresponding back image. First, the position between position a and position a ′ is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, the back image on the back E is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is the 3rd pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 23B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 23C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 23C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the back image shown in FIG. 23A is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 23A to 23C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 22A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are all back of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “city stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” displayed frequently is displayed. By making them all reside in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, a rear surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, a rear surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and a rear surface D corresponding to the “empty stage”, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The back E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 23A, and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 23A and FIG. 23B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is made resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, if so, the resident video RAM 235 is used. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a ′ (or the range from FIG. 23A to FIG. 23B). ) And image data corresponding to an image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or an image between FIGS. 23A and 23B) is displayed as a rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the back of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface BD can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back side B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is set from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface E, the images shown in FIGS. 23A to 23B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 23 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 23 (b) to 23 (c) and FIGS. 23 (c) to (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Accordingly, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 23B to 23C and FIGS. 23C to 23A are used for normal use while the images of FIGS. 23A to 23B are displayed. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The image of FIG. 23 (b) to (c) and FIG. 23 (c) to (a) is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time using the image data corresponding to the rear image that has been made. be able to.

  Note that the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the back B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  In addition, on the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicated image data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten main symbols (see FIG. 6) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols is resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the 3rd symbol display device 81 Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy”, “old man”, and “girl” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character symbol area 235e. By being resident, the display control device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, but for resident use. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. According to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect and an opening effect are provided. Display data tables corresponding to round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state from now on, and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type is the back surface A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (“city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “empty stage”, “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display one of them or to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to E is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target. Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the disconnection of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 24). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 25 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 25).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 25, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 26) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 25, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S6005 in FIG. 57). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process, an image other than the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Are set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 68B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 59B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 59) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 59 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 68A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed (see FIG. 68B). If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, which is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 59B). In step S6303), pointer update processing (see step S7205 in FIG. 65) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (Refer to FIG. 26), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 26, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 59B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 65). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 69). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 69). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 70).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the process drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 59B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 64A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 69), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 69). Thereby, the back image corresponding to the back image change command and the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back surface type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back A is set. When the rear image discrimination flag 233x receives a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 64 (a) ) (See S7002). At this time, all other bits are set off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (see S7221 in FIG. 65). When other display data tables other than those are set for the display data table buffer 233d, they are set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 61A, S6705 in FIG. 62A, and S6805 in FIG. 62B). , See S6905 of FIG. 63). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the confirmed display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 65) (S7214 in FIG. 65). When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 61A, S6705 in FIG. 62A, S6805 in FIG. 62B, FIG. 63, S6905). With the confirmation display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not the present is in the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 51. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process (see FIG. 45) activated upon power-on, a main process (see FIG. 46) executed after the startup process, and periodically (this embodiment). In this case, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) activated at a cycle of 2 milliseconds and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then startup processing (see FIG. 45) and main processing (see FIG. 46) will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) and the main process (see FIG. 46), commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes and provided in the RAM 203. Temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (FIG. 39, S108) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed for this purpose (S103). That is, for each round of jackpot (special gaming state), the specific winning opening 65a is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S104). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S106). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the second per-random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5, and these counter values are the maximum values (this embodiment) Then, when it reaches 299, 99, 239, 99), it is cleared to 0 respectively. When the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the first per-random number counter. The initial value of C1 or the second random number counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 to set the third symbol variation pattern is executed. Then (S107), then, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S108). Details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, and details of the start winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process (S108) is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a normal symbol variation process for a game ball passing through the normal ball slot 67, is executed (S109). A through gate passing process is executed for the passing of the game ball (S110). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, and details of the through gate passage process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the through gate passing process (S110) is executed, a fluctuation monitoring process (S111) for monitoring whether the player is playing the correct game corresponding to the gaming state is executed, and then the player does not correspond to the gaming state. When a (illegal) game is being executed, a fraud monitoring process (S112) for monitoring the period is performed. Details of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, and details of the fraud monitoring process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the fraud monitoring process (S112), a launch control process for executing control related to the launch of the sphere is executed (S113), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S114). The timer interrupt process ends. In the firing control process (S113), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variation process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), various determinations and determinations are made using each counter value acquired based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, Control is performed such that the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can control the variable display at the same time in a variable display mode corresponding to the determination result, or stop the display in the display mode indicating the determination result. Is done.

  In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit or small hit game is being executed (S201), and when it is determined that a big hit or small hit game is being executed. (S201: Yes), since the start or stop of the special symbol variation display should not be set, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is made (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). If it is determined in the process of S202 that the first special symbol variation display is in progress (S202: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204), and the process proceeds to S205. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. In the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), when the specified variation time has elapsed during the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol lottery is performed. A process of stopping the variable display with the pattern indicating the result is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol is not being displayed (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203), and the process proceeds to S205. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S203), the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a. Then, the jackpot determination and the variation pattern selection process based on the reserved data are executed.

  In the process of S205 that is executed after the first special symbol variation start process (S203) or the first special symbol variation stop process (S204) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. (S205). In the process of S205, when it is determined that the second special symbol is in a variable display (S205: Yes), a second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S207), and this process ends. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. In the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 38, S207), the second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204) is performed in the same manner as the first special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 33, S204). When the specified fluctuation time has elapsed during the fluctuation display, the process of stopping the fluctuation display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S205 that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a varying manner (S205: No), the second special symbol variation starting process is executed (S206), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. In the second special symbol variation start process (S206), as in the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S203), the second special symbol reserved ball count is stored. If hold data (various counter values) is stored in the area 203b, jackpot determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the hold data is executed.

  Next, the details of the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 28, S107), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 29, S203), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1 is subtracted (S303), and the reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after the subtraction is set (S304). .

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) described later executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b1. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  When the process of S304 is completed, a game state update process is then executed (S304). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but in the game state update process (FIG. 30, S304), various counters (probability change counter 203g, hour / medium counter 203r, chance mode counter 203x) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. This is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the value.

  When the process of S305 is completed, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 31, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 31, S306), the first per-random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203c. Based on this value and the current gaming state, a determination is made as to whether or not a big hit.

  When the process of S306 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307), and the process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32. In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 32, S307), the first per-random number counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203c. Based on the determination result based on the value of C1, processing for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the gaming state update process (S305) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the game state update process (S305).

  When the game state update process (see FIG. 30) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S401), and if it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is greater than 0 ( (S401: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the probability variation counter (S402), and the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

  In the process of S403, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203r is greater than 0 (S403). In the process of S403, if it is determined that the hour / minute counter 203r is greater than 0 (S403: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter 203r is 0 (S403: No), the process of S404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S405.

  In the process of S405, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S405). If it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S405: Yes), the chance mode counter 203x 1 is subtracted (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S405: No), the process of S406 is skipped and the process proceeds to S407.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed. More specifically, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is updated from 1 to 0 to change from the probability variation state to the normal state, or the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203r is updated from 1 to 0 to change from the time reduction state to the normal state. Or the value of the chance mode counter 203x is updated from 1 to 0 to determine whether or not the chance mode A is changed to the normal mode in the normal state. In the process of S407, if it is determined that the gaming state has been changed (S407: Yes), a state command indicating the changed gaming state is set (S408), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the gaming state has not been changed (S407: No), the process of S408 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

  Note that the status command set in the process of S408 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S2001) of a main process (see FIG. 46) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. With this state command, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S501). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state) (S502). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation state) (S502: Yes), the jackpot defined in the first per-random number table 202a for high probability And whether the first random number counter C1 obtained from the counter buffer matches the random number, and the result of the determination (lottery result) is acquired (S503). On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S502: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability is stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined whether or not the specified random number value corresponding to the big hit matches the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S504).

  When the processing of S503 or S504 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the winning flag 203s is on (S505). If it is determined that it is on (S505: Yes), this first special symbol big hit determining process Before the execution (see FIG. 31), it is determined that a big win or a small win is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the variable display indicating the determination result is being executed. As the stop symbol type to be displayed on the symbol display device 37, the off symbol of the first special symbol is set (S510), and this process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are big wins, and the other big win is started during the execution of one big win.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S505 that the winning flag 203s is not ON (OFF) (S505: No), then the lottery result (determination result) of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit Is determined (S506), and when it is determined that either the big hit or the small win (S506: Yes), the winning flag 203s is set to ON (S507). Next, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to jackpot or small jackpot (S508), the symbol of the first special symbol (big jackpot or jackpot) is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S509), the book End the process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S506, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is neither big hit nor small hit (the lottery result is out) (S506: No), the process proceeds to S510 and stops. The off symbol of the first special symbol is set as a symbol (S510), and this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, “-” indicating detachment is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting a symbol to be stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) is a jackpot. (S601) If the jackpot is determined (S601: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b is read and the jackpot type of the first special symbol corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is selected. (S602). When the process of S602 ends, the process proceeds to S603.

  On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big win (small win or miss) (S601: No), the process of S602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S603. To do.

  In the process of S603, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S603). If it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S603: Yes), it means that the first special symbol lottery has been executed in the chance mode A, so the chance A table 202d3 is used as the variation pattern table. Is read (S604), and the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S603: No), it is then determined whether both the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / short time counter 203r are 0 (S605).

  In the process of S605, if it is determined that both the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the hour / minute counter 203r are 0 (S605: Yes), it means that the current state is the normal mode. The normal table 202d1 is read as a pattern table, and the process proceeds to S608. On the other hand, when it is determined that one of the value of the probability variation counter 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203r is 1 or more (S605: No), this means that the probability variation state or the time reduction state is being established. Therefore, the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 is read as a variation pattern table (S607), and the process proceeds to S608.

  In the process of S608, one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected from the read fluctuation pattern table based on the lottery result of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S608). Next, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is generated based on the selected fluctuation pattern, and a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter (S609). Next, the special figure 1 stop type command is set (S610), and this process is terminated.

  The special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S2001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines a detailed fluctuation display effect mode based on the fluctuation pattern notified by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command.

  Next, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process (S204).

  In the special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 33, S204), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is subtracted and updated (S701), and the counter value after the subtraction is the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern set this time. It is determined whether or not the counter value corresponds to the end (S702). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is not a counter value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S702: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S702, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203t is a counter value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S702: Yes), the current fluctuation pattern is It is determined whether or not a jackpot is set as a lottery result of one special symbol (S703). If it is determined in the process of S703 that the jackpot is set (S703: Yes), a special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol is set (S704), and the first symbol display is performed. The change stop of the second special symbol of the device 37 is set (S705). Then, the start of jackpot is set (S706), and the values of the win flag 203s, the probability variation counter 203g, the hour / medium counter 203r, and the chance mode counter 203x are reset (S707), and the process proceeds to S709.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S703, when it is determined that a lottery result other than the big win (miss or small hit) is set as the lottery result of the first special symbol (S703: No), the process shifts to the chance mode A. In the case of shifting to the chance mode A, a chance mode setting process for setting the number of chance modes is performed (S708), and the process proceeds to S709. Details of the chance mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S709, a special figure 1 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the symbol indicating the jackpot is set (S709), and the variation of the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S710). ), This process is terminated.

  By configuring in this way, the second special symbol can be stopped at the symbol corresponding to the deviation in accordance with the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol corresponding to the winning symbol. Therefore, the player can be concentrated on the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the chance mode setting process (S708) which is one process of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this chance mode setting process (S708).

  When this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is set as the lottery result of the first special symbol (S801), and it is not a small hit (ie, it is out of place). (S801: No), since the chance mode A is not set, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the small hit (S801: Yes), it is determined whether the small hit type is the small hit A (S802). .

  If it is determined in the process of S802 that a small hit is A (S802: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 10 (S803), and the process proceeds to S807. Thereby, after the small hit is completed, it is possible to set a chance mode A that is more advantageous than the normal mode over 10 special symbol lotteries (the second special symbol lottery is easily executed).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit type is not the small hit A (S802: No), then it is determined whether the small hit type is the small hit B (S804). (S804: Yes), the value of the chance mode counter 203x is set to 20 (S805), and the process proceeds to S807. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S804 that the current small hit type is not small hit B (that is, small hit C) (S804: No), 100 is set as the value of the chance mode counter 203x (S806). ), The process proceeds to S807.

  In the process of S807, a state command indicating the transition to the chance mode A is set (S807), and then a display special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the second special symbol with the symbol corresponding to the deviation is set ( S808). Next, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S809), the start of the small hit is set (S810), the hit flag 203s is set to OFF (S811), and this processing Exit.

  By this chance mode setting process (see FIG. 34), when the small hit is made, the chance mode A of the number of times corresponding to the small hit type can be set. As a result, when the game state is the normal state, the chance mode is relatively advantageous from the normal mode that is most disadvantageous for the player every time a small hit is made (the second special symbol lottery is easily executed when the player strikes right). A can be transferred to A. Therefore, even if it is not a big hit, the game in the normal state can be inflated, so that the game can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the second special symbol variation start process (S206) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 35), first, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is acquired (S901), and the acquired second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203e is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value (N2) is greater than 0 (S902). In the process of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S902: No), there is no reserved ball and the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, the processing of S903 to S906 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S907. On the other hand, in the processing of S902, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S902: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) 1 is subtracted (S903), and a reserved ball number command for notifying the sound lamp controller 113 of the value after the subtraction is set (S904).

  Next, the game state update process described above with reference to FIG. 30 is executed (S905), the second special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S906), and the process proceeds to S907. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, but the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36, S906) is performed in the first special symbol stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the random number counter C1.

  In the process of S907, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S907), and this process ends. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 37, S907) is performed by the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern from the variation pattern table 202d in accordance with the value of CS1.

  Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 35, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S906).

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36), first, various counter values stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are acquired (S1001). Next, referring to the value of the probability variation counter 203g, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (S1002). In the processing of S1002, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (that is, the gaming state is the probability variation state) (S1002: Yes), the first per-random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. The lottery result indicating whether or not the jackpot random number specified in 13 (b) matches the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is acquired (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1005.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1002 that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (that is, the gaming state is the normal state) (S1002: No), the first per-random number table 202a for low probability ( A lottery result as to whether or not the jackpot random number specified in FIG. 13B matches the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is acquired (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005.

  In the processing of S1005, it is determined whether or not the winning flag 203s is turned on (S1005), and when it is determined that the winning flag 203s is turned off, that is, the big hit variation display is executed in the first special symbol. If it is determined that there is not (S1005: No), it is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the processing of S1003 or S1004 is a big hit (S1006). In the process of S1006, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S1006: Yes), the winning flag 203s is set to ON (S1007), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a big win (S1008). . Next, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1009), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1005 that the winning flag 203s is ON (S1005: Yes), or when it is determined that the set lottery result is out of the process in S1006 ( (S1006: No), a symbol indicating a deviation of the second special symbol is set in the first special symbol display device 37 (S1010), and the process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S907).

  In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is set as a lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101). In the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the big win is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1101: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202b is read and the first hit type counter C2 is counted. A hit type corresponding to the value is selected (S1102). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1103. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the selection is set as the second special symbol lottery result (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1103.

  In the processing of S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S1103). If the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (S1103: Yes), the change pattern table is for chance A. The table 202d3 is read (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1108. On the other hand, if the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (S1103: No), it is determined whether the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / minute counter 203r are both 0 (S1105). In the processing of S1105, if each value of the probability variation counter 203g and the time reduction counter 203r is both 0 (S1105: Yes), the normal table 202d1 is read as the variation pattern table (S1106), and the processing proceeds to S1108. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if one of the probability variation counter 203g and the hourly / intermediate counter 203r is 1 or more (S1105: No), the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 is read as the variation pattern table. (S1107), the process proceeds to S1108.

  In the process of S1108, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the set special symbol lottery result and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern table (S1108). Next, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is generated (set) based on the fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of S1108, and a counter value corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u ( In step S1109, a special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type is set (S1110), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process (S207).

  In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is subtracted and updated (S1201), and the counter value after the subtraction corresponds to the end of the fluctuation time. Whether it is a value or not is discriminated (S1202). In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the counter value does not correspond to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: No), this process is terminated without setting the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1202, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203u is a value corresponding to the end of the fluctuation time (S1202: Yes), a big hit is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S1203). If it is determined that the jackpot is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1203: Yes), the voice lamp control device so as to stop and display the variation of the first special symbol with the set stop type A special figure 1 confirmation command for notifying to 113 is set (S1204). Next, a stop display of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S1205). Then, a big hit start is set (S1206), and the values of the win flag 203s, the probability variation counter 203g, the hour / medium counter 203r, and the chance mode counter 203x are reset (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1203 that a small hit or miss is set as the lottery result of the second special symbol (S1203: No), the process of S1204 to S1207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

  In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the change in the second special symbol is displayed with the set stop type (S1208). The change stop of the second special symbol being executed in the display device 37 is set (S1219), and this process is terminated.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Can be made. Therefore, a lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit will be given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the lottery game is executed with the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed at the same time, if a big hit game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, Since the variation display of the special symbol is removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the start winning process (S108) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S108). In the start winning process (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not a ball has been won at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (whether or not the start is won). Each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively (up to four for each of the entrance 64 and the second entrance 640). It is processing to do.

  In the start winning process (see FIG. 39), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning slot 64 (start winning prize) (S1301). Here, a winning at the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1301: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired ( In step S1302, it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1303). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is stored up to the upper limit.

  Then, even if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S1301: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d If it is not less than 4 (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1307 without acquiring various counter values in the counter buffer. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S1301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special figure reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S1303: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d (1304), and a holding ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the added holding ball number is set (S1305). .

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S2001) of a main process (see FIG. 46) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter in the RAM 223. It is stored in 223b1.

  After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S1305, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type classification counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S106 of the timer interrupt processing described above, The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. In the process of S1306, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In addition, about each process from S1307 to S1312, the process similar to the process performed with respect to the start winning to the 1st entrance slot 64 performed by each process from S1301 to S1306 is 2nd pitch. Since it is executed for the start winning to the mouth 640, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the normal symbol variation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 640a, and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 40), first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S1401). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is being performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning symbol. Up to. If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1401: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1401: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is in a variable display. (S1402). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol variation time being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has passed ( S1420). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1419, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second symbol display unit 88.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the processing of S1420 (S1420: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1420 that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol that is variably displayed has elapsed (S1420: Yes), stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1421). . In the process of S1421, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1413, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “○” symbol as a second symbol (lighted display). ). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode at the time of disconnection is set by the processing of S1418, the “x” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). When the stop display is set by the processing of S1421, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the processing of S1413 and the processing of S1418. 2 Stop display (lights up) on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether the current normal symbol lottery result is a win or not (S1422). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a win (S1422: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the ordinary electric accessory 640a is set (1423). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is out of place (S1422: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1402 that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1402: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1403).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1404), and it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0. (S1404: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1404: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S1405).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1406). In the process of S1406, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → the execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → the normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → the normal symbol hold second area, and the normal symbol hold fourth area. → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal symbol hold third area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1407).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in a short-time state (including a probability variation state) (S1408). More specifically, when the value of either one of the probability variation counter 203g and the time shortening counter 203r is 1 or more, it is determined that the state is the time shortening state (or the probability variation state). In the processing of S1408, if it is determined that it is not in the time-short state (S1408: No), whether or not it is determined based on the winning determination value of the random symbol per normal symbol for low probability (see FIG. 14A). A result is acquired (S1411). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1408 that the game is a short-time game (S1408: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1409). In the process of S1409, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit (S1409: Yes), the process of S1411 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not a big hit (S1409: No), the hit determination value of the random number table per normal symbol for high probability (see FIG. 14A) On the basis of the result, the determination result is obtained (S1410).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (S1412), and if it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (ie, it is out of place) (S1412: No), the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1418), and the process proceeds to S1419. On the other hand, in the process of S1412, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (S1412: Yes), the display mode at the time of win is “◯”. Is set (S1413).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a short-time state (including a probability change state) (S1414). If it is determined that a short-time game is being played (S1414: Yes), the process proceeds to S1416. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1414 that the time-short state is not being reached (S1414: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1415). In the process of S1415, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1415: Yes), the process proceeds to S1416.

  In the process of S1416, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1416), and the process proceeds to S1419. On the other hand, in the process of S1415, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not big hit (that is, the normal symbol is in a low probability state) (S1415: No), the electric accessory 640a is opened. The time is set to 0.9 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1417), and the process proceeds to S1419.

  In the process of S1419 executed after executing any one of S1416 to S1418, the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3 seconds (S1419), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S110). This through gate passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process (see FIG. 41), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1501). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed the normal entrance 67 (S1501: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1502), and the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter is acquired. It is determined whether the value (M) of 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1503).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f If it is not less than 4 (S1503: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S1501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), the normal symbol reservation ball number counter One is added to the value 203M of 203f (S1504). Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (normal symbol reserved first to fourth areas) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S1505). In the processing of S1505, the value of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is referred to. If the value is 0, the normal symbol reservation 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal symbol hold 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal symbol hold 3 area, if the value is 3, the normal symbol hold 4 area first. The area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the fluctuation monitoring process (S111) which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation monitoring process (S111). In this variation monitoring process (S111), a process of monitoring whether the player is playing a correct game corresponding to the gaming state is executed. In the present embodiment, in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), basically, the sphere is fired with the firing strength that the sphere passes through the path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. The gaming method (left-handed) becomes a regular gaming method, and the ball is fired with a firing strength that the ball passes through the path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 during the big hit, the small hit, the short-time state, and the probability changing state. The game method (right-handed) is the regular game method. In the normal state, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the game pattern is deteriorated because the very long variation (600 seconds) is set as the variation pattern. For this reason, making a right strike in a normal state is a disadvantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being disadvantaged to the player by monitoring whether the game is played in the correct way. Also, it is possible to monitor the act of drawing the second special symbol that is advantageous by making a right-hand strike and making a prize at the second entrance 640. The possibility that the Even in the normal state, if the chance mode A is set over a special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (10, 20, or 100) after a small hit, a right game is a regular game. Become a method.

  In the fluctuation monitoring process (see FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is being made (S1601). If it is determined in the processing of S1601 that neither big win nor small win is found (S1601: No), it is in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (that is, the value of either the probability variation counter 203g or the time reduction middle counter 203r) Is determined to be 1 or more) (S1602), and if it is determined that the probability variation state or the short-time state is present (S1602: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being variably displayed (S1603). . If it is determined that the first special symbol is being variably displayed (S1603: Yes), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process is terminated. Here, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is a flag for determining whether or not the player is playing a game in the correct gaming method (left-handed or right-handed) corresponding to the gaming state. When the time for which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds or more), an abnormality notification command is set, and the abnormality notification command (third symbol) is set by the command by the command. Characters indicating abnormality (for example, character display indicating the correct gaming method (please make a right strike)) are executed on the display device 81, and an error sound or an instruction voice to the correct game is output by voice. An abnormal signal is output to the computer)).

  In the promiscuous state and the short-time state, by playing a game in the correct gaming method (right-handed), it becomes easy to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery, and the disadvantageous first special symbol lottery is executed. It becomes difficult. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is highly likely that the player is playing the game with an unfavorable left-handed strike. In this case, by continuously displaying the first special symbol variation display for a predetermined period (for example, 120 seconds), it is possible to continue the game with an illegal gaming method that is disadvantageous to the player by adopting a configuration for notifying the abnormality. Can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the jackpot is in the big hit or the jackpot (S1601: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S1603 that the first special symbol is in a variable stop state ( S1603: No), the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to OFF (S1605).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1602 that neither the probability change state nor the short-time state is present (S1602: No), it means that the current gaming state is the normal state, so the value of the chance mode counter 203x is next. It is determined whether it is greater than 0 (that is, whether the right-handed is the chance mode A which is a regular game method) (S1606). In the process of S1606, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 0 (S1606: Yes), the processes of S1603 to S1605 are executed in the same manner as in the probability change state or the short time state.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1606, when it is determined that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 0 (normal mode) (S1606: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed. (S1607). If it is determined in the processing of S1607 that the normal symbol is not changing (S1607: No), then it is determined whether the second special symbol is changing (S1608), and the second special symbol is changing. Otherwise (S1608: No), in the normal mode, there is a high possibility that the player is playing the game with the regular gaming method (left-handed), so the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to off (S1609), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1607 that the normal symbol is changing (S1607: Yes), or in the processing of S1608, it is determined that the second special symbol is changing (S1608: Yes), this means that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 or entered the second entrance 640 during the normal mode, and the player is likely to be right-handed . Therefore, in this case, the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to ON (S1604), and this process ends.

  In this way, in the normal mode, it is a regular gaming method to play left-handed, but if the normal symbol or the second special symbol that can be displayed variably when right-handed is changing, it is incorrect. The possibility of playing a game with the game method increases. Therefore, by setting the abnormality monitoring flag 203y to on, if the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is kept on for more than a predetermined time (120 seconds in this embodiment), abnormality notification is executed. The game method can be discovered earlier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an unforeseen disadvantage from being given to the hall due to illegal games.

  Next, the fraud monitoring process (S112), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the fraud monitoring process (S112). In this fraud monitoring process (see FIG. 43), the time period during which the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set to on is counted, and an abnormality alarm command is set when the predetermined time or longer (120 seconds or longer in this embodiment) is reached. Processing is executed.

  In the fraud monitoring process (FIG. 43, S112), first, it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on (S1701). If the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is on (S1701: Yes), the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is set. 1 is added and updated (S1702). Then, it is determined whether the value of the updated abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 120 seconds) (S1703). (S1703: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (S1703: Yes), an abnormality alarm command is set (S1704), and this process ends.

  This abnormality alarm command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this abnormality alarm command, processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 or the sound output device 226 to output an abnormality alarm mode is executed. Thereby, fraud and a malfunction can be discovered at an early stage.

  In addition, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is set on, the abnormality alarm command is set when it is kept on for a predetermined period (120 seconds in this embodiment) or more. Even if there is a period when the game is not played with the regular gaming method for a short time (less than 120 seconds) at the time of switching of the gaming state, etc. (for example, a period for switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state) Since the abnormality alarm is not output, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player feels uncomfortable.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined period is 120 seconds. However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and the predetermined period is configured with a longer period of time than the necessary switching time in normal gaming when switching the gaming state. do it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormality alarm is erroneously output while the player is changing the firing strength (the direction in which the ball is launched).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is off (S1701: No), the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1705), and this processing ends. To do.

  As described above, when the abnormality monitoring flag 203y is determined to be off, the value of the abnormality monitoring counter 203aa is reset to the initial value, so that the process of setting the abnormality alarm command is avoided, and the normal gaming method is used. Although a game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a problem that an abnormal alarm is output.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

  This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 45), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1904). If it is turned on (S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to S1910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905). (S1905: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1910 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1905: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S1906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1910 even in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1911, S1912) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as at the start of business in a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 3) is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1911, S1912) is executed.

  Similarly, initialization processing (S1911, S1912) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1911, S1912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1912). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1913.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is also stored. If normal (S1907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1913), and a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state at the time of start-up. Is set (S1914). Thereafter, the interrupt is permitted (S1915), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 46) described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, roughly divided, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (see FIG. 46), first, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) External output processing to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2001).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2003). After the process of S2003, the jackpot control process for setting the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 and the flow path solenoid 65k in the jackpot game is executed (S2004). Details of the jackpot control process (S2004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the big hit control process (S2004) is executed, the small hit control process (S2005) for setting the operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 that is hitting the small hits is executed. Details of the small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the small hit control process (S2005) is completed, an electric accessory opening / closing process is then executed (S2006). In this electric accessory opening / closing process (S2006), an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed. Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S2007).

  When the process of S2007 is completed, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S2008). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the second symbol display device 83 Normal symbols are displayed. Then, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the normal symbol is hit, the normal electric accessory 640a is held for a predetermined time (1 second × 2 times, or 0.9 second × 2). Times) released.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010). ) If the predetermined time has already passed (S2010: Yes), the process proceeds to S2001, and the above-described processes after S2001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2010: No), the remaining time until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the next main process is executed. Within the time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2011, S2012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2002 (S2012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S2001-S2008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S2009, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S2009: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 44 has been executed, the power-off process after S2013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2013), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). Transmit (S2014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S2015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S2009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2001 to S2008 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2011 and S2012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from the process of S2001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S1901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot control process (S2004) that is one process in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S2004).

  In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S2101). Specifically, in the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33), the start of jackpot is set (S706 in FIG. 33), or the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38). Among them, when the jackpot start is set (see S1206 in FIG. 38), it is determined that the jackpot is started in the processing of S2101.

  If it is determined in the process of S2101 that the special symbol jackpot is started (S2101: Yes), an opening command for executing an opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot is set (S2102), and the flow path solenoid 65k. The operation pattern (see the upper part of FIG. 7) is started (S2103). Next, the big hit flag 203v is set to ON (S2104), and this process is terminated. Here, by setting the jackpot flag 203v to ON, it is determined that the jackpot is being hit in the processing of S201 of the special symbol variation process, and the variation start and variation stop of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. Since the process can be terminated without executing various processes for setting, it is possible to prevent the problem that the variable display is started despite the big hit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the special symbol jackpot is not started (S2101: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot is being hit (S2105). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S2105, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2105: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2105 that the special symbol is a big hit (S2105: Yes), it is then determined whether it is a new round start timing (S2106), and a new round start timing is determined. If so (S2106: Yes), the opening operation of the opening / closing plate 65f1 corresponding to the number of rounds is read (S2107). Next, the read opening operation (opening / closing pattern) is set in the opening / closing plate 65f1 (S2108), and this process is terminated. Although illustration is omitted, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2105: Yes), a round number command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the start of a new round. Is set. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, when a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is received, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109), and if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2109). : Yes), an ending command is set (S2110), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S2001) of the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2109 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2109: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S2111). Here, the jackpot end timing indicates a case where an ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of S2111, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S2111: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends is executed (S2112), and this process ends. Details of the jackpot end processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not the big hit end timing (S2111: No), a winning process for performing a process corresponding to winning in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is executed (S2113), and then the specific winning opening ( An abnormal process for determining whether or not the ball that has entered the large opening 65a has been normally discharged is executed (S2114), and this process ends. Details of the winning process (S2113) and the abnormality process (S2114) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, respectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the jackpot end process (S2112) which is one process in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. This jackpot end process (S2112) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S2112).

  In the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201). If the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201: Yes), Since it means that the V winning switch 65e3 has been passed, by setting 101 to the value of the probability variation counter 203g, the gaming state after the big hit is set to be the probability variation state (S2202), and the process proceeds to S2205. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S2201: No), it is then determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot D (S2203). If it is not the big hit D (S2203: No), 101 is set to the value of the hour / minute counter 203r (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if it is a big hit D (S2203: Yes), the process of S2204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2205. Thereby, when the jackpot type is jackpot D and the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 in another jackpot type, a time reduction state of 100 times is set after the jackpot.

  In the process of S2205, a status command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state after the big hit is set from the respective values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / mid hour counter 203r (S2205), and the big hit middle flag 203x, Then, both the probability variation setting flag 203h are set to OFF (S2206), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the winning process (S2113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S2113). This winning process (S2113) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In this winning process (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the round effective period (S2301). Here, the round effective period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to the open state until the interval period (3 seconds) ends. It is. If it is not the round effective period in the processing of S2301 (S2301: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2301 that the present is the round effective period (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S2302). If a winning for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is detected (S2302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203j and updated (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if the winning to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not detected (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

  In the process of S2304, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304). If the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2304, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 9 or less (S2304: No), it is determined whether the round time has passed (S2305), and if the round time has passed. (S2305: Yes), the process proceeds to S2306.

  In the process of S2306, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S2306), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2308.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2305 that the round time has not elapsed (S2305: No), the processes of S2306 and S2307 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2308.

  In the process of S2308, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S2308). If the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S2308: Yes), the operation counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S2309), and the process of S2310 is performed. Transition to processing. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2308: No), it means that it is a ball throwing period after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed, and then the probability variation valid flag 203o is turned on. Is determined (S2316). In the process of S2316, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is off (S2316: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S2316: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p (S2317), and then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1. 5 seconds) (S2318). If the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (S2318: No), the process proceeds to S2310, and the process of monitoring the ball entering the probability variation ball opening 671 and updating the probability variation setting flag 203h is executed. To do. Thus, if the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, so that the probability variation gaming state can be set in consideration of the time for ball removal. In addition, since there is an upper limit for the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability change gaming state from being granted by passing the ball through the V winning switch illegally.

  On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (S2318: Yes), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to off (S2319), the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is reset (S2320), and this process is performed. finish.

  In the process of S2310, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310). If the ball has not passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: No), the process proceeds to S2313. On the other hand, if the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 (S2310: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passing counter 203i (S2311), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2312), and S2313. Move on to processing.

  In the process of S2313, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313). If the operation counter 203k is not 0 (S2313: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2313: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S2314), the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to on (S2315), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the abnormality process (S2114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S2114). This abnormal process (S2114) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47). As described above, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is normally discharged. This is a process for determining whether it has been performed.

  In the abnormal process (S2114), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is the round effective period (S2401). If it is not the round effective period (S2401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the round effective period (S2401: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402).

  In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ball discharge number counter 203q (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if the sphere has not passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404.

  In the process of S2404, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S2404). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S2404: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S2404: Yes), since the ball is being thrown, the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated (S2405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) (S2406). If the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is not the upper limit value (S2406: No), The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (3 seconds) (S2406: Yes), then the number of discharges (the value of the probability variable passage counter 203i and the value of the ball discharge number counter 203q) It is determined whether the (total value) matches the winning number (S2407).

  In the process of S2407, if it is determined that the number of discharged items does not match the number of winning prizes (S2407: No), an error command is set (S2408), and the process proceeds to S2409. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying a character of a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of leaving the ball illegally in the variable winning device 65 and causing the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 during the ON period of the flow path solenoid 65k after the start of the next jackpot. it can.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2407, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins matches the number of winning prizes (S2407: Yes), the process of S2408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2409. In the processing of S2409, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S2409), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is reset (S2410). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203j, the ball discharge number counter 203q, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset (S2411), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this abnormal process (see FIG. 50), the ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not normally discharged due to a ball clogging occurring inside the variable winning device 65. It is possible to detect and notify the occurrence of a malfunction that occurs. In addition, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of leaving the ball illegally in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the small hit control process (S2005) which is one process in the main process (refer FIG. 46) performed by MPU201 of the main control apparatus 110 is demonstrated. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting control process (S2005).

  In the small hit control process (see FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol small hit is started (S2501). In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the special symbol small hitting is started (S2105: Yes), a small hitting opening command is set (S2502). Then, the small hitting / medium flag 203w is set to ON (S2503), and this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the special symbol small hit is not started (S2501: No), it is determined whether the small hit middle flag 203w is on (S2504). During the special symbol small hits, while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small hits (including during the special symbol small hit game), Includes a special symbol during the predetermined time after the small hit game ends. In the process of S2504, if the small hitting medium flag 203w is off (S2504: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2504, if it is determined that the small hitting medium flag 203w is on (S2504: Yes), it is determined whether it is the opening end timing (S2505), and if it is the opening end timing. (S2505: Yes), the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set (S2506), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2505 that it is not the opening end timing (S2505: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening pattern set in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S2507). ). If it is determined in the processing of S2507 that it is the end timing of the opening pattern set for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S2507: Yes), a small hitting ending command is set (S2508), and this processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is not the set end timing of the release pattern (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special symbol small hit (S2509). That is, it is determined whether it is the ending end timing. If it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the small hitting end timing (S2509: Yes), the small hitting medium flag 203w is set to OFF (S2510), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not the small hit end timing (S2509: No), this processing is ended as it is.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. 56, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 52, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current power-off processing in S4116 is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 53). ) Is determined during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 53, S4113), it executes a power-off process in S4116. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process at S4116 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S4116, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S4116, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4116 is executed (see S4115 in FIG. 53). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S4008. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The gaming state notified by the command is set in the gaming state storage area 223h (S4011), thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S4008 is reached because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S4004 to S4006. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S4009 is that when the process from S4004 to S4006 is reached via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes in S4102 to S4110. In S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S4102 to S4110 are processes related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the variable display effect without delay.

  If it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4110 are sent to the display control device 114. (S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a hold number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command as a display control device. 114. In the hold number display update process (S4106), a process of updating the display of the hold symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearrangeable period (a period during which the jackpot game and the state without a hold are omitted), the hold symbol display that is displayed in the order in which the hold is established starts the variable display. It is rearranged in order and displayed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process in S4108 is executed. Note that the sound editing / output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S4111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process (S4111), in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is displayed. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmission to the display control device 114, is executed (S4112). Details of the change display setting process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power interruption processing is executed (S4116). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4114, when it is determined that the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control apparatus 113, and determines the command received from the main control apparatus 110 as described above. . Details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described below.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 54, S4111), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and analyzed. It is determined whether or not a special figure 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to ON (S4202). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag is set. Set 223d2 to ON. Next, from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command, a stop type (completely out of reach, out of reach, small hit, or big hit A to D) is extracted (S4203), and this processing is performed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S4203 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. It should be noted that the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is that of the second special symbol. Each stop type is stored so as to be identifiable, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), the main controller 110 then sends the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S4204). The special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

  In the process of S4204, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4204: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), and the received special figure is received. The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 1 (S4206), and this processing is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol) Used).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4204: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4207). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

  If it is determined in the process of S4207 that a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4207: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4208). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4209), and this processing is terminated. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  In the process of S4207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4210). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4210: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the second special symbol reserved ball included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted and provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in accordance with the extracted counter value. The corresponding counter value is updated (S4211), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the RAM 223, and the second special symbol reserved ball number is stored. When the value of the counter 203e is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, the start winning is determined. Every time, the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the first special symbol reservation value of the main control device 110 by the processing of S4211. It can be adjusted to the values of the ball counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the value of 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified on the basis of the start winning, the number of first special symbol reserved balls of the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  Also, in the process of S4210, if it is determined that a pending ball number command has not been received (S4210: No), it is determined whether a special figure 1 confirmation command or a special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4212). If it is determined in the process of S4212 that either the special figure 1 confirmation command or the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S4212: Yes), the special symbol confirmation display corresponding to the command is set (S4213). This process is terminated. Specifically, in the processing of S4213, when the special figure 1 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the first special symbol is set, and when the special figure 2 confirmation command is received, the confirmation display of the second special symbol is set. Set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4212 that neither the special figure 1 confirmation command nor the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether or not a state command has been received (S4214). If a command has been received (S4214: Yes), information corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is set (stored) in the gaming state storage area 223h (S4215), and this process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S4214, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4214: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S4216), and this process ends. In the process of S4215, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. The command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is based on the first or second variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Then, a process for generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (completely missed, missed reach, jackpot E, F), the display special figure 1 stop type command or the display special figure 2 for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type. Executes processing to set a stop type command.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 55), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4401). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is off (S4401: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S4406. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is on (S4401: Yes), the fluctuation of the first special symbol this time is based on the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S4402-S4405 for determining the detailed aspect of a display is performed.

  More specifically, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF (S4402), and then a fluctuation pattern selection process for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is executed (S4403). Details of this variation pattern selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 (S4404), the counter value is set in the secondary special figure 1 variation time counter 223e (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

  In the process of S4406, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4406). If the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is off (S4406: No), the main controller 110 Since the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received, the process proceeds to S4411. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223c2 is ON (S4406: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol this time is based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110. Each process of S4407-S4410 for determining the detailed aspect of a display is performed.

  Specifically, the special figure 2 variation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF (S4407), and then a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S4408). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (S4409), the counter value is set in the secondary special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223f (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411.

  In the processing of S4411, it is determined whether either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4411). If it is determined that both the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 are off (S4411: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4411, when it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223d1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S4411: Yes), the flag determined to be on is turned off. In step S4203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is set (S4413). Next, based on the set stop type, a display special figure 1 stop type command or a display special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is generated (S4414). The process ends.

  The special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the jackpot type when the special symbol lottery result is a big win, In such a case, the small hit type is notified.

  With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed simultaneously.

  Next, the details of the variation pattern selection process (S4403) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection process (S4403). This variation pattern selection process (S4403) is one process of the variation display setting process (S4112) (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and details the variation pattern of the first special symbol. This is a process for setting an aspect.

  In the variation pattern selection process (S4403), it is first determined whether or not the super reach has been extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54) ( S4501) If it is determined that the extracted variation pattern is super reach (S4501: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the set stop type is small hit C (S4502). In the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the set stop type is not the small hit C (S4502: No), it is then determined whether or not the set stop type is the big hit D (S4503). If it is determined that the stop type is not big hit D (S4503: No), the process proceeds to S4504. If it is determined in the process of S4501 that the current variation pattern is not super reach (S4501: No), there is no possibility of setting a special super reach at this time, so the processes of S4502 and S4503 are skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S4504.

  In the process of S4504, based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 54), the detailed mode of the current fluctuation pattern is displayed. Then, the process proceeds to S4506.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4502 that the set stop type is small hit C (S4502: Yes), or in the process of S4503, the set stop type is jackpot D If it is determined (S4503: Yes), the process proceeds to S4505 for setting special super reach (see FIG. 9B). In the process of S4505, the mode of the current variation pattern is determined to be special super reach (see FIG. 9B) (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4506. In the processing of S4506, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined variation pattern is set (S4506), and this processing ends.

  By executing this variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 56), special super reach (see FIG. 9B) is performed only when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit D or a small hit C. Can be executed. Of the lottery results for which special super reach (see FIG. 9B) is set, the jackpot D has a small number of prize balls and is not given a promising state or a short-time state after the jackpot. Lower. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed is set over 100 fluctuation displays after the small hit C is completed. You can get almost the same profit as if you set a short period of time. Therefore, when special super reach is executed, a game can be performed in the hope that a small hit C will be achieved rather than a big hit D. This is because the number of prize balls that can be obtained when the jackpot is D (about 500) can be determined to draw the first special symbol only about 30 to 40 times after the jackpot.

  In a general pachinko machine, when a variation display is executed, a game is played in the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers are aligned (that is, a big win). In the machine 10, when the special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numerals are not arranged. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which a game can be played in the expectation that the degree of advantage will be off (small hit C) rather than the big hit (small hit D) with a low degree of advantage.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory has a low reading speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 57). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 57) (S6105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 58, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in step S6101. In addition, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 68A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 68A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) can be easily drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 59B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 59B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation is performed. Production can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 59B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S6301: No), it means that transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, the normal effect image is displayed instead of the power-on image. In order to display on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and a display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. 26 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 60, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 61A, details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The buffer 233d is set (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another change display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of big hits A to F, small hits A to C, out of reach or complete out) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 59B) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to ON (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the task process (S6304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the processing of S6602.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the “special symbol jackpot” is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually displays “special symbol” even if it is a “special symbol detachment”. The stop symbol corresponding to “Large Bonus” will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a “special symbol jackpot”, possibly reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the third symbol display device 81 stops completely detachment. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the time counter 233h (S6703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Details of the rear image change command process (S6415) will be described here with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A and B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the others The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back A or B according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with the passage of time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored) ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S6414 that there is no rear image change command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416). If this is the case (S6416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6417), and processing returns to S6401.

  Details of the error command process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S7102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6416: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. When it is determined in S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59B) is the same process as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and processing corresponding to each command, ie, variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 61 (b)) are executed. The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 61A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67, the details of the display setting process (S6303) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 65, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command is not processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 65, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like, and for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 as it is. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is on in the process of S7209 (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, and thus a certain time has elapsed since the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 68A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S7602). In the process of S7602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred resides from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 59B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 59B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 59B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 60 to 64) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 65 to 67) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69) (see S7501: No in FIG. 68A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

  In the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer processing, so this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each back image type. Of the back image discrimination flag 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, the details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer list (not shown) are generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the head address (storage head address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V-interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 59B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured to shift to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, on the basis of the fact that the special symbol lottery is won. When the chance mode A is entered, the second special symbol change time is shortened (to 3 seconds), which is more advantageous than the first special symbol lottery (when the jackpot is reached, the second resort mode is easy to set) Since the symbol lottery is easy to be executed, it is possible to cause the player to play with a strong expectation that the player will win a big hit. In addition, in the normal mode, since it is possible to shift to the chance mode A without going through the jackpot, even if the player has not won the jackpot for a long period of time, the game can be inflected. Therefore, even if a so-called big hook has occurred, motivation for the player's game can be maintained by sandwiching the chance mode A in between. Furthermore, the length of the chance mode A to be given (number of lotteries) is different for each small hit type. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player who has detected that the game has been won to play a game with the expectation that the chance mode A is a type of a small game set for a longer period. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the super-reach mode with a variation time of 60 seconds is determined as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display only in the case of a big win or a small win. . In other words, the super reach is not set when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost. By configuring in this way, when it is found that the fluctuation display being executed is super reach (the fluctuation time exceeds 30 seconds), the player recognizes that it will be a small hit or a big win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, in the present embodiment, a special reach with a variation time of 90 seconds can be determined only when a special symbol is won by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a big hit when it is found that the variation display being executed is special reach (the variation time exceeds 60 seconds). Therefore, since the player can sense that the game will be a big hit before the change display ends, it is possible to watch the result of the production with confidence in the remaining change time.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, special super reach is provided as a kind of effect when super reach is determined. This special super reach production mode can be determined only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit D or a small hit C. The jackpot D has a small number of award balls, and since neither a promiscuous state nor a short time state is given after the jackpot, the degree of advantage for the player is low. On the other hand, when the small hit C is reached, since the chance mode A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easy to be executed is set over a maximum of 100 variation displays after the small hit C is completed, 100 for the player. You can get almost the same profit as if you set a short period of time. Therefore, when special super reach is executed, a game can be performed in the hope that a small hit C will be achieved rather than a big hit D.

  In a general pachinko machine, when a variation display is executed, a game is played in the expectation that the third symbols with the same numbers are aligned (that is, a big win). In the machine 10, when the special super reach occurs, it is possible to confirm the effect result in the hope that the third symbols with the same numerals are not arranged. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which a game can be played in the expectation that the degree of advantage will be off (small hit C) rather than the big hit (small hit D) with a low degree of advantage.

  In the first embodiment, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is subtracted every time the special symbol lottery is executed regardless of whether the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the value of the chance mode counter 203x may be subtracted only when the second special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, when the chance mode A is set, the advantageous special symbol 2 lottery can be surely performed a predetermined number of times regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol lottery. it can. Therefore, the expectation for the chance mode A can be further increased.

  In the first embodiment, the chance mode A is always set when the first special symbol is a lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance mode A is not set. It is good also as a structure which provides a hit classification. Thereby, even if super reach occurs, a case where chance mode A is not set can be provided, so that when super reach occurs, attention can be paid to the effect result.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot D that is the most unfavorable for the player in the jackpot type (that is, the short-time state is not given and the prize ball is the least), or the jackpot type is the most advantageous for the player in the jackpot type Although a special super reach that is selected only when the small hit C is obtained is provided, the condition for generating the special super reach is not limited to this. For example, the special super reach is executed only when the most advantageous jackpot A or the most advantageous jackpot C out of the jackpots among the jackpot types won in the first special symbol lottery. May be. By configuring in this way, the player can be made aware of the most advantageous jackpot or the most advantageous jackpot before the symbol stops. Can do.

  In the first embodiment, after the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the winning flag 203s is referred to, and when the winning flag 203s is on, the lottery result is overwritten. However, the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the winning flag 203s may be referred to before the special symbol lottery is executed, and if it is on, the lottery result may be confirmed to be off and the special symbol lottery may be skipped. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the hit flag 203s is on.

  In the first embodiment, the normal symbol variation time is common (3 seconds) for the normal symbol normal (low probability) state and the normal symbol short-time (high probability) state, and the normal symbol hit probability In addition, although the configuration is such that there is no great difference in the opening period of the electric accessory 640a when it hits the normal symbol, it is not limited to this. When chance mode A is set, it may be arbitrarily determined within a range where it is more advantageous to make a right strike than to make a left strike (a special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed). More specifically, for example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is lowered (for example, to 1/3) or the electric combination is performed so that the number of holding balls is more surely reduced when the right hand is made in the normal mode. The opening period of the object 640a may be shortened (for example, 0.7 seconds × 1 time), or the normal symbol variation time may be lengthened (for example, 10 seconds). Thus, by making a difference in control between the normal low state of the normal symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol, it is possible to reliably reduce the holding ball when the right hand is made in the normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the right-handed game is always performed even in the normal mode so that only the advantageous second special symbol lottery is performed without reducing the holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the chance mode A, the short fluctuation (3 seconds) is selected, but when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the same as the normal mode is performed. The configuration is such that control is executed. On the other hand, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the chance A table may be changed so that the fluctuation time becomes longer (for example, always 120 seconds). With this configuration, if the player makes a left turn accidentally in chance mode A, or if a part of the ball launched by the right strike enters the first entrance 64, the entry Since the variation time of the first special symbol based on the sphere becomes long, the variation display of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times during the long variation time. Therefore, when the right hand is made in the chance mode A, it is possible to execute more lots of advantageous second special symbols.

  In the first embodiment, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to as a variation pattern table over a specific number of special symbol lotteries on condition that the first special symbol lottery has been won. However, the condition for setting the chance mode A is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern table to be referred to is changed according to time information. Specifically, a known RTC (Real-Time Clock) capable of measuring time is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 so that the main control device 110 can grasp the current time. If the gaming state is the normal state in a predetermined time zone (for example, AM 10:00 to AM 11:00), the special symbol lottery is executed and the chance A table 202d3 is referred to. If the gaming state is the normal state during the time period, the normal table 202d1 may be referred to when the special symbol lottery is executed. By comprising in this way, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the time zone when the chance mode A is referred to can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, when the chance mode A is entered, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened and the frequency of the advantageous second special symbol lottery is increased, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. However, it is not limited to this. In the chance mode A, the lottery of the first special symbol may be advantageous. Specifically, while the chance mode A is set, the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 that easily passes the V winning switch 65e3 (see FIG. 5) even if the first special symbol lottery becomes C, D. 7 may be set. That is, in the chance mode A, an open / close pattern that easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3 may be set for all jackpot types. By configuring in this way, an advantageous opening / closing pattern can be obtained even when the chance mode A is set in a state where the holding ball of the first special symbol exists, and there is a holding ball that becomes a big hit C, D in the holding. Can be set. Even when the player hits the right in the chance mode A, the ball enters the first entrance 64 and becomes a jackpot C or D. Can be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an absurdity in which an unfavorable opening / closing pattern is set even though the game is played in accordance with the instructions on the screen (the launch direction) in the chance mode A and the jackpot is made.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured that the jackpot type that is advantageous in the case of winning the lottery in the second special symbol is likely to become an advantageous jackpot type. . Specifically, for example, when a big win is won by lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the advantageous opening / closing pattern is reduced (for example, 70%), and when the big bonus is won by the first special symbol The ratio at which an advantageous opening / closing pattern is provided may be higher (for example, 100%) or lower (for example, 50%) than the second special symbol depending on the situation. More specifically, for example, in the chance mode A, if the first special symbol lottery started in the state where the second special symbol holding ball exists, the big special win by the second special symbol lottery The opening / closing pattern of the advantageous opening / closing plate 65f1 is set at a higher rate (e.g., 100%) than in the other cases, and in other cases, the rate is lower than the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery ( For example, an advantageous opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing plate 65f1 may be set at 50%). With this configuration, when the player hits the right in the chance mode A and happens to enter the first entrance 64 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, It is possible to have a sense of expectation for a probabilistic state. Moreover, in chance mode A, since the variation time of the second special symbol is short (to 3 seconds), it becomes difficult to store the reserved ball of the second special symbol (it becomes full to store one hold), Even if it is changed to left-handed after confirming that the reserve has accumulated, the possibility that the reserve of the second special symbol will be digested before the ball enters the first entrance 64 is increased. it can. Therefore, in the chance mode A, the irregular gaming method of making a left turn after the holding of the second special symbol occurs is suppressed, and the right turn is continued during the chance mode A, and it happens to be the first entrance 64. You can only benefit if the ball enters.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71 to FIG. 75, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the first embodiment described above will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time is an extra long fluctuation of 10 minutes) that is very long compared to the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined in the normal mode. Is done. As a result, the gaming efficiency is reduced when the right hand is made in the normal mode, and the irregular gaming method in which the right hand is always made in the normal mode is suppressed.

  However, since the simultaneous variation method (a method in which the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously) is employed, for example, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4 There is a possibility that a player who performs an irregular game method may appear, such as making a right-hand hit until the number of pieces is stored and returning to the left-hand side when the reserved ball is stored to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

  On the other hand, in this modification, in the normal mode, when the reserved ball of the second special symbol is accumulated (becomes one or more), the left-handed is returned and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. As the variation time of the first special symbol, the same ultra long variation (10 minutes) as the variation time of the second special symbol is set. As a result, when the player makes a right strike during the normal mode and returns to the left strike with the second special symbol holding ball accumulated, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have an extremely long fluctuation of 10 minutes. Therefore, since it is possible to form a very disadvantageous state in which a special symbol lottery is executed only about every 10 minutes, the player can be more reliably left-handed in the normal mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the first embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partly. This is a point that is changed, and a part of the processing that is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
First, the configuration of the fluctuation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. Similar to the first embodiment, this variation pattern table 202d is a data table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern (variation time) of variation display indicating a lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the variation pattern table 202d in the present modification includes a normal (when no special figure 2 is on hold) table 202d11 and a normal table 202d11 as tables used for determining the variation pattern in the normal mode. A table 202d12 (when special figure 2 is on hold) is provided. The normal (when there is no special figure 2 hold) table 202d11 is a table that is referred to when there is no second special symbol hold ball (0 pieces), and the normal (when special figure 2 hold is held) table 202d12 is This is a table that is referred to when there is a holding ball of the second special symbol (one or more).

  In addition, the variation pattern table 202d includes a continuation / chance B (first half) table 202d21 as a table used to determine a variation pattern in the continuation mode (probability variation state) and the chance mode B (short-time state). A villa / chance B (second half) table 202d22 is provided. The villa / chance B (first half) table 202d21 is a data table that is referred to when the remaining lottery times remain six or more in the villa mode or chance mode B. Further, the Renso / Chance B (second half) table 202d22 is a data table that is referred to when the remaining number of lotteries is 5 or less.

  The variation pattern table 202d is provided with a chance A (first half) table 202d31 and a chance A (second half) table 202d32 as tables used for determining a variation pattern in the chance mode A. The chance A (first half) table 202d31 is a data table that is referred to in the chance mode A when the remaining number of lotteries is six or more. The chance A (second half) table 202d32 is a data table that is referred to when the remaining number of lotteries is 5 or less.

  First, a table referred to in the normal mode will be described. Note that the normal (when no special figure 2 is on hold) table 202d11 is the same as the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) of the first embodiment described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. When the normal (with special figure 2 hold) table 202d12 is referred to, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the special symbol type (first special symbol or second special symbol) and the special symbol lottery Regardless of the result (stop type), a very long fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (10 minutes) is determined.

  When there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, the normal mode is configured such that not only the variation time of the second special symbol but also the variation time of the first special symbol is determined for 10 minutes. Penalty can be increased if you continue to make a right-hand strike. That is, in the normal mode, the reserved ball is generated in the second special symbol in a situation that is unlikely to occur unless the game method of deliberately aiming the second entrance 640 is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular gaming method, while the second special symbol holding ball remains, the first special symbol variation display is also the second special symbol variation display. Also, it has a configuration in which ultra-long fluctuation is set. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular gaming method and returns to left-handed, the special symbol lottery is performed only about every 10 minutes (the first special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed). A state can be formed. Therefore, the deterrent effect with respect to the player performing an irregular game method can be further improved.

  Next, a table referred to in the extended mode and the chance mode B will be described. Note that the villa / chance B (first half) table 202d21 is the same as the villa / chance B table 202d2 (see FIG. 16A) of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. . As shown in FIG. 72 (a), when the consecutive house / chance B (second half) table 202d22 is referenced, the variation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 0 regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. .7 seconds ultrashort variation is determined. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same as that of the extended resort / chance B (first half) table 202d21 (the extended resort / chance B table 202d2 in the first embodiment).

  In the renzo mode and chance mode B, the right game is to play the right game. However, if the number of changes set in the renso mode or chance mode B is within the remaining five, When the chance B (first half) table 202d21 is referred to, a long fluctuation time is set just before the end of the extended mode or the chance mode B, and a lot of reserved balls are accumulated during the fluctuation display of the long fluctuation time. May end up. That is, at the end of the extended game mode or the chance mode B, there may be a state where there are two or more reserved balls of the second special symbol. In this case, even if the player returns to the normal mode and returns to the left in accordance with the correct gaming method, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the second special symbol holding ball becomes 1 or more, and a penalty occurs. (The variation time of the first special symbol is 10 minutes). As described above, if the player is penalized even though the player is executing the correct gaming method, the player may be dissatisfied.

  Therefore, in this modification, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds) over the special symbol variation of the last game 5 times in the extended game mode and chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. It is comprised so that it may become difficult to generate | occur | produce the new entrance with respect to the 2nd entrance 640 during a fluctuation | variation. By comprising in this way, possibility that the number of reservation balls of a 2nd special symbol will become 1 or more can be made low at the time of completion | finish of consecutive resort mode or chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

  Next, a table referred to in the chance mode A will be described. Note that the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is the same as the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the chance A (second half) table 202d32 is referenced, the variation time of the second special symbol is uniformly 0.7 seconds regardless of the lottery time of the second special symbol. The ultra short fluctuation is determined. On the other hand, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same as the chance A (first half) table 202d31 (chance A table 202d3 in the first embodiment).

  In the chance mode A, as in the consecutive resort mode and the chance mode B, the right game method is to play the game by right-handed. Therefore, when the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is referred to with the remaining number of fluctuations set as the chance mode A within five, a long fluctuation time is set just before the chance mode A ends, and the long There may be a case where a lot of reserved balls are accumulated during the display of the fluctuation time. In other words, even if the chance mode A is finished and the mode is shifted to the normal mode, the second special symbol holding ball becomes 1 or more when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the penalty is reduced. May occur (the variation time of the first special symbol is 10 minutes).

  Therefore, as for the chance A (second half) table 202d32, similarly to the above-mentioned consecutive resort / chance B (second half) table 202d22, it is difficult for new entrance to the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation. In this configuration, ultra short fluctuation is set. By configuring in this way, at the end of the chance mode A, the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Modified Example of First Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311), similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, the variation pattern is selected based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. The process to select.

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S311) in the modification of the first embodiment, in each of the processes S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation in the first embodiment, respectively. Of the pattern selection process (see FIG. 32), the same processes as those in S601 to S603, S605, and S608 to S610 are executed.

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) in the modification of the first embodiment, the value of the chance mode counter 203x is larger than 0 (that is, the chance mode A) in the process of S603. Is determined (S603: Yes), a chance A selection process for selecting a variation pattern for the first special symbol lottery executed in the chance mode A is executed (S611), and the process proceeds to S608. Transition. Details of this chance A selection process (S611) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S605, when it is determined that the values of the probability variation counter 203g and the hour / short time counter 203r are both 0 (that is, the normal mode) (S605: Yes), the first executed in the normal mode. A normal selection process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery is executed (S612), and the process proceeds to S608. Details of the normal selection process (S612) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S605 that either the probability variation counter 203g or the hour / short time counter 203r has a value of 1 or more (that is, the extended mode or chance mode B) (S605: No). In addition, a selection process at the time of consecutive resort for selecting a variation pattern for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the consecutive resort mode or the chance mode B is executed (S613), and the process proceeds to S608. Details of this extended time selection process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74A, details of the above-described chance A selection process (S611) will be described. This chance A selection process (S611) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the chance mode A as described above.

  When this chance A selection process (S611) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the chance mode counter 203x is greater than 5 (S2601), and if it is determined that it is greater than 5 (S2601: Yes). Then, the chance A (first half) table 202d31 is read from the variation pattern table 202d as a table for determining the variation pattern of the present variation display (S2602), and this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the value of the chance mode counter 203x is 5 or less (S2601: No), the chance as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display from the fluctuation pattern table 202d. The A (second half) table 202d32 is read (S2603), and this processing is terminated.

  By performing this chance A selection process (see FIG. 74 (a)), when the special symbol lottery is executed in the final stage of the chance mode A (the remaining lottery number is 5 or less), the chance A ( The variation pattern can be determined with reference to the second half table 202d32. That is, as described above, the super short fluctuation is set so that it is difficult to generate a new ball entering the second ball inlet 640 during the fluctuation. By configuring in this way, at the end of the chance mode A, the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

  Next, details of the normal selection process (S612) will be described with reference to FIG. This normal selection process (S612) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal mode, as described above.

  When the normal selection process (S612) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S2701), and if it is determined that it is 0 ( (S2701: Yes), the normal (without special figure 2 hold) table 202d11 is read from the fluctuation pattern table 202d as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display (S2702), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S2701: No), the current variation is determined from the variation pattern table 202d. The normal (when special figure 2 is on hold) table 202d12 is read as a table for determining the display variation pattern (S2703), and this process is terminated.

  By executing this normal selection process (see FIG. 74 (b)), if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in the normal mode, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. Variation (600 seconds) can be set. In the normal mode, when there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, 10 minutes is determined not only for the variation time of the second special symbol but also for the variation time of the first special symbol. In the normal mode, it is possible to increase the penalty when the right hand is continuously performed. That is, in the normal mode, the reserved ball is generated in the second special symbol in a situation that is unlikely to occur unless the game method of deliberately aiming the second entrance 640 is continued. Therefore, as a penalty for a player who intentionally executes an irregular gaming method, while the second special symbol holding ball remains, the first special symbol variation display is also the second special symbol variation display. Also, it has a configuration in which ultra-long fluctuation is set. As a result, even if the player quits the irregular gaming method and returns to left-handed, the special symbol lottery is performed only about every 10 minutes (the first special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed). A state can be formed. Therefore, the deterrent effect with respect to the player performing an irregular game method can be further improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the details of the above-mentioned selection process at the time of extended resort (S613) will be described. This consecutive resort time selection process (S613) is a process for selecting a variation pattern for the special symbol lottery executed in the consecutive resort mode and the chance mode B as described above.

  When the extended time selection process (S613) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is within the range of 1 to 5 (S2801) and out of the range of 1 to 5 ( If it is determined that the value is 0 or 6 or more (S2801: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is in the range of 1 to 5 (S2802). In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203r is out of the range of 1 to 5 (value is 0, or 6 or more) (S2802: No), the remaining number of times of the probability change state remains 6 or more. Or the remaining number of times of the short-time state is 6 or more. Therefore, from the variation pattern table 202d, as a table for determining the variation pattern of the present variation display, the villa / chance B (first half) ) Table 202d21 is read (S2803), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is in the range of 1 to 5 or less (S2801: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is in the range of 1 to 5 or less. If it is determined that there is (S2802: Yes), the extended resort / chance B (second half) table 202d22 is read as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the current fluctuation display (S2804), and this process ends.

  By executing this extended time selection process (see FIG. 75), the variation pattern table can be switched according to the remaining number of times of the probability variation state and the short time state. As a result, the variation time of the second special symbol can be made extremely short (0.7 seconds) over the last five variations of the special symbol in the extended game mode or chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for a new entrance to the second entrance 640 to occur during the fluctuation. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more at the end of the extended game mode or the chance mode B. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the present modification, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. This second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is the same as the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73), whether it is the current state (the extended game mode or the chance mode A), According to the chance mode B or the normal mode), the above-described chance A selection process (see FIG. 74 (a)), normal selection process (see FIG. 74 (b)), and extended time selection By executing one of the processes (see FIG. 75), a process for selecting any one of the tables defined in the variation pattern table 202d is executed. Since the content of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 is the same as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (see FIG. 73) described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, the detailed description thereof is omitted. To do.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the first embodiment, in the normal mode, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated (becomes one or more) and left-handed to return to the left. When the lottery is executed, the very long fluctuation (600 seconds) same as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, when the player makes a right strike during the normal mode and returns to the left strike with the second special symbol holding ball accumulated, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have an extremely long fluctuation of 10 minutes. Therefore, since it is possible to form a very disadvantageous state in which a special symbol lottery is executed only about every 10 minutes, the player can be more reliably left-handed in the normal mode.

  Further, in this modified example, the remaining lottery times are within 5 (the special symbol lottery is executed within 5 times) in the consecutive mode, chance mode A, and chance mode B in which the game is played by right-handed. The situation is such that the change time of the second special symbol is extremely short (0.7 seconds) when the situation shifts to the normal mode. This makes it difficult for new balls to enter the second entrance 640 during the fluctuation, so that the number of balls held in the second special symbol can be 1 or more at the end of the consecutive mode or chance mode B. Can be lowered. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the absurdity that penalizes the player who performs the correct gaming method.

  In the present modification, the ultra-short variation (0.7 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol because the remaining lottery times in the consecutive mode, chance mode A, or chance mode B are 5 It was assumed that the number of times was within, but this is not a limitation. For example, the configuration may be such that the super short variation (0.7 seconds) is selected only once, and in the state of the right-handed gaming method, the super short variation (0.7 seconds) is performed regardless of the number of lotteries. It is good also as composition chosen.

  In this modification, in the normal mode, when there is a holding ball of the second special symbol, the variation time of the first special symbol is extremely long (10 minutes). The condition for switching to the super long fluctuation (600 seconds) is not limited to this. For example, when there is an ordinary symbol holding ball, a very long variation (600 seconds) may be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

  In the present modification, an effect (see FIG. 10B) is given to notify the player to return to the left at the timing when the chance mode A ends (timing when the last variation display in the chance mode A ends). Although it was configured, the execution timing of this effect is not limited to this. For example, an effect (see FIG. 10B) for notifying the player to return to the left at the start of the last variation display in the chance mode A may be executed. It is good also as a structure which performs the production | presentation (refer FIG.10 (b)) notified to a player so that it may return to the left strike at the timing which determined that the hold ball for the mode A completion | finish was hold | maintained. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a state in which a plurality of reserved balls of the second special symbol exist at the end of the chance mode A.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. In the first embodiment described above and the modification of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit in the normal mode, the variation time of the second special symbol is short (the lottery of the second special symbol). In the disadvantageous normal state, the game can be inflated even if it is not a big hit.

  In contrast, in the second embodiment, when a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol) is set after a big hit, a special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is set. The normal mode and the chance mode A are switched according to the number of times. Thereby, it is set as the structure by which chance mode A is set regularly, and the suppression with respect to a game becoming monotonous in the normal state most disadvantageous for a player is aimed at.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the content of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 is partially changed. The content of the RAM 203 provided in the control device 110 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. is there. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, an electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the ROM 202 in the second embodiment has the small hit type selection table 202e deleted from the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. In addition, a variation pattern scenario table 202f is newly added. Details of the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 76B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f. This variation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines the correspondence (variation pattern scenario) between the number of special symbol lotteries and the variation pattern table used to select the variation pattern for each previous jackpot type. . At the end of the jackpot, a scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set out of the variation pattern scenarios defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202f, and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table defined in the scenario at the beginning of the variation. The

  First, if the previous jackpot type is other than jackpot D (that is, jackpot A to C, jackpot E, F) (if the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, the probability variation state is given 100 times, and the V winning switch In the case of a jackpot in which the time-short state is given 100 times if it does not pass 65e3) will be described. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), among the variation pattern scenarios set when the previous jackpot type is other than jackpot D, the range of 1 to 100 lottery special symbols is displayed as a variation pattern table. The mansion / chance B table 202d2 (see FIG. 16A) is associated. Thus, even if the probability change state (long game mode) is set after the big hit or the short time state (chance mode B) is set, the player can aim the second entrance 640 by hitting the right side. It is possible to form a state in which an advantageous second special symbol discrimination is easily performed.

  In addition, the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the range of the special symbol lottery count of 101 to 150 as the variation pattern table. For this reason, when the consecutive house mode or chance mode B is set after the jackpot, and the lottery of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot, the super long variation (600 Only) is selected. Therefore, if the first special symbol lottery is not executed by left-handed, the gaming efficiency can be extremely deteriorated (the special symbol lottery can be executed only once every 10 minutes if right-handed). .

  Further, a chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the range of 151 to 160 special symbol lotteries as a variation pattern table. For this reason, if a special symbol lottery is executed 50 times after exiting the consecutive house mode or the chance mode B, it is possible to shift to the chance mode A over the 10 special symbol lotteries thereafter. Therefore, even if the extended game mode (probable change state) advantageous to the player or the chance mode B (short-time state) ends and the mode is shifted to the most disadvantageous normal mode, the game is continued until the chance mode A is set. You can make the player think to continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player's motivation for the game is reduced in the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player.

  A special table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated with the range of 161 to 200 lottery times for special symbols as a variation pattern table. In other words, the normal mode continues for 40 special symbols. Although omitted in the drawing, the configuration is such that 10 chance modes A and 40 normal modes are repeated alternately. That is, the number of special symbol lotteries is in the range of 201-210, 251-260, 301-310,... (Every special symbol lottery is executed 40 times in the normal mode, 10 special symbol lotteries. The chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is referred to. On the other hand, the number of special symbol lotteries is within a range of 211 to 250, 261 to 300, 311 to 350,... (Every special symbol lottery is executed 10 times in chance mode A. Over the lottery), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is referred to.

  In this way, every time a special symbol lottery is executed 40 times in the normal mode, the game mode is shifted to the chance mode A, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode. Can be thought of as continuing. Therefore, since the player's motivation for the game can be improved, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  On the other hand, if the previous jackpot type was a jackpot D (when the short time state of the normal symbol is not given after the jackpot), the number of lottery times for the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 25, and the normal table 202d1 ( (See FIG. 15B). For this reason, after the jackpot D is over, when the second special symbol lottery is executed over 25 special symbol lotteries, only the super long fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected. Therefore, if the first special symbol lottery is not executed by left-handed, the game efficiency is extremely deteriorated (if the right-handed, the special symbol lottery is executed only once every 10 minutes).

  Further, the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated with the range of 26 to 50 special symbol lotteries as a variation pattern table. For this reason, if the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times after the jackpot D is completed, the chance mode A can be shifted over the 25 special symbol lotteries thereafter.

  Thereafter, the normal mode over 25 special symbol lotteries and the chance mode A over 25 special symbol lotteries are alternately repeated. Therefore, the number of special symbol lottery times in one chance mode A is greater (10 times → 25 times) than after being in other jackpot types and after exiting the consecutive mode or chance mode B. The number of special symbol lotteries in the normal mode is reduced (40 times → 25 times). That is, an opening / closing pattern (see the middle part of FIG. 7) in which the ball is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 is set, and as a relief for the most unfavorable big hit that is not given the short time state of the normal symbol, the normal state after the big hit is set. , It can be more advantageous than other jackpot types (the ratio of chance mode A can be increased). Therefore, even when the most unfavorable jackpot D is achieved, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation for the game from decreasing.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, in the most disadvantageous normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), the normal mode and the chance mode A are set according to the number of lotteries for the special symbol. It is set as the structure switched, and it is set as the structure which transfers to chance mode A periodically. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from becoming monotonous in the most disadvantageous normal state.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 77, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment in that the small hitting medium flag 203w and the chance mode counter 203x are deleted, and the variation counter 203ab and scenario storage area 203ac are newly added.

  The variation counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the jackpot ends. Based on the value of the variation counter 203ab and the variation pattern scenario set at the end of the previous jackpot, a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the scenario storage area 203ac (FIG. 79, S622). The value of the variation counter 203ab is incremented by 1 each time the gaming state update process 3 is executed (see S411 in FIG. 78). Unless the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value of the variation counter 203ab is retained even when the power is turned off, and is reset to 0 when the jackpot is ended (see S2213 in FIG. 80).

  The scenario storage area 203ac is a storage area for storing a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the previous jackpot type. When a special symbol lottery is executed, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac and the value of the variation counter 203ab described above. Is done. The scenario storage area 203ab stores a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot (see S2212 in FIG. 80).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. First, the game state update process 3 (S321) executed in the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment will be described. This game state update process 3 (S321) is a process for updating a counter and the like relating to the state of the pachinko machine 10 as in the game state update process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing gaming state update processing 3 (S321). Of the game state update process 3 (S321) in the second embodiment, the processes of S401 to S404, S407, and S408 are respectively S401 to S404 of the game state update process (see FIG. 30) of the first embodiment. The same processes as those in S407 and S408 are executed.

  In the gaming state update process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the gaming state has not been changed (S407: No), or the gaming state is the normal state. When the status command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the changed gaming state (normal state) is set (S408), the value of the variation counter 203ab is set. 1 is added and updated (S411), and this process ends. By updating the variation counter 203ab during the game state update process 3 (see FIG. 78), when the variation pattern is subsequently determined, the variation pattern table is stored based on the exact number of special symbols drawn. You can choose.

  Next, referring to FIG. 79, the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) is executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. One special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322) will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322). In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S322), similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed. This is a process for selecting.

  Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 3 (see FIG. 79), in the processing of S601, S602, and S608 to S610, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32). The same processes as those of S601, S602, and S608 to S610 are executed.

  Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win (S601), and a big win When the jackpot type selection processing (S602) in FIG. 5 is completed, the value of the variation counter 203ab is read.

  Next, a variation pattern table corresponding to the value of the read variation counter 203ab is specified based on the variation pattern scenario stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S622), and the process proceeds to S608. Thereby, in the processing of S608, the variation pattern corresponding to the current lottery result is selected with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of variations after the jackpot and the variation pattern scenario set at the end of the jackpot. Can do. That is, when selecting the variation pattern table, the degree of advantage can be varied according to the number of lotteries by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to according to the number of lotteries for special symbols. In particular, in the normal state that is most disadvantageous for the player (low probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol), it is possible to periodically shift to advantageous chance mode A, so that the game in the normal state is It can be prevented (suppressed) from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, although illustration was abbreviate | omitted, in this 2nd Embodiment, it replaces with the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (refer FIG. 37) in 1st Embodiment, and the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 3 is performed. The The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 is performed in accordance with the value of the variation counter 203ab and the set variation pattern scenario, as in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79). Thus, a process of selecting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is executed. The contents of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 are the same as those of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (see FIG. 79) described with reference to FIG. 79, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot end process 3 (S2121) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment will be described. . This jackpot end process 3 (S2121) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, similarly to the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 3 (see FIG. 80). Of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, the processes of S2201 to S2206 are the same as the processes of S2201 to S2206 of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 48) in the first embodiment, respectively. Processing is executed.

  Further, in the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, when the process of S2206 is finished, next, from the variation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 76 (b)), it corresponds to the current jackpot type. The fluctuation pattern scenario is read (S2211), and the read fluctuation pattern scenario is stored in the scenario storage area 203ac (S2212).

  More specifically, if the jackpot type of this time is other than jackpot D (jackpots A to C, E, F), the special resort / chance B table 202d2 is run over 100 special symbols after the jackpot ends. In the 101 to 150 times, the normal table 202d1 is referenced, and thereafter, the chance A table 202d3 is referenced over 10 special symbol lotteries (chance mode A) and 40 times. A scenario is set in which the state (normal mode) in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to is repeated alternately over the special symbol lottery. On the other hand, if the current jackpot is a jackpot D, the chance A table 202d3 is referred to over 25 special symbol lotteries (chance mode A) and normal over 25 special symbol lotteries. A scenario is set in which a state (normal mode) in which the table 202d1 is referenced is alternately repeated.

  When the process of S2212 is completed, the value of the variation counter 203ab is then reset (S2213), and this process ends. By executing the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80), a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type can be set, and thus the variation pattern scenario can be diversified.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in a normal state, a variation pattern table referred to select a variation pattern according to the number of special symbol lotteries after the jackpot ends. In the normal state, the mode is switched to a chance mode A that is more advantageous than the normal mode. Thereby, in the normal state which is the most unfavorable for the player, the degree of advantage can be changed periodically, thereby suppressing the monotonous game.

  Also, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern scenario set after the jackpot is changed according to the jackpot type, and when the disadvantageous jackpot type (jackpot D) is reached, an advantageous variation pattern scenario is set. It is configured. That is, the number of special symbol fluctuations until the end of one chance mode A is large, and the number of special symbol lotteries from the end of one chance mode A until the next chance mode A is set is The configuration is such that few scenarios are set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's gaming motivation from being reduced in the case of an unfavorable jackpot, and to continue the game for a longer time by the player. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern table to be referred to is switched according to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the jackpot is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on), the variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched according to the number of lottery special symbols. . That is, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the scenario set at the end of the jackpot D may be stored in the scenario storage area 203ac with reference to the variation pattern scenario table 202f, for example. By configuring in this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is easy to shift to the chance mode A, and it is possible to achieve an advantageous state in which the number of special symbol lotteries in one chance mode A is long. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the pachinko machine 10 when the hall is opened, expecting that the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Moreover, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the pachinko machine 10 that has not been won once per jackpot from being shunned by the player, and to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the second embodiment, the mode is periodically shifted to the chance mode A in the normal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a special symbol lottery is executed for a first predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) after the gaming state becomes the normal state, the chance mode A is set to a second number (for example, a predetermined number). , 1000 times) special symbol lottery may be set. Then, after the second number of times has elapsed, the normal mode may continue until the next big hit. By configuring in this way, when the first number (500 times) is continuously removed in the normal state, an advantageous state is set over the second number of times, so-called large hookup occurs. In this case, it is possible to provide relief (providing a so-called ceiling). Therefore, even if many deviations occur in the normal state, it can be considered that the player is approaching an advantageous state, and the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 87. In the second embodiment described above, assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is given a probability variation state of 100 special symbols after the jackpot ends when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot, the gaming state is the normal state. Then, the disadvantageous normal mode and the advantageous chance mode A are switched according to the number of special symbol lotteries executed.

  On the other hand, the third embodiment has the same structure as the variable winning device 65 of each of the above embodiments, and is configured to have a small winning variable winning device 65b that is opened during the small winning game. In addition to the big win in the special symbol lottery, the big win is also started when the special symbol lottery results in a small win and the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 in the small bonus variable winning device 65b. The specification assumes a pachinko machine 10 (a so-called two-type mixing machine). More specifically, there are only two types of gaming states, a short time state and a normal state, and the probability of winning a small hit when the second special symbol lottery is executed rather than the first special symbol lottery. By setting it high, the ball is easy to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 during the time-short state (it is easy to win a big hit). In addition, in the case where a big hit is made during the time reduction state, the setting ratio of the time reduction state after the end of the big hit is higher than in the normal state. In this specification, the third embodiment is configured to switch between the normal mode and the chance mode A when the short time state is not set (the normal state is set) after the big win won during the short time state. Yes. As a result, even if the advantageous short-time state ends, the chance mode A is set in the normal state that is set thereafter, so that the chance mode The game can be continued until the game ends.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in that a variable winning device 65b for small hits is provided in the game board 13 instead of the variable winning device 65. The second variable prize-winning device 650 is provided in the lower left of the front view with respect to the first entrance 64, and the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed. On the other hand, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. It is a point. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 81, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 81, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a small winning variable winning device 65b is disposed on the upper right in front of the second entrance 640. The variable winning device 65b is opened when a special symbol lottery is won. The structure of the small winning variable winning device 65b is the same as that of the variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment, and a normal discharge channel 65e1 and a special discharge channel 65e2 are provided therein. In the present embodiment, the big hit is started after the small hit is completed by passing the V winning switch 65e3 provided in the special discharge channel 65e2 during the small hit. In other words, in addition to the case where a big win is won by a special symbol lottery, a chance to win a big win is also given in the case of a small win, so that the player's interest can be improved in the case of a small win.

  In the game board 13, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed at the lower left in front view with respect to the first entrance 64. When the second variable winning device 650 is a big hit, the ball can be entered by opening the second specific winning port 650a which is normally closed, and each time one ball is entered. It is a winning entrance to pay out 15 prize balls. That is, in the third embodiment, the second specific winning port 650a is opened instead of the specific winning port 65a in the case of a big win. The second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened according to an opening / closing pattern determined according to the small hit type when the small hit is made. As a result, in the case of a big hit, the second specific winning opening 650a can be left-handed so that when the big hit is not given a short time state, It is possible to prevent the ball from entering 640 (the lottery of the second special symbol is suspended).

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 82A, the ROM 202 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment in that a small hit type selection table 202e is added. Although details will be described later, the contents of the first random number table 202a, the first hit type selection table 202b, and the variation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from the second embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 82B, details of the first random number table 202a in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the first per-random number table 202a in the present embodiment, only “0” is defined as a determination value (random number value) determined to be a special symbol big hit. Of the 300 counter values that can be taken by the first per-random number counter C1, the counter value (random number value) that is a big hit is one, so the probability of a big hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/300. As described above, in the third embodiment, only the short time state and the normal state are provided as the gaming state, and the jackpot is always drawn with a constant lottery probability (1/300).

  Also, in the first random number table 202a, “1 to 299” is defined as a determination value (random value) determined to be a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. For this reason, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a big hit (1/300) or a small win (299/300) is obtained. In the small hit, a ball enters the small winning prize winning port 65c, and when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 provided downstream of the special discharge channel 65e2, the big hit is started after the end of the small hit. In other words, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol is not drawn because the lottery result is directly won or it is a small bonus that is a chance to pass the V winning switch 65e3. It is advantageous to the player compared to

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, in this embodiment, when it becomes "small hit E" selected in 5% of small hits, the opening / closing pattern which a ball | bowl is easy to enter into the special discharge flow path 65e2 is provided. Is set.

  Next, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82 (c), in the first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types (big hits GI) that can be determined when a special symbol lottery is won. Based on having passed the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit, there are provided three types of big hit types (big hit J to L) that can be started after the small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (c), among the three types of jackpot types that can be determined when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a lottery, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “ “Big hit G” is associated with the range of “0 to 49”. This “big jackpot G” is a jackpot type (short-term jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the short-time state is given 100 times after the jackpot is over. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) corresponding to “big hit G” is 50. The rate at which “big hit G” is determined is 50% (50/100). When the time is short, the advantageous second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed. Therefore, the “big hit G” is advantageous to the player.

  Further, “big hit H” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”. The “big jackpot H” is a big jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the normal state is set after the jackpot is finished (no time-saving state is given). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit H”. The ratio at which “big hit H” is determined is 30% (30/100). Since a normal state that is more disadvantageous than the short-time state is set after the jackpot, the “jackpot H” is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the “jackpot G”.

  “Big jackpot I” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”. This “big jackpot I” is a big jackpot type (special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is four and the game state set after the jackpot is varied according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. More specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the “big hit I” is a normal state, the normal state is set even after the jackpot ends, and the gaming state at the time of winning the “big hit I” is a short-time state. For example, the time-saving state is set 100 times after the end of the jackpot. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit I”, so when a special symbol lottery is won The rate at which “big hit I” is determined is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when the “big hit I” is reached, the short-time state is not given, and the number of rounds is the smallest among the big hit types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if a “big hit I” is achieved during the short-running state, the number of rounds is small, but there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again during the short-running state. It is advantageous to the player compared to.

  On the other hand, among the three types of big hit types that can be determined when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49" "Is associated. This “big jackpot J” is a jackpot type (short time jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the short-time state is given 100 times after the jackpot is over. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since 50 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit J”, the V winning switch 65e3 is turned on while the ball is hitting a small amount. The rate at which “big hit J” is determined when it passes is 50% (50/100). This “jackpot J” is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and an advantageous time saving state is given.

  In addition, “big hit K” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79”. The “big hit K” is a big hit type (normal big hit) with 16 rounds and a normal state set after the big hit is over (no short-time state is given). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 30 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit K”. The rate at which “big hit K” is determined when passing is 30% (30/100). Although the number of rounds is large and is most advantageous for the award sphere, the normal state is set after the jackpot, so the state after the jackpot is disadvantageous.

  “Big hit L” is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”. This “big jackpot L” is a big jackpot type (special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is four and the gaming state set after the jackpot is varied according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. It should be noted that the correspondence relationship between the game state at the time of winning and the game state after the jackpot is the same as the above-mentioned “jackpot I”. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “big hit L”. The rate at which the “big hit L” is determined when passing is 20% (20/100). In the normal state, when the “big hit I” is reached, the short-time state is not given, and the number of rounds is the smallest among the big hit types, which is the most disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, if you get a “big hit I” during the short-running state, the number of rounds is small, but there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit again during the short-running state. Will be advantageous to the player.

  Note that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 basically only during the time-short state. That is, it is only the case where a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol that is executed based on the right-handed ball entering the second entrance 640. Therefore, when the big win is caused by the passing of the ball through the V winning switch 65e3, basically, the big win J, L, so that the short-time state is given after the big win. That is, if the V winning switch 65e3 is passed during the time-shortening state, the time-shortening state is entered again at a rate of 70%. Therefore, once it shifts to the short time state, the big hit and the short time state are easily repeated, which is extremely advantageous for the player.

  In the normal state, basically, the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 and does not win a big hit. However, it is possible to execute an irregular game method in which the second special symbol is drawn by intentionally right-handing in the normal state and the ball is expected to pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit. There is sex. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the “big hit L” is obtained in the normal state, the ratio in which the short time state is given when the big hit is achieved is 50% by adopting a configuration in which the short time state is not given. (In the normal state, it is the same as the case where a big win is won in the special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, even if a big hit is made by right-handed, the degree of expectation given to the short-time state is not different from that in the case of left-handed, so the merit of right-handing in the normal state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a right hand is made even in a normal state.

  In the present embodiment, only “big jackpot L” is configured as a special jackpot that changes whether or not a short-time state is given depending on the gaming state, but “big jackpot J” may also be a special jackpot. That is, when a big hit is made by passing the V winning switch 65e3 in the normal state, the normal state may be set after the big win. By comprising in this way, the inhibitory effect with respect to the irregular game method which always strikes right can be heightened more.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is a big hit, an advantageous time-short state is given only in the case of “big hit G”, and “big hit H” is given. Or, when it becomes “big hit I”, the normal state is set. Therefore, when the big hit is made in the normal state, the ratio of the short time state being given is 50%. In the short-time state, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed, and the second special symbol lottery has an open / close pattern that makes it easy to enter the special discharge flow path 65e2 with a probability of 1/20. The small hit type set (small hit E). Therefore, if the ball is launched by aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handing during the short-time state of 100 times, it is possible to form a very advantageous state where a big hit is made again with high probability.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery executed in the short-time state is a big hit, in addition to the “big hit G”, the short-time state is also given after the big hit is ended. In other words, when a special symbol lottery is won during the time-short state, the time-short state is given at a rate of 70%. That is, in the time-saving state, even if a special symbol lottery is won or a big win is achieved by passing through the V winning switch 65e3, the time-saving state is given at a rate of 70%. Therefore, once the short-time state is reached, the jackpot and the short-time state are repeated with a high probability (about 70%), which is extremely advantageous for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83A, details of the small hit type selection table 202e in the third embodiment will be described. In the small hit type selection table 202e in the third embodiment, the small hit type is associated with each value range of the small hit type counter C5 and is defined.

  More specifically, “small hit D” is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 94”. This “small hit D” is similar to the first round of “big hit C, D” in the first embodiment (see the middle row in FIG. 7), and the small winning prize winning opening 65c is short (0.2 seconds). Since an opening / closing pattern that is only opened is set, it is an unfavorable small hit type that makes it difficult to enter the small winning winning opening 65c (it is difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). Since the flow path solenoid 65k also performs the same operation as the first round of the big hit in the first embodiment or the like (see the upper part of FIG. 7), the ball hits the small hitting prize opening 65c during the 0.2 second open period. If it is possible to enter the ball, the ball can flow down to the special discharge channel 65e2. That is, when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e, the big hit is started after the small hit. Out of 100 random number values (counter values) that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 95 random number values (counter values) corresponding to “small hit D”. In this case, the ratio of “small hit D” is 95% (95/100).

  “Small E” is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “95 to 99”. This “small hit E” is similar to the first round of “big hit A” in the first embodiment (see the lower part of FIG. 7), and the opening period of the small hit prize winning opening 65c and the flow solenoid 65k is turned on. Since an opening / closing pattern that matches the period (the opening period of the special discharge flow path 65e2) is set, it is easy to enter the small hitting winning opening 65c (the ball is easy to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). It is a hit type. When the ball passes the V winning switch 65e during the small hit, the big win is started after the small hit. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the small hit type counter C5, the random number value (counter value) corresponding to “small hit E” is five. In this case, the ratio of “small hit E” is 5% (5/100).

  When the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is a small hit with a probability of 299/300. Then, 5% (1/20) of the small hit becomes “small hit E” where the ball easily passes the V winning switch 65e3. Therefore, if you make a right-hand hit during the 100 short-time states, you have a chance to win a special symbol lottery with a probability of 99% or more, or at least one “small hit E” within the short-time number (No. 1) 2) The probability of 100 consecutive “small hits D” by lottery of special symbols is 0.42%). Therefore, if the time is shortened, it will be a big hit with a probability of 99% or more. Once the time is short, the special symbol lottery will result in a “hit H” (distribution 30%) or when the V winning switch 65e3 is passed. The jackpot and the short-time state are repeated until the normal status is set after the jackpot. That is, it becomes a very advantageous state in which the jackpot and the short time state are repeated with a probability of about 70%.

  Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the third embodiment. This variation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines the variation pattern scenario for each previous jackpot type, similarly to the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the second embodiment.

  First, the variation pattern scenario set when the previous jackpot type is jackpot K (16 round normal jackpot) will be described. As described above, the jackpot K is one of the jackpot types that is started after the jackpot is ended based on the fact that the ball has passed the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot, and the normal state is set after the jackpot. . As described above, it is basically during the short time that the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3 and becomes a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot K is a jackpot that triggers the return to the disadvantageous normal state after the advantageous state in which the jackpot and the short-time state are likely to be repeated ends.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the jackpot type is jackpot K, among the variation pattern scenarios set at the end of the jackpot K, the number of lotteries for special symbols is in the range of 1 to 25 times. A normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated as the variation pattern table. Thereby, immediately after the big hit K is completed, a disadvantageous state (normal mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed is set.

  In addition, the chance A table 202d3 (see FIG. 16B) is associated as a variation pattern table with a range of 26 to 35 special symbol lottery times. For this reason, when the winning of the special symbol is over 25 times after the jackpot K ends, the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed over the 10 special symbol lotteries. (The variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol) (chance mode A is entered). For this reason, while the chance mode A is set, it is easier to win a small hit by playing the game with the right hand hitting the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the chance mode A, since the possibility that the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit is increased, an advantageous state in which a big hit is likely to occur is obtained. Note that, as described above, the small hit E where the opening / closing pattern in which the sphere easily flows down to the special discharge channel 65e2 is set is selected at a rate of 5% (1/20) when the small hit is reached. Therefore, in the chance mode A, if the right-handed operation is continued, the jackpot is made with a probability of about 1/20. The ratio of all 10 special symbol lotteries executed in chance mode A to small hit D (a small hit type that makes it difficult for the ball to flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2) is the small bonus in the special symbol lottery. To the 10th power (about 57.9%) obtained by multiplying the probability (1/300) by the probability (19/20) of the small hit D. Therefore, since the ratio (expectation) that is a big hit in one chance mode A is about 42.1%, when shifting to the chance mode A, the player is expected to have a big hit Can do. In addition, since the chance mode A is a kind of normal state as a gaming state, when the special big hit (big hit I, L) is reached, the normal state is set after the big hit. That is, the degree of expectation that is a big hit is high, but the degree of expectation that a time-short state is given when the big win is reached is 50%, which is the same as in the normal mode.

  The special table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated as the variation pattern table after the special symbol lottery number is 31 or more. For this reason, when the chance mode A ends, the normal mode is disadvantageous for the player until a big hit is made thereafter.

  In this way, when the jackpot K, which is the main trigger for the end of the short-time state, which is extremely advantageous for the player, is reached, the expectation of the jackpot is high because the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times after the jackpot K ends. The mode is shifted to the chance mode A. By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving state advantageous to the player ends and the normal state is entered, the chance mode A set after that becomes a big hit and the time-saving state is set again. The game can be continued at least until the chance mode A ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from quitting the game immediately after the advantageous time-short state is ended, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is other than jackpot K (jackpot G to J, L), and the short-time state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot (special jackpot in the case of a short-term jackpot, or during the short-time state) In the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 100 times (that is, the number of lotteries in which the normal symbol is in the short-time state), the range pattern / chance B table 202d2 (see FIG. 16 (a)) is associated. As a result, during the time saving state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal mode, and the lottery of the second special symbol is easily performed, which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, when the number of lotteries for the special symbol exceeds 100, the normal state is returned from the short-time state, so that the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. )) Is associated. Thereby, after shifting to the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is very difficult to be executed (the variation time becomes a very long fluctuation of 10 minutes), so that the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by left-handed. be able to.

  When the jackpot type is other than the jackpot K (jackpot G to J, L), and the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot (the short-time state is not given) (when the jackpot H becomes H, or In the case of a special jackpot during the normal state), the normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 15B) is associated as a variation pattern table regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. Therefore, after the big hit, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes difficult to be executed without depending on the number of lotteries of the special symbol, so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed by left-handed.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the player wins a big hit K in the short time state that is advantageous to the player, and the player shifts to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a special number of special symbols is drawn. Is executed, the mode is shifted to the chance mode A which is relatively advantageous to the player. In the chance mode A, the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, and it is easy to win a small hit and make the ball flow down to the special discharge flow path 65e2, so that the expectation of a big hit is increased. Therefore, even when the advantageous time-short state has ended, it is possible to make the player think that the game is to be continued until the chance mode A ends at the minimum. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's willingness to play when the most advantageous state has ended.

  In the third embodiment, when a special jackpot is made in the chance mode A, the game state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a normal state may be set when a special big hit is obtained in the normal mode, and a short time state may be set when the short time state and the special big hit are obtained in the chance mode A. By configuring in this way, when the chance mode A is a big hit, the expectation degree of the short time state can be made equal to the big hit in the short time state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further increased. be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the gaming state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e may be easily set when a small hit is made. More specifically, for example, when the small hit is made in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or the small hit type is not changed and the small hit E is changed. The opening / closing pattern of the small winning winning opening 65c may be the same as the small winning D in the normal mode (opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). By configuring in this way, it is difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 even if the right-handed operation is always performed during the normal mode, so that the merit of performing the right-handed operation during the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn during the normal mode.

  In the third embodiment, after the jackpot K is over, the special mode lottery number is in the range of 26 to 35 times, so that the chance mode A is set. However, the lottery number for shifting to the chance mode A and the chance The number of lotteries in which mode A continues may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set in the range of 91 to 100 special symbol lotteries. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it seem that the game is to be continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot K ends. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which becomes the chance mode A in the range of the number of lottery times of a special symbol 26 times-30 times. By reducing the number of times of entering the chance mode A, the chance mode A after the short-time state ends can be a big hit, and the ratio of pulling back the short-time state can be reduced, so that the gambling of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Conversely, the number of lottery times for the chance mode A may be increased. If the number of lottery times for chance mode A increases, the expectation that will be a big hit in chance mode A will increase, so that when the short-time state ends, the game can be continued more reliably until chance mode A ends. it can.

  In the third embodiment, the mode is shifted to the chance mode A only after the jackpot K is completed, but the mode may be shifted to the chance mode A even when another jackpot is reached. For example, when the jackpot is H, the mode may be shifted to the chance mode A. With this configuration, the chance mode is obtained when a special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) when the normal state is set and the normal state is set in the short-time state. Since the process shifts to A, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the reduction of the player's willingness to play when the time-saving state ends and shifts to the normal mode. In this case, when a big hit H is obtained in the normal state, a variation pattern scenario to which the chance mode A is given is not set, and the chance mode A is given only when the big hit H is given during the short-time state. It is good also as a structure which sets a fluctuation pattern scenario. Thereby, only the normal state after the completion of the time reduction state can be made advantageous without changing the advantageous degree of the normal state other than the normal state set after the completion of the time reduction state.

  In the third embodiment, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set regardless of the gaming state at the time when the jackpot K is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot K is set. The scenario set according to the gaming state and mode at the time of winning may be made different. More specifically, for example, in the normal mode, when the big hit K is won by right-handed, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to regardless of the number of times is set, and the big hit is made in the short-time state or the chance mode A If K is reached, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the merit in the case of right-handed in the normal mode, so it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method in which right-handed is always performed.

  In the present embodiment, only one number of lottery times to shift to the chance mode A after the big win is provided, but the number of lottery patterns to which the number of lottery times to shift to the chance mode A is different is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which provides a scenario. More specifically, a plurality of normal jackpots (jackpots K1, K2,...) Are provided as jackpot types that start when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, and chances are given for each jackpot type. It is good also as a structure which sets the fluctuation pattern scenario from which the number of lottery transfers to mode A differs. More specifically, for example, the jackpot K1 is 25 times, the jackpot K2 is 50 times, the jackpot K3 is 75 times, etc., and the number of lottery transitions to the chance mode A may be varied by 25 times. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify when to move to the chance mode A.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set after the jackpot is set, the chance mode A is set only once. However, the chance mode A is set multiple times. Also good. Specifically, for example, after the jackpot K ends, the chance mode A may be set in a range of 26 to 35 times, a range of 101 to 105 times, and a range of 1000 to 2000 times. Good. Thus, even after the first chance mode A is finished without winning the jackpot, it is possible to make it seem that the game is continued until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even if a big hook occurs, the game can be made to continue until the third chance mode A is entered. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 77) in that the probability variation counter 203g, the probability variation setting flag 203h, the probability variation passage counter 203i, and the probability variation valid flag. 203o and the probability variation valid timer 203p are deleted, and a jackpot start flag 203ad, a V pass counter 203ae, a V pass valid flag 203af, a V pass valid timer 203ag, and a winning status storage area 203ah are added.

  The jackpot start flag 203ad is a flag indicating whether the jackpot is started after the jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203ad is on, the jackpot start is set at the end of the jackpot (see S2512 in FIG. 87), and if the jackpot start flag 203ad is off, the jackpot is terminated as it is. The big hit start flag 203ad is set to ON when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit. Also, it is set to OFF at the end of the small hit (see S2510 in FIG. 87).

  The V passage counter 203ae, the V passage validity flag 203af, and the V passage validity timer 203ag correspond to the probability variation passage counter 203i, the probability variation validity flag 203o, and the probability variation validity timer 203p in the second embodiment, respectively. These contents are the same as the probability variation pass counter 203i, the probability variation valid flag 203o, and the probability variation valid timer 203p in the second embodiment, except that they are referred to or updated during the small hit. That is, the number of balls that have passed the V winning switch 65e3 during the small hit is counted by the V passing counter 203ae. The V pass valid flag 203af is used to determine whether or not the pass of the V winning switch 65e3 is valid. Furthermore, a period during which passage of the V winning switch 65e3 is effective after the passage solenoid 203k is set to OFF is set by the V passage effective timer 203ag.

  The winning state storage area 203ah is a storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a short time state. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the short-time state (if the value of the short-time / medium counter 203r is 1 or more), the winning state storage area 203ah includes “ 01H "is stored. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the hour / hour counter 203r is 0), “00H” is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah as information indicating the normal state. Is done. The information stored in the winning state storage area 203ah is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referred to when setting the gaming state after the special jackpot ends (see S2223 in FIG. 86). That is, at the end of the special jackpot, if “01H” indicating that the gaming state at the time of winning is in the time-saving state is stored in the storage area 203ah at the time of winning, the time-shortening state is set as the gaming state after the winning of the jackpot, If “00H” indicating that the game state at the time of winning is the normal state is stored in the storage area 203ah at the time of winning, the normal state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process 4 (S2021) executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  The jackpot control process 4 in the third embodiment is a process for opening or closing the second specific prize winning opening 650a for each jackpot round. Of the jackpot control process 4 (S2021), the processes of S2101, S2102, and S2104 to S2111 are respectively S2101, S2102, and S2104 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processing as that in steps S2111 is executed. On the other hand, in the jackpot control process 4 (S2021), the processes of S2103, S2112 and S2113 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 47) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) are deleted. These processes are processes for executing the operation of the flow solenoid 65k in the small winning variable winning device 65b, the monitoring of the V winning switch 65e3, and the like, and the second variable winning device 650 is activated during the big hit. This is because the process is unnecessary in the third embodiment.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 85) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2111 that the jackpot end timing is reached (S2111: Yes), the jackpot end process in the second embodiment is performed. Instead of 3 (see FIG. 80), jackpot end processing 4 is executed (S2131), and this processing ends. Details of the jackpot end process 4 (S2131) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 4 (S2131). This jackpot end process 4 (S2131) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, similarly to the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

  Of the jackpot end process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment, in the processes of S2204 and S2211 to S2213, S2204 and S2211 of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those in S2213 are executed.

  Further, when the jackpot end process 4 (see FIG. 86) in the third embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is a short-time jackpot (that is, jackpot G, J) (S2221). If the time is big hit (S2221: Yes), the process moves to S2204, and the value of the hour / medium counter 203r is set to 101, so that after the big hit, the time is shortened until the 101st special symbol lottery is executed. Settings are made so that a state is assigned (S2204). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2221 that the time-hit big hit is not (S2221: No), then it is determined whether the current big hit type is a special big hit (big hit I, L) (S2222). In the processing of S2222, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a special jackpot (S2222: Yes), information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is read from the winning status storage area 203ah (S2223), It is determined whether or not the game state at the time of winning is a short time state (S2224).

  In the processing of S2224, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is the short-time state (S2224: Yes), the processing proceeds to S2204 in order to set the gaming state after the big hit to the short-time state. On the other hand, in the processing of S2224, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning is not the time saving state (that is, the normal state) (S2224: No), the processing proceeds to S2225 without setting the time saving state. . Also, in the processing of S2222, even when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not a special jackpot (S2222: No), the current jackpot is a normal jackpot, and it is not necessary to set the value of the hour and middle counter. Goes to S2225.

  In the processing of S2225, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state according to the value of the hour / medium counter 203r is set (S2225), the jackpot flag 203v is set to OFF (S2226), The process proceeds to S2211. By executing the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 86), it is possible to accurately set the time reduction state according to the gaming state and the jackpot type at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the details of the small hit control process 4 (S2022) executed in place of the small hit control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. . FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this small hitting control process 4 (S2022).

  Of the small hitting control process 4 (see FIG. 87), in each process of S2501 to S2510, each of S2501 to S2510 of the small hitting control process (see FIG. 51) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

  Further, in the small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is the small hit end timing (S2509: Yes), the big hit start flag 203ad is turned on. If it is determined that it is on (S2511: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S2512). At this time, information corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning is stored in the winning state storage area 203ah from the value of the hour / short counter 203r. Next, the value of the hour / minute counter 203r is reset to 0 (S2513), and the process proceeds to S2510.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203ad is not on (i.e., off) in the processing of S2511 (S2511: No), the processing of S2512 and S2513 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S2510. .

  Further, in the small hit control process 4 (see FIG. 87) in the third embodiment, if it is determined that it is not the small hit end timing in the process of S2509 (S2509: No), a winning process (S2514) and an abnormal process are performed. (S2515) is executed. Each of these processes is the same process as the winning process (see FIG. 49) and the abnormal process (see FIG. 50) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment), and will be described in a simplified manner. When the process is executed (S2514), it is monitored whether or not it is an effective period and whether or not the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3, and it is determined that the ball has passed through the V winning switch 65e3 during the effective period. The jackpot start flag 203ad is set on. As a result, it is possible to set the big hit start only when it is ON with reference to the state of the big hit start flag 203ad at the end of the big hit.

  In the abnormal process (S2515), the number of balls that have entered the small winning prize opening 65c, and the number of balls that have been discharged to the outside through the normal discharge channel 65e1 and the special discharge channel 65e3, Are compared to determine whether all the balls that have entered the inside of the small winning variable winning device 65b are normally discharged, and an error is notified when the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged do not match. Is done. Thereby, when troubles, such as a ball clogging, generate | occur | produce in the inside of the variable prize apparatus 65b for small hits, the malfunction can be alert | reported to the store clerk etc. of a hall | hole early.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is based on the pachinko machine 10 provided with only two types of a normal state that is disadvantageous as a gaming state and an advantageous short time state. In the third embodiment, when it is determined that a big hit K is obtained in an advantageous time-short state and a transition to an unfavorable normal state is established, a special symbol lottery is executed the first number of times (25 times). The mode is shifted from the normal mode to the relatively advantageous chance mode A. This chance mode A continues for the second number (10 times) of the special symbol lottery, and if the big win is not performed during the second number of special symbol lotteries, It is configured to shift to the disadvantageous normal mode. Thereby, even if it transfers from an advantageous short time state to an unfavorable normal state, a game can be continued in anticipation of the chance mode A which transfers after that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being reduced at the time when the advantageous time saving state is ended, and to maintain the player's willingness to play until at least the chance mode A ends.

  In the third embodiment, when a special jackpot is made in the chance mode A, the game state after the special jackpot is set to the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a normal state may be set when a special big hit is obtained in the normal mode, and a short time state may be set when the short time state and the special big hit are obtained in the chance mode A. By configuring in this way, when the chance mode A is a big hit, the expectation degree of the short time state can be made equal to the big hit in the short time state, so that the player's expectation for the chance mode A is further increased. be able to. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved.

  In the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 65e3 at a rate of 5% regardless of the gaming state or mode. It is not limited to this. For example, in the normal mode, an opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e may be easily set when a small hit is made. More specifically, for example, when the small hit is made in the normal mode, only the small hit D may be determined, or the small hit type is not changed and the small hit E is changed. The opening / closing pattern of the small winning winning opening 65c may be the same as the small winning D in the normal mode (opening / closing pattern that is difficult to pass through the V winning switch 65e3). By configuring in this way, it is difficult to pass the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 even if the right-handed operation is always performed during the normal mode, so that the merit of performing the right-handed operation during the normal mode is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an irregular gaming method in which the player makes a right turn during the normal mode.

  In the third embodiment, after the jackpot K is over, the special mode lottery number is in the range of 26 to 35 times, so that the chance mode A is set. However, the lottery number for shifting to the chance mode A and the chance The number of lotteries in which mode A continues may be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, the chance mode A may be set in the range of 91 to 100 special symbol lotteries. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it seem that the game is to be continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot K ends. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which becomes the chance mode A in the range of the number of lottery times of a special symbol 26 times-30 times. By reducing the number of times of entering the chance mode A, the chance mode A after the short-time state ends can be a big hit, and the ratio of pulling back the short-time state can be reduced, so that the gambling of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Conversely, the number of lottery times for the chance mode A may be increased. If the number of lottery times for chance mode A increases, the expectation that will be a big hit in chance mode A will increase, so that when the short-time state ends, the game can be continued more reliably until chance mode A ends. it can.

  In the third embodiment, the mode is shifted to the chance mode A only after the jackpot K is completed, but the mode may be shifted to the chance mode A even when another jackpot is reached. For example, when the jackpot is H, the mode may be shifted to the chance mode A. With this configuration, the chance mode is obtained when a special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (for example, 25 times) when the normal state is set and the normal state is set in the short-time state. Since the process shifts to A, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the reduction of the player's willingness to play when the time-saving state ends and shifts to the normal mode. In this case, when a big hit H is obtained in the normal state, a variation pattern scenario to which the chance mode A is given is not set, and the chance mode A is given only when the big hit H is given during the short-time state. It is good also as a structure which sets a fluctuation pattern scenario. Thereby, only the normal state after the completion of the time reduction state can be made advantageous without changing the advantageous degree of the normal state other than the normal state set after the completion of the time reduction state.

  In the third embodiment, the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set regardless of the gaming state at the time when the jackpot K is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot K is set. The scenario set according to the gaming state and mode at the time of winning may be made different. More specifically, for example, in the normal mode, when the big hit K is won by right-handed, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal table 202d1 is referred to regardless of the number of times is set, and the big hit is made in the short-time state or the chance mode A If K is reached, a configuration may be adopted in which a variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the merit in the case of right-handed in the normal mode, so it is possible to suppress the irregular gaming method in which right-handed is always performed.

  In the present embodiment, only one number of lottery times to shift to the chance mode A after the big win is provided, but the number of lottery patterns to which the number of lottery times to shift to the chance mode A is different is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which provides a scenario. More specifically, a plurality of normal jackpots (jackpots K1, K2,...) Are provided as jackpot types that start when the ball passes through the V winning switch 65e3, and chances are given for each jackpot type. It is good also as a structure which sets the fluctuation pattern scenario from which the number of lottery transfers to mode A differs. More specifically, for example, the jackpot K1 is 25 times, the jackpot K2 is 50 times, the jackpot K3 is 75 times, etc., and the number of lottery transitions to the chance mode A may be varied by 25 times. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify when to move to the chance mode A.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern scenario in which the chance mode A is set after the jackpot is set, the chance mode A is set only once. However, the chance mode A is set multiple times. Also good. Specifically, for example, similarly to the second embodiment, a state in which a variation pattern is determined with reference to the normal table 202d1 (normal mode) and a variation pattern is determined with reference to the chance A table 202d3. It is good also as a structure which switches a state (chance mode A) periodically. More specifically, for example, as a variation pattern scenario set at the end of jackpot K, the normal table 202d1 is associated with a range of 1 to 25 special symbol lottery times (the value of the variation counter 203ab). In addition, the chance A table 202d3 is associated with the range of 26 to 35 times, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the range of 36 to 60 times, and thereafter, for 10 special symbol lotteries. The chance A table 202d3 and the normal table 202d1 for 25 special symbol lotteries may be repeated. Further, as another example of shifting to the multiple chance mode A, for example, in the range of 26 to 35 times, the range of 101 to 105 times, and the range of 1000 to 2000 times after the big hit K ends. The chance mode A may be set. Thus, even after the first chance mode A is finished without winning the jackpot, it is possible to make it seem that the game is continued until the second chance mode A is reached. In addition, even if a big hook occurs, the game can be made to continue until the third chance mode A is entered. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 102, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment described above, the first entrance 64 that allows a ball to easily enter by left-handed hitting and the second entrance 640 that allows a ball to easily enter by right-handed hitting are provided. The winner of the second special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the mouth 640 is the big winner in the first special symbol lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64 It is configured to be more advantageous to the player than to become (the probability variation state is easily given after the big hit). And in a normal state, the structure which switches the disadvantageous normal mode in which the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is not easily executed, and the advantageous chance mode A in which the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is easily executed according to the lottery number of the special symbol I was trying.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are easily executed by left-handed, and the second special symbol lottery is executed by right-handed. The board surface is configured so that it can be easily done. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 having a control specification that executes a lottery to determine whether or not the special symbol lottery condition is to be dropped from the probability variation state every time the special symbol lottery condition is satisfied is assumed. Based on these assumptions, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the degree of advantage (easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol) is determined according to the timing (number of lotteries) when falling from the probability variation state to the normal state. The structure is different. More specifically, it is specified by setting a scenario that refers to the variation pattern table in which the first special symbol lottery is difficult to be executed until the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times after the transition to the probability variation state. In the case of falling to the normal state before the number of special symbol lotteries is executed, an advantageous state is formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed even if the left-handed is returned. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide relief for a case where the player has fallen quickly from the probability change state to the normal state, so that the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in configuration in that a distribution unit 660 is provided in the game board 13 instead of the first entrance 64. The contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 are partly changed, the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partly changed, and the main controller 110 A part of the process executed by the MPU 201 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 88, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a front view of the board surface 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88, in the fourth embodiment, a sorting unit 660 is disposed at a position (below the variable display device unit 80) where the first entrance 640 is disposed in the second embodiment. Is different. Although details will be described later, the sorting unit 660 is configured such that a ball can enter through a passage opening provided in an upper portion thereof. Inside the sorting unit 660, a first entrance slot 64 where a lottery of the first special symbol is executed when a ball enters the ball, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed when the ball enters the ball. A central second entrance 640c is provided, and a ball that has entered the distribution unit 660 through the passage is distributed to any of these entrances. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed by launching a ball aiming at the sorting unit 660 by left strike.

  Here, the configuration of the sorting unit 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 660. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front surface side, and the cover body is made of a member that can be seen through the inside, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface that the inside cannot be seen through or difficult. It is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), an upper part of the sorting unit 660 is provided with a passing port through which a sphere can enter, and transmission that can detect that the sphere has passed through the passing port. A type of incoming ball sensor 660a is arranged. A distribution member 900 for distributing the spheres to the first entrance 64 or the central second entrance 640c is provided below the passage. A first entrance 64 is disposed in the lower left direction of the sorting member 900 when viewed from the front, and a central second entrance 640c is disposed in the lower left direction of the distribution member 900 when viewed from the front. The balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first entrance opening 64 and the central second entrance 640c.

  The sorting member 900 is configured to be able to receive a ball that has entered the sorting unit 660 by the accommodating portion 900a or 900c. When a ball is received in the housing portion 900a, the entire sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front depending on the weight of the ball. As a result, the accommodating portion 900a is inclined in a downward direction toward the lower left direction (see FIG. 89B), and as a result, the first input disposed in the lower left direction as viewed from the front with respect to the sorting member 900. A sphere falls toward the sphere port 64a (the sphere is guided to the first entrance port 64). Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and a magnet 900b is provided on a boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b. Yes.

  On the other hand, the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 660 has a back side (passage port) where the magnet 900b is arranged in a state where the sorting member 900 is not rotating clockwise or counterclockwise. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed at a position on the center line). The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side.

  The magnet 900b is also composed of a bar-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 is located at a position where the sorting member 900 is rotated and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b is located directly above (on the center line of a space where a game ball at the passage opening can be inserted by about one ball). And the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole), there is no stopping at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly upwards. It will be maintained in the position rotated to the left or right.

  As a result, when the magnet 900b is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upward position), the sorting member 900 is repelled by the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, so that the sorting member 900 is either left or right. It rotates and either the accommodating part 900a or the accommodating part 900b turns to the side (game machine upper side) which receives the ball | bowl which enters into the distribution unit 660. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b and causing the clogging of the ball.

  Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 are repelled, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the ball to the first entrance 64a. It is possible to prevent 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the sphere to the first entrance 64, the accommodating portion 900c is directed upward, and the accommodating portion 900c receives the sphere that has entered the sorting unit 660 next. When the accommodating portion 90c receives the sphere, the sorting member 900 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise by the weight of the received sphere, and the accommodating portion 900c is inclined in a direction inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, the sphere falls from the housing portion 900c and enters the central second entrance 640c (the sphere is guided to the central second entrance 640c). As described above, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the balls entering the sorting unit 660 to the first entrance 64 and the center second entrance 640c. The balls can be distributed evenly to the center second entrance 640c and awarded. Thereby, the lottery of the 1st special symbol and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol can be executed simultaneously.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 90A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90A, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the second embodiment in that a falling lottery table 202g is added. Further, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f are changed from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment.

  The falling lottery table 202g is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to fall from the probability variation state to the normal state (falling lottery) in the probability variation state of the special symbol. Counter value) is stored. In the special symbol probability changing state, each time the special symbol lottery is executed, the falling lottery table 202g is referred to and it is determined whether or not to fall into the normal state. Details of the falling lottery table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90B, details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the fourth embodiment will be described. As in the second embodiment, the first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which a jackpot type is defined in association with each possible value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the fourth embodiment, four jackpot types are provided. That is, “big hit M” and “big hit N” that can be determined when the first special symbol wins, and “big hit O” that can be determined when the big special lottery wins, “Big hit P” is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), if the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of “0 to 69”, the big hit type is “big hit” M "is determined. This “big hit M” has 16 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening / closing pattern (see the middle of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the largest in the jackpot, it is advantageous to the player in terms of the number of winning balls that can be acquired, but since the probability change state is unlikely to be set after the jackpot, it is disadvantageous as the gaming state after the jackpot Become.

  Further, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of “70 to 99”, “big hit N” is determined as the big hit type. This “big hit N” has 4 rounds, and as the open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which a difficult opening / closing pattern (see the middle of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the smallest and it is unlikely that the probability variation state is set after the jackpot, the “jackpot N” is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of “0 to 69” in the case of the big win in the second special symbol lottery, “Big hit O” is determined. This “big hit O” has 16 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which an easy opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. Since the number of rounds is the largest and the probability variation state is likely to be set after the big hit, the “big hit O” is the most advantageous jackpot type.

  Further, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of “70 to 99”, “big hit P” is determined as the big hit type. This “big hit P” has 4 rounds, and as an open / close pattern of the open / close plate 65f1 in the first round, the ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 65e2 (passes through the V winning switch 65e3). This is a jackpot type in which an easy opening / closing pattern (see the lower part of FIG. 7) is set. Although the number of rounds is the smallest, there is a high probability that a probabilistic state will be set after the jackpot, so “Big Jack P” is a game after jackpot than the jackpot (jackpot M, N) determined by the lottery of the first special symbol The situation is advantageous.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the big win is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the probability variation state is hardly given (it is difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 65e3), and only the big hit type is determined. It is configured. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, only the jackpot type that is likely to be given a probability change state (a ball easily passes through the V winning switch 65e3) is determined. Thereby, the advantage in the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed can be further increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when left-handed, the balls are configured to easily enter the sorting member 900. The distribution member 900 is configured to alternately distribute the first entrance 64 provided in the interior and the central second entrance 640c every time a ball enters. For this reason, even in a normal state unfavorable to the player, left-handed makes it possible to perform the disadvantageous first special symbol lottery and the advantageous second special symbol lottery almost in half. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in the normal state in the hope that the player will win a big win through an advantageous second special symbol drawing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90C, details of the second random number table 202c in the fourth embodiment will be described. In each of the above-described embodiments (first to third embodiments), the normal symbol hit state, the normal symbol hit probability, the normal symbol variation time, and the normal symbol hit are obtained in the normal state of the normal symbol and the short time state of the normal symbol. In this case, there is no great difference in the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is significantly reduced compared to the short time state (high probability state) of the normal symbol. ing.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), only “0” is defined as the value of the second random number counter C4 that is a normal symbol hit in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. ing. On the other hand, the same random number value (counter value) as that in each of the above embodiments is defined for the short time state (high probability state) of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is 1/240. Therefore, even if the right-hand strike is executed in the normal state, the normal symbol is rarely hit.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol is 30 seconds (3 seconds in the short time state), and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the normal symbol Is 0.2 times x 1 time (1 second x 2 times in the short-time state). Therefore, in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol, it takes time until the normal symbol lottery result is obtained after passing through the through gate 67, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol becomes extremely low, and the normal symbol Even when the symbol is hit, an opening period in which it is difficult to enter the ball during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set. Therefore, in the normal state, in the expectation that the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed and win a big game, it is possible to enhance the deterrent effect against the irregular gaming method in which the player always makes a right turn.

  Next, the configuration of the variation pattern table 202d in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 91A, the variation pattern table 202d of the fourth embodiment is provided with two types of variation pattern tables. Specifically, a normal table 202d1 and a probability change granting table 202d4 are provided.

  The normal table 202d1 is referred to when determining the variation pattern mainly in the normal state, as in the above embodiments. In the present embodiment, the normal table 202d1 is referred to when determining the variation pattern even in the time-short state or part of the probability variation state.

  The probability change granting table 202d4 has a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the jackpot is over when the game state after the big hit becomes a probable change state when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot. ) Is a table that is referred to throughout the lottery of special symbols. Although details will be described later, during the period when the probability change granting table 202d4 is referenced (within 20 or 50 times after the end of the jackpot), the lottery of the first special symbol becomes long fluctuation, so left-handed And, while the first special symbol is fluctuating long, the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed a plurality of times. That is, when left-handed, it can be biased to the advantageous second special symbol lottery. Note that, during the probability change state, only the second special symbol advantageous to the right hand can be drawn, so there is no merit of executing the left hand. For this reason, the benefit of the probability variation granting table 202d4 can be benefited from the probability variation state within a specific number of times, falling to the normal state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 even if it is hit to the right. This is the case.

  Next, the details of the normal table 202d1 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the present embodiment, the same variation pattern is used as long as the stop type and the variation type counter CS1 are the same in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Is selected. Note that the correspondence relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 (counter value) and the variation pattern is the same as the correspondence relationship (see FIG. 15B) for the first special symbol in the normal table 202d1 in each of the above embodiments. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the details of the probability variation granting table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the first special symbol lottery is associated with the long fluctuation (120 seconds) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the same correspondence as that defined in the normal table 202d1 is defined. For this reason, a probability variation state is given after the jackpot, and falls to the normal state within a period in which this probability variation granting table 202d4 is referenced (a period until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times or 50 times), and left When returning to the strike, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes longer. Therefore, by continuing to the left, the second special symbol can be drawn more than once while the first special symbol is fluctuating for a long time. It is possible to focus on the lottery. Therefore, in the case of falling from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage, it is possible to make a relatively advantageous state, so that the player's motivation for the game after falling to the normal state is reduced. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  Next, the variation pattern scenario table 202f in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This variation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table that defines a variation pattern scenario for each jackpot type, as in the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (b), the jackpot is M, O (16 rounds jackpot), and if the probability change state is given after the jackpot (if the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot), it fluctuates. As a pattern scenario, the probability variation granting table 202d4 is associated with a range of 1 to 20 special symbol lotteries. Further, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 21st and subsequent times. Therefore, if it becomes a big hit M, O, the ball can be passed through the V winning switch 65e3, and if it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within 20 times, the first special symbol will be given when left-handed Only the fluctuations in the above are long fluctuations (120 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which a plurality of lotteries of the second special symbol can be executed during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, so early (after the probability variation state is set) Even if the special symbol lottery falls to the normal state (within 20 times), it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation to be reduced. In addition, when it falls to a normal state after exceeding 20 times, since the normal table 202d1 is referred, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed almost in half.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the jackpot is N, P (4 rounds jackpot) and a probable change state is given after the jackpot (when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot) As a variation pattern scenario, the probability variation granting table 202d4 is associated with a range of 1 to 50 special symbol lotteries. Further, the normal table 202d1 is associated with the 51st and subsequent times. Therefore, if it is a big hit N, P, the ball can be passed to the V winning switch 65e3, and if it falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state within 50 times, the first special symbol will be given when left-handed Only the fluctuations in the above are long fluctuations (120 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to form a relatively advantageous state in which a plurality of lotteries of the second special symbol can be executed during the long fluctuation of the first special symbol, so early (after the probability variation state is set) Even if the special symbol lottery falls to the normal state (within 20 times), it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player's motivation to be reduced. In addition, in the case of a probable change after 4 rounds of jackpot, relief for disadvantageous jackpots on the award sphere is made by increasing the number of lotteries to which the probability change granting table 202d4 is referenced, compared to 16 rounds of jackpot. Can be achieved. In addition, when it falls to the normal state after exceeding 50 times, since the normal table 202d1 is referred, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed almost in half.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the probable change state is not given after the big hit (when the ball does not pass the V winning switch 65e3 during the big win), the number of special symbol lotteries as the variable pattern scenario Regardless of the normal table 202d1, the normal table 202d1 is associated. Therefore, the disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed in half continues until at least the next big hit.

  In this way, the variation pattern scenario of the fourth embodiment is when the probability change is given over the special symbol lottery of the specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) when the game state after the big hit becomes the probability variation state. The table 202d4 is referred to. When the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referenced, the long fluctuation (120 seconds) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, when falling from the probabilistic state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and returning from right-handed to left-handed, the second special symbol will be changed several times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. A lottery can be executed. That is, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more than the lottery of the first special symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the jackpot is finished. It is easy and advantageous. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probability change state to the normal state early (within a specific number of times) after the big hit, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

  Next, the details of the falling lottery table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the falling lottery table 202g stores random values (counter values) determined to fall in the falling lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 93A, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, two determination values “100, 101” corresponding to the fall to the normal state (special symbol low probability state) are provided. A random value (counter value) is defined. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the special symbol probability change state, the value of the falling lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random value (counter value) corresponding to the falling specified in the falling lottery table 202g. When the values match, it falls to the normal state. The falling lottery counter (not shown) is a loop counter that is updated periodically (for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed) in the range of “0 to 299”. Of the 300 random number values (counter values) that the falling lottery counter can take, two random numbers that are determined to fall are defined, so the probability that a single falling lottery will determine that a fall has occurred is 1/150. It is. Note that the random number values determined to be a big hit in the probability variation state (the value of the first random number counter C1) are four (1 to 4) (see FIG. 13B), and the jackpot is in the probability variation state. Since the probability is 1/75, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be higher than the probability of falling determined by the falling lottery during the probability variation state. Therefore, once the state is changed to the probable state, the player can be expected to win a large number of times before falling to the normal state, so that the player's interest in the game in the probable state can be improved. it can.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 93B, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the second embodiment (see FIG. 77) in that the probability variation counter 203g is deleted and The difference is that a stop flag 203ai, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj, and a probability change flag 203ak are added.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the second special symbol starts to be executed while the first special symbol is variably displayed. When the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. The temporary stop indicates a display mode in which the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the detachment is stopped as a temporary stop symbol, and the third symbol is vibrated and displayed without being stopped completely. . In this way, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is started, by turning on the special symbol 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai to temporarily stop the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the lottery result is confirmed and displayed with a jackpot (the jackpot by the first special symbol lottery starts during the jackpot by the second special symbol lottery). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to ON when it is determined in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit ( (See S1214 in FIG. 100). Further, after the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is turned on and the big special winning by lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) executed first is executed in S712. Set to off. When the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set from on to off, the temporary stop is released and the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time is resumed.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variably displayed. When the second fluctuation stop flag 203aj is turned on, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and when it is turned off, the temporary stop is released and the fluctuation display is resumed. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to ON when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 97) that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (see FIG. 97, refer to S714), and after the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is set to OFF in the processing of S1212 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see FIG. 100) executed first.

  In the fourth embodiment, the lottery result is held as it is without rewriting the lottery result of the other special symbol even when the special symbol of one special symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the jackpot. Then, when the variation time of the variation display corresponding to the jackpot has elapsed and the jackpot is started, the corresponding flag of the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai or special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is turned on. By doing so, the other variable display is temporarily stopped for the jackpot. Then, after the big hit, the temporary stop is canceled and the variable display is resumed. By configuring in this way, when a special symbol lottery is won, and when the other special symbol lottery is displayed while the change is being displayed, the other special symbol lottery is based on the special symbol lottery. It is possible to prevent the jackpot based on the special symbol lottery from being started, and to start the jackpot based on the lottery of both special symbols at different timings. Therefore, it can be advantageous for the player to the configuration of each of the embodiments described above, which may be overwritten even if it is a big hit.

  The probability variation flag 203ak is provided in place of the probability variation counter 203g in each of the above embodiments. In this embodiment, the probability variation state continues until a lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained by the fall lottery. That is, the number of special symbol lotteries until the probability variation state ends is indefinite. Therefore, it is configured to indicate whether or not the state is the probability variation state depending on whether or not the probability variation flag 203ak is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the correspondence relationship between the gaming state and the scenario in the fourth embodiment will be described with a specific example. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the game state after the end of the jackpot and the transition of the referenced variation pattern table when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot P (4 rounds jackpot).

  As shown in FIG. 94, when the ball passes the V winning switch 65e3 during the jackpot P, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability change state. In the probabilistic state, in addition to increasing the probability of winning a big symbol in the special symbol lottery, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened (30 seconds → 3 seconds), and the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased (1/240 → 1 / 1.2), when the normal symbol is hit, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a becomes longer (0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times). Therefore, by making a right-hand hit, it becomes easy to enter the second entrance 640, so that it is possible to efficiently execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 94, when the game state after the jackpot P is set to the probable change state (the probability change state is given), 1 to 50 special symbols lottery after the jackpot as the variation pattern scenario A variation pattern scenario (see FIG. 92B) in which the probability change granting table 202d4 is referred to is set.

  If the lottery result corresponding to the fall is reached when the special symbol lottery is executed 30 times, then the state shifts to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 94, even if the normal state is entered, the set variation pattern scenario is unchanged, so the probability variation grant table 202d4 is referred to until the special symbol lottery is completed 50 times. That is, when the first special symbol lottery is executed over the 20 special symbol lotteries after the fall, the long fluctuation (120 seconds) is selected. As described above, in the normal state, even if the right hand is made, the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed, and the left hand is more advantageous. Then, as described above, each time a ball enters the sorting unit 660 that can enter when left-handed, the first entrance 64 and the central entrance are arranged by the sorting member 900 provided therein. The two entrances 640c are alternately distributed (see FIGS. 89A and 89B). In this case, when the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to, while the long variation is set in the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol (second special symbol) is performed by the simultaneous variation method. Can be executed. That is, since it can be concentrated on the lottery of 2 special symbols, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation with respect to the probability variation state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 94, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the jackpot P is over 50, the normal table 202d1 is referred to according to the set variation pattern scenario. Switch. That is, when left-handed, a disadvantageous state in which an unfavorable first special symbol lottery and an advantageous second special symbol lottery are equally performed.

  In this way, if the player falls to the normal state (a state where left-handed is advantageous) after 30 hits after the jackpot where the probability variation state is given, even if left-handed, the special symbol lottery is selected. 2 Can be biased to lottery of special symbols. Therefore, in the case where the player has fallen to the normal state within 50 falling lotteries after the probability variation state is set, the game is performed in a relatively advantageous state until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state at an early stage, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the first special symbol variation start process 5 (S211) executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) will be described. The first special symbol variation start process 5 (S211) is performed on the lottery result of the first special symbol, similarly to the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for setting a corresponding variation pattern.

  Of the first special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S301 to S304 and S322, S301 to S304 of the first special symbol variation start process in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same processes as those in S322 are executed. In the first special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 95) in the fourth embodiment, after the process of S304 is completed, 1 is added to the value of the variation counter 203ab (S331), and the first special symbol variation is started. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 is performed to determine whether or not the lottery is a lottery (S332), and the process proceeds to S322.

  Next, the details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) described above will be described with reference to FIG. The first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S332) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S501 to S504 and S510 are respectively the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. ) S501 to S504 and S510, the same processing is executed.

  Further, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress in the process of S502 (the probability change flag 203ak is on) (S502: Yes), The value of the falling lottery counter is compared with the random value (counter value) corresponding to the falling specified in the falling lottery table 202g (S511), and whether the value of the falling lottery counter matches the random value corresponding to the falling ( Whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been determined) is determined (S512).

  If it is determined in the process of S512 that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been reached (S512: Yes), the game state is dropped to the normal state by setting the probability variation flag 203ak to OFF (S513), and the fall ( A state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the gaming state has been changed to the normal state is set (S514). Next, a lottery result as to whether or not a big hit is obtained by referring to the first random number table 202a for low probability (S504), and the process proceeds to S516. On the other hand, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not obtained in the process of S512 (S512: No), the process proceeds to S503, and the big hit is made by referring to the first random number table 202a for high probability. Whether or not the lottery result is acquired (S503), and the process proceeds to S516.

  In the process of S516, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S515). If it is determined that the lottery is a jackpot (S515: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot ( S516), a jackpot symbol is set as a symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S517), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S515, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (S515: No), the process proceeds to S510.

  In this manner, by executing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 96), it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is determined by taking into account the result of the falling lottery.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the details of the first special symbol variation stop process 5 (S212) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation stopping process 5 (S212). The first special symbol variation stop process 5 (S212) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for stopping and displaying the changing symbol when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

  Of the first special symbol variation stopping process 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment, the processes in S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710 are respectively in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those of S701 to S703, S706, S709, and S710 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 33) are executed.

  When the first special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special diagram variation stop flag 203ai is on (S711), and is on. Is determined (S711: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) of this time is the first special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 97) executed first after the big hit. It means that the change display of the first special symbol was temporarily stopped during the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to OFF (S712), and the special figure 1 for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to OFF. A change stop command is set (S713), and this process is terminated. By executing the processing of S712 and S713, the first symbol and the third symbol that have been temporarily stopped in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can be variably displayed again. . In addition, this fluctuation display is displayed by the amount of the remaining fluctuation time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the jackpot from the set fluctuation time.

  In the process of S711, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is off (S711: No), each process of S701 to S703 is executed. In the process of S703, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit (S703: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to ON (S714), and the special figure 2 fluctuation is also performed. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203aj is set to ON is set (S715). Thus, while the jackpot won in the first special symbol lottery is being executed, the first symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the variation time of the second special symbol from ending during the jackpot, the symbol indicating the lottery of the second special symbol is stopped during the jackpot, and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot. Can be prevented.

  After the processing of S715, the start of jackpot is set (S706), the values of the probability variation flag 203ak and the hour / minute counter 203r are reset (S716), and the process proceeds to S709.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the details of the second special symbol variation start process 5 (S213) in the fourth embodiment will be described. The second special symbol variation start process 5 (S213) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). Similar to the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) in the embodiment (and the first embodiment), this is a process for setting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

  Of the second special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S901 to S904 and S922, S901 to S904 of the second special symbol variation start process in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same process as each process of S924 is executed. In the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98) in the fourth embodiment, 1 is added to the value of the variation counter 203ab after the processing of S904 is completed (S931). A second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 is performed to determine whether or not a lottery will be won (S932), and the process proceeds to S924.

  Next, the details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) described above will be described with reference to FIG. The second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (S932) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 36) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

  Of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to SS1010, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 36), the same processes as those of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1010 are executed.

  Further, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability change is being made in the process of S1002 (the probability change flag 203ak is on) (S1002: Yes), The value of the falling lottery counter is compared with the random value (counter value) corresponding to the falling specified in the falling lottery table 202g (S1011), and whether the value of the falling lottery counter matches the random number corresponding to the falling ( Whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall has come) is determined (S1012).

  In the process of S1012, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has come (S1012: Yes), the gaming state is dropped to the normal state by setting the probability variation flag 203ak to off (S1013), and the fall ( A state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the gaming state has been changed to the normal state) is set (S1014). Next, a lottery result as to whether or not a big hit is obtained by referring to the first random number table 202a for low probability (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1006. On the other hand, if the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not obtained in the process of S1012 (S1012: No), the process proceeds to S1003, and the big hit is made with reference to the first random number table 202a for high probability. Whether or not the lottery result is acquired (S1003), and the process proceeds to S1006.

  As described above, by executing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see FIG. 99), it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is determined by taking into account the result of the falling lottery.

  Next, the details of the second special symbol variation stopping process 5 (S214) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation stopping process 5 (S214). This second special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (S214) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for stopping and displaying the changing symbol when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed.

  Of the second special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment, the processes in S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209 are respectively in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as the processes of S1201 to S1203, S1206, S1208, and S1209 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) are executed.

  When the second special symbol variation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) in the fourth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203aj is on (S1211), and is on. Is determined (S1211: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) of this time is the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 5 (see FIG. 100) executed first after the big hit. It means that the change display of the second special symbol was temporarily stopped during the big hit. Therefore, in this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to OFF (S1212), and the special figure 2 for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is set to OFF. A change stop command is set (S1213), and this process is terminated. By executing the processing of S1212 and S1213, the first symbol and the third symbol that have been temporarily stopped in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can be variably displayed again. . In addition, this fluctuation display is displayed by the amount of the remaining fluctuation time obtained by subtracting the time elapsed before the start of the jackpot from the set fluctuation time.

  In the process of S1211, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203aj is off (S1211: No), each process of S1201 to S1203 is executed. In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit (S1203: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ai is set to on (S1214), and the special figure 1 fluctuation is also performed. A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the stop flag 203ai is set to ON is set (S1215). Thus, while the jackpot won in the second special symbol lottery is being executed, the first symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and The third symbol can be temporarily stopped. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the variation time of the first special symbol from ending during the jackpot, the symbol indicating the lottery of the first special symbol is stopped during the jackpot and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot. Can be prevented.

  After the process of S1215, the start of the jackpot is set (S1206), the values of the probability variation flag 203ak and the hour / minute counter 203r are reset (S1216), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  Next, details of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S121) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The normal symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct and setting a normal symbol variation display when it passes.

  Of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S1401 to S1416 and S1418 to S1423, the normal symbol variation process (and the first embodiment) respectively ( The same processes as S1401 to S1416 and S1418 to S1423 of FIG. 40) are executed. Further, in the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 101) in the fourth embodiment, in the processes of S1414 and S1415, the current time is not in a time-saving state (S1414: No), or the time-shortening state is in progress and the jackpot is being hit. (S1414: Yes, and S1415: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 second x 1 time, and the process is performed. The process shifts to S1432.

  In the process of S1432, it is determined whether or not the time-shortening state is in effect (whether the value of the time-shortening counter 203r is 1 or more or whether or not the probability variation flag 203ak is on) (S1432). If it is determined that there is one (S1432: Yes), the process of S1419 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1432 that the time reduction state is not in effect (S1432: No), the normal symbol variation time is set to 30 seconds (S1433), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, in the normal state of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is greatly reduced, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is greatly increased. In this case, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is extremely short. As a result, even in the normal state, even if an irregular game method in which the player makes a right-hand hit at any time in order to execute the advantageous second special symbol lottery, the ball enters the second entrance 640. Is extremely difficult, and it is possible to increase the possibility of losing. Therefore, the deterrent effect with respect to the irregular game method which always makes a right strike can be heightened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the details of the jackpot end process 5 (S2141) executed instead of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment will be described. This jackpot end process 5 (S2141) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, similarly to the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment.

  Of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 102), the processes of S2201, S2204, and S2206 are respectively the processes of S2201, S2204, and S2206 of the jackpot end process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the second embodiment. The same process is executed.

  In the jackpot end process 5 (S2141) in the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2201: Yes), the probability variation flag 203ak is set to on. (S2231) Then, based on the respective values of the probability change flag 2003ak and the hour and middle counter 203r, a state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the gaming state after the jackpot is set (S2232), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S2206.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the game state after the big hit becomes a probable change state, a certain change is given over a special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times). The time table 202d4 is referred to. When the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referenced, the long fluctuation (120 seconds) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed. Therefore, when falling from the probabilistic state to the normal state within a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) and returning from right-handed to left-handed, the second special symbol will be changed several times during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. A lottery can be executed. That is, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more than the lottery of the first special symbol until the special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the jackpot is finished. It is easy and advantageous. Therefore, even if the player falls from the probability change state to the normal state early (within a specific number of times) after the big hit, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

  In the fourth embodiment, a variation pattern scenario in which a special symbol lottery count and a referenced variation pattern table are associated is set at the end of the jackpot, and is related to the timing of falling from the probability variation state to the normal state. However, the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to only by a specific number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability change granting table 202d4 may be referred to over a special symbol lottery a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) triggered by the fall from the probability change state to the normal state. In this case, a special symbol lottery is performed a specific number of times after the fall (for example, 10 times) only when the number of lotteries for the special symbol executed before the fall from the probability variation state to the normal state is within 20 times, for example. It is good also as a structure which refers to the table 202d4 for probability change provision over the whole. By configuring in this way, when the probability variation state ends with a small number of lotteries (for example, within 20), it is possible to give an advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed. Therefore, even if the probability change state ends, the player's motivation can be maintained. Whether it falls in the first fall lottery or in the 20th fall lottery, it can be given the same number of advantageous states, so if it falls within a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) In addition, the subsequent advantage can be made equal.

  In the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation granting table 202d4 only for a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probability variation state is imparted. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the same way as in the first embodiment, when a small hit is made in the normal state, a special change is given over a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) of lottery of special symbols after the small hit ends. The variation pattern table may be determined with reference to the table 202d4. Thereby, since the advantageous state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed can be formed while continuing the left handing, it is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the right handing and the left handing during the normal state. In addition, for example, as in the second embodiment, the disadvantageous state of determining the variation pattern table with reference to the normal table 202d1 according to the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the normal state, and the probability change granting time It may be configured to repeatedly switch between advantageous states for determining the variation pattern with reference to the table 202d4. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the normal state from becoming monotonous.

  In the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation granting table 202d4 only for a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times) after the probability variation state is imparted. However, it is not limited to this. For example, this control may be applied to the normal state. Specifically, when a time-short state is set after a big win, a special symbol of a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) is executed after, for example, 50 special symbols are drawn after the time-short state ends. The variation pattern scenario table 202f may be configured such that the probability variation granting table 202d4 is referred to over the lottery. As a result, even if the short-time state ends without winning the jackpot, it is possible to continue the game at least until the state in which the lottery of the second special symbol set thereafter is likely to be executed ends. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, for example, as in the first embodiment, a small winning pattern can be selected in the first special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery is performed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) after the small winning is achieved. You may comprise so that the table 202d4 for probability change provision may be referred. Thereby, in the normal state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is easy to be executed, it is possible to shift to the advantageous state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed without changing the gaming state in response to the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game in the normal state from becoming monotonous.

  In the fourth embodiment, by referring to the probability variation granting table 202d4, the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, and left-handed and continuous When a ball enters the sorting unit 660, the frequency at which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is reduced. The configuration for reducing the frequency at which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed Is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the sorting unit 900 of the sorting unit 660 can be controlled by a motor or the like, and the direction can be electrically switched by the motor in accordance with the number of balls that have entered the sorting unit 660. In a normal state, each time one sphere enters, the motor is controlled so that the sphere is guided in a direction different from the direction in which the sphere is guided. On the other hand, the frequency at which the balls are distributed (guided) to the central second entrance 640c as the arrangement of the distribution unit 900 within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times) after being set to the probability variation state. Becomes higher than the frequency at which the ball is distributed to the first entrance 64 (for example, each time the ball is set to be guided to the central second entrance 640c for five consecutive times, the ball is placed in the first entrance 64. The motor may be controlled so as to be set once in the arrangement to be guided to. By comprising in this way, the same effect as the said 4th Embodiment can be show | played.

  In the present embodiment, a distribution unit 660 that alternately distributes the balls to the first entrance 64 and the central second entrance 640c is provided. However, the game board 13 ( (See FIG. 2). That is, a game in which the first entrance 64 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when left-handed, and the second entrance 640 is provided at a position where a ball can easily enter when right-handed. It may be applied to the board 13. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the normal table 202d1 is selected, only the very long fluctuation (600 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the probability change is given. Then, the probability change granting table 202d4 may be referred to within a specific number of times (for example, 20 times or 50 times), during the short-time state, and during the probability variation state. By comprising in this way, when it falls within the specific number of times from the probability variation state, the lottery frequency of the first special symbol is reduced, and the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed more. Relief can be made against a player who has fallen.

  In the first, second, and fourth embodiments, and the modified example of the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a normal discharge flow path 65e1 and a special discharge flow path 65e2, which are special during a big hit. The game state after the big hit is set to the probable change state by passing the ball through the V winning switch 65e3 provided on the downstream side of the discharge flow path 65e2, but it is not limited to this. For example, according to the jackpot type, it may be a specification that determines in advance whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probable change state. By comprising in this way, since the structure of the variable prize-winning apparatus 65 can be simplified, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, when a right-hand hit is made and a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is easy to win a jackpot type in which an advantageous gaming state is easily set. However, the method that is more advantageous is not limited to this. For example, when a big hit is made by lottery of the second special symbol executed by making a right strike, it may be configured to easily win a big hit type having a large number of rounds.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the probability variation counter 203g and the hourly / short-time counter 203r are updated at a stage before the determination as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, it may be configured such that various counters are updated after determining whether or not it is a big hit first. As a result, it is not necessary to set a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of lotteries for the special symbol for the counter value, so that it is possible to perform parameter setting that is easier to understand.

  In each of the above embodiments, the first special symbol variation display executed based on the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol variation display performed based on the second special symbol lottery are simultaneously performed. The simultaneous variation method that can be executed in parallel has been adopted, but is not limited thereto. For example, you may employ | adopt as the system which performs only 1 fluctuation display at a time. In this case, it is good also as a system which performs a variable display one by one in the order which detected the start winning prize, and when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is put on hold, the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is given priority It is good also as a system which performs. By comprising in this way, control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

  In the first embodiment, the chance mode A is always set (when the chance A table 202d3 is referred to) when a special symbol is won in the lottery, and in the second and third embodiments, the chance mode A is set. The chance mode A is always set when the number of lotteries determined in the variation pattern scenario is reached. In the fourth embodiment, a certain number of times (20 (Or 50 times) lottery, the probability change granting table 202d4 is referred to, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which whether or not to refer to the chance A table 202d3 and the probability variation granting table 202d4 is determined by lottery. More specifically, for example, when a small hit is made in the first embodiment, or when the number of lotteries predetermined in the variation pattern scenario is reached in the second and third embodiments (transition to chance mode A) If the conditions are met), a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to chance mode A (for example, a lottery to shift to chance mode A with a probability of 2/3) is performed, and only when winning in that lottery, A configuration for shifting to the chance mode A may be adopted. Also, in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the probability variation state is to be given after the big hit, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to refer to the probability variation granting table 202d4, and only when winning in the lottery, After the jackpot, the probability variation granting table 202d4 may be referred to over a special symbol lottery for a specific number of times (20 times or 50 times). With such a configuration, when the condition for shifting to the chance mode A is established, the lottery result can be confirmed in an interesting manner, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Moreover, when performing lottery, it is good also as a structure which varies a lottery probability according to a time slot | zone, for example. Specifically, an RTC (Real-Time Clock) for measuring the time is electrically connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110, and the main control device 110 is accessed by accessing the connected RTC. The current time can be grasped by the MPU 201. And, for example, in the morning time zone (for example, AM 10: 00 to AM 12:00) or the evening time zone (for example, PM 5: 00 to PM 7:00), lottery than other time zones The probability may be set high (2/3 → 9/10). By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the operation especially in the time zone where the lottery probability is high. For example, the number of players who go to the hall can be increased. Therefore, the operating rate of the hall can be improved.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Depending on one lottery result, the degree of advantage of the other variation pattern is varied)
The first discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the establishment of the first condition, the second discrimination means for executing the second discrimination based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first discrimination means by the first discrimination means. Based on the determination, or on the fact that the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination by the second determination means, the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the establishment of the specific condition Identification in a gaming machine comprising a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including one gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state Display means capable of displaying information, first dynamic display executing means for causing the display means to dynamically display first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means, and the display means The judgment of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means and the second dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the result, One dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least a dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period in which the first dynamic display period has a different degree of advantage for the player The ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means based on the first game state being set by the period selection means and the game state setting means A first setting unit that sets a first selection state lower than a selection ratio and a determination of the first determination by the first determination unit when the first selection state is set by the first setting unit. The result is the specific format Based on the special determination result different from the result, the second selection state in which the ratio of the period setting means to select the second dynamic display period is higher than the first selection state can be set. A gaming machine A1 comprising two setting means.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, one of a normal state in which the winning state is drawn with a normal probability and a probability fluctuation state in which the winning state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state, triggered by the end of the winning state (For example, JP 2006-000392 A).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the normal state is set at the end of the hit state, the disadvantageous state in which the win state is drawn with a lottery probability lower than the probability variation state is at least the next hit state Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the normal state.

  Further, some of the above-described conventional gaming machines have a plurality of start ports and can perform symbol change display simultaneously for each start port. Furthermore, by changing the degree of advantage in the case of winning for each start opening where a start winning has occurred, it is expected that the player will win first with a variable display corresponding to the advantageous start opening. Some are trying to improve their interest. In this conventional type gaming machine, for example, when a win is made, the start prize for the start opening with a low advantage is less than the fluctuation display fluctuation time based on the start win for the start opening with a high degree of advantage. There is a configuration in which the variation time of the variation display based on the configuration is long, and a variation display with a high degree of advantage can be executed more times during the long variation time.

  However, in such a conventional game machine, since the variation time is changed with a win as a trigger, it becomes a disadvantageous state that many variable displays with a low degree of advantage are executed unless it is a win. Therefore, there was a problem that the game until winning was monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, the first identification information indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discrimination unit is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display execution unit on the display unit configured to display the identification information. The second identification information that is displayed and indicates the discrimination result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display execution means. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, the first dynamic display period and the first dynamic display period are advantageous to the player. One dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least different second dynamic display periods. Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the first selection state in which the ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means is lower than the ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period Is set by the first setting means. When the first selection state is set by the first setting means, the period setting is based on the fact that the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. The second selection state is set by the second setting unit so that the ratio of the means to select the second dynamic display period is higher than the first selection state.

  Thus, at least in the first selection state, even if the specific determination result is not obtained by the first determination, the special determination result is obtained, so that the degree of advantage when the second determination is executed can be varied. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress at least the game in the first gaming state from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1, there is provided selection means for selecting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means from a plurality of periods. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the ratio of selecting each of the plurality of periods is the same between the selected state and the second selected state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is selected from the plurality of periods by the selection means. In the first selection state and the second selection state, each of the plurality of periods is selected by the selection means at the same rate.

  Accordingly, when the special lottery result is obtained by the first determination, the advantage degree when the second determination is executed is changed without changing the advantage degree when the first determination is executed. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the first gaming state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. In the state, the game can be performed in the hope that the first determination results in a special determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the first gaming state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

  As a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided. The type selection means includes a type selection means for selecting one of the types of the privilege game from a plurality of types including the classification selection means and the specific determination result in the second determination as compared to the first determination. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that a ratio of selecting the second privilege game becomes higher when the second dynamic display period becomes shorter, and the second dynamic display period is shorter than the first dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. One type is selected by means. Compared to the first determination, when the second determination results in a specific determination, the type selection means selects the second privilege game at a higher rate. The second dynamic display period is configured with a period shorter than the first dynamic display period.

  Accordingly, when the second selection state is set by obtaining a special determination result by the first determination, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second determination is shortened. It is possible to shorten the execution interval of the determination. Therefore, since it becomes easy to perform the 2nd discrimination | determination which is easy to select an advantageous 2nd privilege game when it becomes a specific discrimination | determination result, it expects that it will be in a 2nd selection state with respect to a player. A game in the gaming state can be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second setting means includes a timekeeping means for keeping timekeeping information, wherein the timekeeping information timed by the timekeeping means is within a predetermined range, and the determination result of the first determination is the special result The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the second selection state is set based on the determination result.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, time information is timed by the time measuring means. The second selection state is set by the second setting means based on the fact that the timing information counted by the timing means is within a predetermined range and the discrimination result of the first discrimination is a special discrimination result.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that the advantageous degree of a 1st game state can be varied according to the time information which time-measurement means time-measures.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation, a first route through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass, and the first route A second path different from the first path and the first path and the first path means for entering the game ball and the second path means for entering the game path and the second path for entering the game ball, The first condition is established based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second condition is that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means. A gaming machine A6 that is established based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the player's operation, a game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means, and a first route through which the game ball launched by the launching device can pass, and a second route different from the first route, Is provided in the game area. The first condition is established based on the game ball entering the first entry means, and the second condition is established based on the game ball entering the second entry means.

  Thereby, in a state where the dynamic display period having a high degree of advantage is easily selected by the period selection unit, the game ball is launched to the second path, and conversely, the dynamic display period having a high degree of advantage is selected by the period selection unit. In a difficult state, the game ball can be launched to the first path. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the direction in which the game balls are fired, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a normal dynamic display period and the normal dynamic display period Selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of periods including at least a special dynamic display period different from the first dynamic display period. The normal dynamic display period is a case where the first determination results in the specific determination result, or a difference determination result different from the specific determination result and the special determination result. The special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means when the first determination results in the specific determination result or the special determination result. Gaming machine A7, characterized in that it is made possible.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are produced. That is, as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means, a normal dynamic display period and a special dynamic display period different from the normal dynamic display period One dynamic display period is selected from the plurality of periods including at least by the selection means. The second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. The normal dynamic display period is configured to be selectable by the selection means when the first determination results in a specific determination result, or when the specific determination result is different from the special determination result. . On the other hand, the special dynamic display period can be selected by the selection means when a specific determination result or a special determination result is obtained by the first determination.

  Thereby, when the special dynamic display period is selected, the special game is executed, or the advantageous second dynamic display period is easily selected by the period selection means, so the special dynamic display period is selected. There is an effect that the player can be pleased when the player recognizes that.

  As a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means in the gaming machine A7, a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. As the type of the second selection state set by the type selecting means for selecting the type of the one of the award games and the second setting means, the second over the second determination of the first number of times. It is possible to select at least a small selection state in which a selection state is set and a multi-selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the second number of times greater than the first number of times. Based on selection of the dynamic display period by the state type selection means and the selection means, an effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect within the dynamic display period, and the special executed by the effect execution means. Dynamic display As the predetermined effect corresponding to the normal effect, there is provided an effect selection means capable of selecting at least a normal effect and a special effect different from the normal effect. The special effect is determined by the first determination. And when the first privilege game is determined by the type selection means and when the special determination result is obtained by the first determination and the multi-selection state is selected by the state type selection means. The gaming machine A8 is selected only in any of the cases.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of privilege game is selected by the type selection means. As a type of the second selection state set by the second setting means, a small selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the first number of times and a second number greater than the first number of times. The multiple selection state in which the second selection state is set over the second determination of the number of times is configured to be selectable by at least the state type selection means. Based on the fact that the dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means, a predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means within the dynamic display period, and corresponds to the special dynamic display period executed by the effect execution means. As the predetermined effect, a normal effect and a special effect different from the normal effect can be selected at least by the effect selecting means. The second privilege game is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. When the first determination results in a specific determination and the first selection game is determined by the type selection means, and when the first determination results in a special determination result and the state type selection means selects a multi-selection state Only in any case, the special effect is selected by the effect selecting means.

  Thereby, in the dynamic display of the first identification information in which the special dynamic display period is set, the first privilege game is executed when the player recognizes that the special effect has been executed, or multiple selection is performed. There is an effect that the player can recognize that the state is set.

  In the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is greater than the number of times of the first determination executed when a game is performed using a game ball that can be acquired by the player in the first privilege game. A gaming machine A9 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A8, the second number of times is executed when a game is played using a game ball that can be acquired by the player in the first privilege game. Since the number of determinations is greater than the number of times of determination, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a novel game that makes it expected that the first identification information indicating a specific determination result is not displayed when a special effect is executed.

<Characteristic B group> (Chance zone after falling by 1 type and 2 types)
Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on establishment of the discriminating condition, display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result of discrimination by the discriminating means, and dynamic display for executing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means A period determining means for determining one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the execution means and the dynamic display executing means; In a gaming machine equipped with a gaming machine, a first entry position where a gaming ball can enter, a first position where the gaming ball can enter the first entry position, and a gaming ball that enters the first entry position. Variable means capable of changing to a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball, and variable control means for changing the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the determination means. The entrance means Based on the fact that the entered game ball has entered a specific area provided inside the entry means, the award game execution means for executing an award game advantageous to the player and the award game execution means As a gaming state after the executed award game is finished, one gaming state is selected from a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A game state setting means to be set and a counting means for counting the number of times of discrimination executed by the discrimination means after the first game state is set by the game state setting means, and the number of times counted by the counting means are predetermined. As the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, the proportion of the advantageous period that is advantageous to the player is higher than the other dynamic display periods. Gaming machine B1, characterized in that it comprises a favorable state setting means for setting a benefit status,.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a start winning is a win, a win state that is advantageous to the player is given (for example, JP-A-2006-000392). Publication). Among such conventional gaming machines, one that can set either a normal state in which a start winning is less likely to occur or a short-time state in which a start winning is more likely to occur than the normal state, as a winning game state There is. In addition, there are those having a entrance that increases the entrance rate of game balls during the short-time state. A specific area is provided inside the entrance to trigger a winning state when a game ball can enter. In other words, during the short-time state, a win state is given when a lottery based on a start prize is won and when a ball enters a specific area, which is advantageous compared to the normal state. It becomes.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is common that only the above-described two kinds of gaming states (normal state, short-time state) are provided (so-called probabilistic state is not provided), and advantageous short-time state When is finished, the most disadvantageous normal state is set. That is, when the most advantageous state ends, there is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game is greatly reduced.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, it is variable between an open position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball cannot enter the ball entry means more easily than the first position. The means is configured to be variable. The variable means is varied by the variable control means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result obtained by the determination means. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the entrance means has entered a specific area provided inside the entrance means. As a gaming state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is ended, 1 is selected from a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state is set by the game state setting means. The number of times of determination performed by the determining means after the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means is counted by the counting means, and the number of times counted by the counting means is a predetermined specific number of times. Based on this, as the dynamic display period determined by the period determining unit, the advantageous state setting unit sets an advantageous state in which the determination ratio of the advantageous period advantageous to the player is higher than other dynamic display periods.

  Thereby, after the bonus game is finished, when the first gaming state having a lower advantage than the second gaming state is set, the specific number of times is determined with the aim of shifting to the advantageous state. Until at least the game can be continued. Therefore, when the first game state is set, there is an effect that motivation for the player's game can be improved.

  Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set in the gaming machine B1, the advantageous state setting means and the advantageous state setting means for setting a disadvantageous state in which the determination rate of the advantageous period is lower than the advantageous state. Based on the determination of the first number of times by the determination means after the advantageous state is set, the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means for setting the disadvantageous state and the second disadvantageous state setting means. A gaming machine B2 comprising: a second advantageous state setting means for setting the advantageous state based on a determination that the determination means executes the second number of times after the setting.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the setting of the first gaming state, the first disadvantageous state setting means sets a disadvantageous state in which the advantageous period determination rate is lower than the advantageous state. A disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means based on the determination by the first number of determination means being performed after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means. An advantageous state is set by the second advantageous state setting means based on the second number of times of determination performed by the determination means after the disadvantaged state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means.

  Thereby, even if the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means ends, the game can be continued aiming at the advantageous state set by the second advantageous state setting means thereafter. Therefore, there is an effect that motivation for the player's superiority can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B2, the second disadvantageous state setting unit executes the determination by the determining unit for the first number of times after the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting unit or the second advantageous state setting unit. Based on this, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the disadvantageous state is set.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the determination by the determining means for the first number of times has been performed after the advantageous state has been set by the advantageous state setting means or the second advantageous state setting means. Since the disadvantageous state is set by the second disadvantageous state setting means, the gaming state over the first number of times and the disadvantageous state over the second number of times can be alternately repeated. . Therefore, even if one advantageous state is completed, the player can be made to think that the game is continued until the next advantageous state, so that the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advantageous period is shorter than a disadvantageous period in which the ratio determined by the period determining unit is high when the number of times counted by the counting unit is less than a predetermined number of times. A gaming machine B4 characterized by a length period.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the number of times counted by the counting means is less than a predetermined number of times, the proportion determined by the period determining means is higher than the disadvantage period However, since the advantageous period is configured with a short length, it is possible to execute discrimination by the discriminating means at short intervals in the advantageous period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the game efficiency when the advantageous state is set.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the privilege game execution means can execute the privilege game based on a special determination result different from the specific determination result determined by the determination means. A gaming machine B5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the bonus game executing means performs the special game based on the fact that the discrimination means has determined a special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. Since this is executed, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a special determination result will be obtained.

  In the gaming machine B5, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first path through which a game ball launched by the launching means can pass, a second path different from the first path, and A first entry means provided in the first path and capable of entering a game ball; and a second entry means provided in the second path and capable of entering a game ball. First discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first entrance means and second discrimination based on the game ball entering the second entrance means And a second discriminating means for executing the game machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching unit based on the player's operation. A first path through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass and a second path different from the first path are provided. The first route is provided with first entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and the second route is provided with second entry means for allowing a game ball to enter. Based on the fact that the first determination means executes the first determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball enters the second ball input means in the determination means. Then, the second determination unit executes the second determination.

  This allows the player to select whether to launch a game ball on the first route or to fire a game ball on the second route, so that it is possible to provide gameability that matches the taste of each player. it can.

  In the gaming machine B6, the period determining means has a higher ratio of determining the advantageous period as the dynamic display period when the determination by the second determining means is executed in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state is set. When the determination by the second determination unit is performed in a state where the determination is not performed, the rate of determining the disadvantageous dynamic display period is higher than when the determination by the first determination unit is performed. Yes The gaming machine B7, wherein the first discrimination has a lower probability of being the specific discrimination result than the second discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the advantageous state, when the determination by the second determining means is executed, the ratio of determining the advantageous period by the period determining means increases. On the other hand, when the advantageous state is not set, when the determination by the second determination unit is executed, the disadvantageous dynamic display period is more disadvantageous than when the determination by the first determination unit is executed. The ratio determined by becomes higher. The first determination is configured with a lower probability of a specific determination result than the second determination.

  Thereby, in an advantageous state, a game ball can be aimed at a 2nd path | route, and in a state other than an advantageous state, a game ball can be aimed at a 1st path | route. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of changing the firing direction of the game ball according to the state.

  In the gaming machine B7, the probability that the first determination results in the special determination result is the same as the probability that the second determination results in the special determination result.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B7, the probability of the special discrimination result by the first discrimination is configured to be the same as the probability of the special discrimination result by the second discrimination. Therefore, when a game ball is launched aiming at the first route, there is an effect that the game can be performed in anticipation of a special discrimination result.

<Characteristic C group> (Simultaneous variation, variable time can be changed according to the reservation of the other special figure under specific conditions)
A first entrance means capable of entering a game ball, a second entrance means different from the first entrance means, and a first entrance means based on a game ball entering the first entrance means. The ball information is acquired, and the ball acquisition information acquiring means for acquiring the second ball input information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball input means, and the ball acquisition information acquiring means acquired before First discrimination means for executing the first discrimination based on the first entrance information and second discrimination based on the second entrance information acquired before the entrance information acquisition means Display means capable of displaying two identification means, first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination, and second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination, and the first identification by the display means First dynamic display execution means for performing dynamic display of information and dynamic display of the second identification information by the display means While the second dynamic display executing means and the second dynamic display executing means are executing dynamic display of the second identification information, a new game ball has entered the second entering means. Second entry information storage means capable of storing at least the second entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means based on the above until the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed. And storage of the second entry information stored in the second entry information storage means as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means A gaming machine C1 comprising: period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods based at least on the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a lottery result executed based on a winning (start winning) at a start opening provided in the game board is a win, a win state advantageous to the player is given. There are some (for example, JP, 2006-000392, A). Some of these conventional gaming machines are provided with a plurality of start ports, and the start ports where balls can easily enter vary depending on the gaming state. In addition, for a gaming machine having a plurality of start ports, if an irregular game is aimed at a start port where it is difficult for a ball to enter, for example, a penalty such as an extremely long change time will be imposed. There is something that can be done.

  However, the conventional gaming machine that is applied has a problem that the effect of suppressing the irregular gaming method is insufficient.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the first entry information is acquired by the entry information acquisition unit based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry unit, while the second entry unit receives the first entry information. Second entry information is acquired based on the entry of a game ball. First discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the first entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the second discrimination means is executed based on the second entrance information. A second determination is performed. First identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination are displayed on the display means. In the display means, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed by the first dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed by the second dynamic display execution means. While the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed by the second dynamic low display executing means, it is acquired by the incoming information acquisition means based on the fact that a game ball has newly entered the second incoming means. The second entry information is stored at least until the second entry by the second entry means is executed by the second entry information storage means. The dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is based at least on the number of stored second entry information stored in the second entry information storage means. The period selection means selects one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods.

  As a result, the frequency of the first discrimination by the first discriminating means varies depending on the number of stored second entry information, so only the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information are possible. In addition, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of stored second entry information. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed, the first dynamic display execution means performs the first identification information while executing the dynamic display of the second identification information. A game machine C2 that is capable of executing dynamic display.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, when the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed, the first dynamic is displayed while the dynamic display of the second identification information is being executed. Since the dynamic display of the first identification information is executable by the display execution means, the first determination by the first determination means and the second determination by the second determination means can be executed more efficiently. effective.

  In the gaming machine C 1 or C 2, the period selection means stores the second entry information storage means in the second entry information storage means, compared to the case where at least one second entry information is stored in the second entry information storage means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that when the second entry information is not stored, the ratio of selecting an advantageous dynamic display period advantageous to the player is high.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second entry information storage is more effective than the case where at least one second entry information is stored in the second entry information storage means. When the second entry information is not stored in the means, the ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player by the period selection means increases, so the second entry information storage means stores the second entry information in the second entry information storage means. There is an effect that the game can be performed so as not to memorize the entry information.

  A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that a specific determination result predetermined in the first determination or the second determination is obtained in the gaming machine C3, and the privilege game As a type of the award game executed by the execution means, one of the award games out of a plurality of types including a first award game and a second award game that is more advantageous to the player than the first award game. Selecting means capable of selecting a type, wherein the selecting means has a specific determination result in the second determination rather than a specific determination result in the first determination. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the ratio of selecting the second privilege game is high.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. That is, on the basis of the fact that a specific determination result determined in advance in the first determination or the second determination is reached, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of the plurality of types including a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is selected by the selection means. The type of privilege game is selected. The ratio at which the second privilege game is selected by the selection means when the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination is higher than that in the case where the specific determination result is obtained in the first determination.

  Thereby, since it can be made to play a game expecting that it will become a specific discrimination | determination result in a 2nd discrimination | determination means, the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  As a gaming state after the bonus game is ended in the gaming machine C4, a first gaming state in which the first determination is more easily performed than in the second determination, and the second determination in comparison with the first gaming state. A game state setting unit capable of setting at least a second game state in which the second game state is likely to be executed, and the period setting unit stores the second ball entry information in the second ball entry information storage unit in the first game state. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when it is not stored, the set ratio of the advantageous dynamic display period is high.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the gaming state after the end of the privilege game, the first gaming state in which the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination, and the second determination in which the second determination is easier to execute than the first gaming state. The gaming state can be set at least by the gaming state setting means. In the first gaming state, when the second entry information is not stored in the second entry information storage means, the ratio of setting the advantageous dynamic display period by the period setting means increases.

  As a result, an irregular gaming method is executed in an attempt to execute the second determination in the first gaming state in which the first determination is easily performed, and the second entry information is stored in the second entry information storage means. Then, since the advantageous dynamic display period is difficult to set, there is an effect that the irregular gaming method can be suppressed.

  One dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of predetermined periods as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means in the gaming machine C5. Proportion of selecting an unfavorable dynamic display period that is disadvantageous to a player when the first gaming state is set rather than the second gaming state, the second period selecting unit comprising a second period selecting unit A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the game machine becomes higher.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are produced. That is, as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, one dynamic display period is selected from a plurality of periods predetermined by the second period selection means. Selected. When the first game state is set, the proportion of the disadvantageous display period that is disadvantageous to the player by the second period selection means is higher than that in the second game state.

  Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method that attempts to execute the second determination in the first gaming state.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, there are provided a launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area based on a player's operation and the first entrance means, and a first path through which the game ball can pass and the first A gaming machine C7, wherein two gaming units are provided, and the second path is different from the first path.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball is launched into the game area by the launching unit based on the operation of the player. A first entry means is provided, and a first path through which a game ball can pass and a second entry means are provided, and a second path different from the first path is provided in the game area.

  Thereby, since a launch direction can be varied according to the type of the ball entry means that the player wants to enter, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic D group> (Make it difficult for one of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 to be executed)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball; a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means; and a game ball entered into the first ball entry means. A first determination by the first determination means and the first determination means by the first determination means and the second determination means to execute the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means, Alternatively, based on the result of the second determination by the second determination means being a specific determination result, the privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege executed by the privilege game executing means As a gaming state after the game has ended, a first gaming state in which the probability of the specific determination result is set to a first probability, and a second gaming state set to a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming state can be set from among a plurality of gaming states including at least When the second gaming state is set by the skill state setting means and the gaming state setting means, the third determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition and the predetermined determination by the third determination means Based on the result, the first game state change means for changing the game state from the second game state to the first game state and the game state change means in a state where the first condition is satisfied. Frequency suppression means for suppressing the frequency at which the first determination is executed by the first determination means when compared with the frequency at which the second determination is executed by the second determination means when the game state is changed. And a gaming machine D1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is advantageous to the player when a lottery is executed based on the starting ball. Among such conventional gaming machines, there is a game in which a probability variation state in which a winning lottery probability is higher than usual is set after winning. Further, a gaming machine is known that executes a lottery (falling lottery) on whether or not to shift from a certain change state to a normal state together with a lottery on whether or not to win. In such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to predict how long the probability variation state will continue, so that the game can be performed in the hope that the probability variation state will continue for a longer time.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that if the probability variation state ends early (with a small number of lotteries), the player's motivation for the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine D1, the first discrimination is performed by the first discrimination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. Based on the ball, the second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means. Based on the first determination by the first determination unit or the second determination by the second determination unit, a specific determination result is obtained, and a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution unit. As a gaming state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game executing means is finished, a first gaming state in which the probability of a specific discrimination result is set to the first probability, and a second probability higher than the first probability One gaming state is configured to be settable by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least the second gaming state set to. When the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the determination is executed by the third determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the predetermined determination result is obtained by the third determination means. Accordingly, the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state by the gaming state changing means. The frequency at which the first determination is executed by the first determination unit when the game condition change unit is changed to the first game state while the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the frequency suppression unit by the second determination. The frequency of the second determination is suppressed by the means.

  This makes it possible to vary the frequency at which the first determination is executed depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied when the game state is changed to the first gaming state. There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the first discrimination means executes a first discrimination when a predetermined first discrimination condition is satisfied after the game ball enters the first ball entry means. The second discriminating means executes the first discrimination when a predetermined second discriminating condition is satisfied after the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the frequency suppressing means The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the predetermined first determination condition is controlled to be less likely to be established than the predetermined second determination condition.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, after the game ball enters the first ball entry means, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied. After the game ball has entered the second entry means, the second discrimination means executes the second discrimination when a predetermined second discrimination condition is satisfied. The predetermined first determination condition is controlled by the frequency suppression unit so that it is less likely to be established than the predetermined second determination condition.

  Thus, since the frequency with which the first determination is executed can be varied by varying the ease with which the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming state setting means, when the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, the game after the executed privilege game is ended. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a ratio of setting the second gaming state as a state is high.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the second discrimination rather than the first discrimination, the executed bonus game is ended. Since the ratio at which the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state is configured to be high, the player can be suppressed by suppressing the frequency at which the first determination is executed by the frequency suppressing means. It is advantageous for. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's motivation for the game when the game is changed to the first game state in a state where the specific condition is satisfied.

  Display means capable of displaying identification information in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, and dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination on the display means, and the second discrimination A game machine D4, comprising: dynamic display execution means capable of respectively executing dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the determination result of

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information can be displayed on the display means. The dynamic display execution means performs dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination and dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination, respectively, on the display means. Executed.

  Thereby, even if the dynamic display of one identification information is being executed, the dynamic display of the other identification information can be executed, so that the dynamic display of the identification information can be performed more efficiently. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine D4, the frequency suppression means extends a start interval from the start of dynamic display of the first identification information to the start of dynamic display of the first identification information. A gaming machine D5, which is controlled by

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are produced. That is, it is controlled by the frequency suppressing means so that the start interval from the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information to the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information is increased.

  Thereby, since the frequency with which the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed can be reduced, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  A period in which a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means in the gaming machine D4 or D5 is set from a plurality of predetermined periods. The plurality of predetermined periods provided with setting means includes at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period, and the frequency The suppressing means is configured such that a ratio at which the second dynamic display period is set by the period setting means as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information is higher than the first dynamic display period, and As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information, a state in which the ratio of the first dynamic display period selected by the period setting means is higher than the second dynamic display period is set. To be Game machine D6 to butterflies.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means is set from a plurality of periods predetermined by the period setting means. The plurality of predetermined periods include at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period. The rate at which the second dynamic display period is set by the period selection means as the dynamic display period of the first identification information is higher than the first dynamic display period, and the dynamic display in the dynamic display of the second identification information As the period, a state in which the ratio at which the first dynamic display period is selected by the period selection unit is higher than that of the second dynamic display period is set by the frequency suppression unit.

  As a result, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information is likely to be shorter than the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information. There is an effect that the frequency of execution can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation, a first route through which the game ball launched by the launching unit can pass, and the first route A second path different from the first path and a game ball that has passed through the second path are provided at positions where the ball can enter, and the second determination unit executes the second determination based on the game ball entering. A third ball entry means, and the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at positions where a game ball that has passed through the first path can enter the ball. The first gaming state is such that a gaming ball that has passed through the second route is less likely to enter the third entering means as compared to the second gaming state, and the gaming state setting means includes the first gaming state The second determination results in the specific determination result rather than the determination of Gaming machine D7, characterized in that if the are those proportions which sets the second game condition as a game state after the award game executed is completed is high.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the player's operation, a game ball is launched into the game area by the launching means, and a first route through which the game ball launched by the launching device can pass, and a second route different from the first route, Is provided. At a position where a game ball that has passed through the second path can enter, there is provided a third entrance means for executing the second discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the entrance of the game ball. . The first ball entry means and the second ball entry means are arranged at positions where game balls that have passed through the first path can enter. The first game state is configured so that it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the second route to enter the third ball entry means as compared to the second game state. When the specific determination result is obtained by the second determination rather than the first determination, the ratio at which the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the executed privilege game is completed is It is configured to be high.

  As a result, when the second gaming state is set, it is easier to execute a second determination that is advantageous by launching the game ball to the second route, so that the gaming state after the bonus game ends There is an effect that a game can be performed in the hope that the second game state is set.

  In one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a passing means through which a game ball can pass, a first guiding state for guiding the game ball that has passed through the passing means to the first entering means, and a second entering means are guided. Based on the guiding means that can be changed to the second guiding state, and the gaming ball is guided to the first entering means by the guiding means, the guiding means is changed to the second guiding state, and the gaming ball is A gaming machine D8 comprising: variable means for changing the guiding means to the first guiding state based on being guided by the second ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the following effects are produced. That is, passage means through which game balls can pass is provided. The guiding means is configured to be variable between a first guiding state for guiding the game ball that has passed through the passing means to the first entering means and a second guiding state for guiding to the second entering means. The guide means is changed to the second guide state by the variable means based on the fact that the game ball is guided to the first entrance means by the guide means. On the other hand, the guidance means is changed to the first guidance state by the variable means based on the game ball being guided to the second entry means.

  As a result, each time the game ball passes through the passing means, the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means can alternately enter the game balls, so the first determination is executed by the frequency suppressing means. When the frequency to be performed is not suppressed, there is an effect that the frequency at which the first determination is executed and the frequency at which the second determination is executed can be easily equalized.

  A counting means for counting the sum of the number of times the first discrimination is executed and the number of times the second discrimination is executed in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, and the specific condition is the second game A gaming machine D9, which is established when the count value counted by the counting means after the state is set is in a range equal to or less than a specific count value.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the following effects are produced. That is, the sum of the number of times the first determination is performed and the number of times the second determination is performed is counted by the counting means. The specific condition is established when the count value counted by the counting means after the second gaming state is set is in a range equal to or less than the specific count value.

  As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to the number of times of the first discrimination and the second discrimination executed until the game state is changed to the first gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be made.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C7, and D1 to D9, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Among such gaming machines, one of a normal state in which the winning state is drawn with a normal probability and a probability fluctuation state in which the winning state is drawn with a higher probability than the normal state, triggered by the end of the winning state (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-000392).
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the normal state is set at the end of the hit state, the disadvantageous state in which the win state is drawn with a lottery probability lower than the probability variation state is at least the next hit state Therefore, there is a problem that it is not possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the normal state.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 performs a first determination unit that executes a first determination based on the establishment of the first condition, and a second determination based on the establishment of the second condition. Based on the second determination means to be executed, the first determination by the first determination means, or the second determination by the second determination means, a specific determination result is obtained, which is advantageous to the player Among a plurality of game states including a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, a first game state based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state A game state setting means for setting one game state, a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a first result indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means on the display means. First dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying one identification information; The second dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination by the second determining means on the display means, and the second dynamic display executing means. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information, at least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period having a different degree of advantage for the player than the first dynamic display period A period selecting means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods, and the period selecting means by the period selecting means based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. A first setting means for setting a first selection state in which a ratio for selecting a second dynamic display period is lower than a ratio for selecting the first dynamic display period; and the first selection state is determined by the first setting means. If set The ratio by which the period setting unit selects the second dynamic display period based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit being a special determination result different from the specific determination result Comprises a second setting means capable of setting a second selection state that is higher than the first selection state.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution unit is a plurality of periods. The selection means has the same ratio of selecting each of the plurality of periods in the first selection state and the second selection state.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.
The gaming machine of technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the first bonus game and the first bonus game are executed as the bonus game type executed by the bonus game executing means. Type selection means for selecting one of the types of the privilege game from a plurality of types including at least a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the privilege game, and the type selection means includes the first determination , The ratio of selecting the second privilege game is higher when the second determination results in the specific determination result, and the second dynamic display period is the first dynamic display period. It is shorter than the target display period.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, further comprising timing means for timing time information, wherein the second setting means counts time information measured by the timing means. Is a predetermined range, and when the determination result of the first determination is the special determination result, the ratio of setting the second selection state is higher than outside the predetermined range.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit is displayed on the display unit configured to display the identification information. And the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display execution means. As a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, the first dynamic display period and the first dynamic display period are advantageous to the player. One dynamic display period is selected by the period selection means from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least different second dynamic display periods. Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the first selection state in which the ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means is lower than the ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period Is set by the first setting means. When the first selection state is set by the first setting means, the period setting is based on the fact that the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is a special determination result different from the specific determination result. The second selection state is set by the second setting unit so that the ratio of the means to select the second dynamic display period is higher than the first selection state.
Thereby, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display execution means is selected from the plurality of periods by the selection means. In the first selection state and the second selection state, each of the plurality of periods is selected by the selection means at the same rate.
Accordingly, when the special lottery result is obtained by the first determination, the advantage degree when the second determination is executed is changed without changing the advantage degree when the first determination is executed. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the first gaming state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is obtained. That is, the second dynamic display period is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period.
As a result, in the first gaming state, the game can be performed in the hope that a special determination result will be obtained by the first determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the first gaming state can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, a type is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. One type is selected by means. Compared to the first determination, when the second determination results in a specific determination, the type selection means selects the second privilege game at a higher rate. The second dynamic display period is configured with a period shorter than the first dynamic display period.
Accordingly, when the second selection state is set by obtaining a special determination result by the first determination, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the second determination is shortened. It is possible to shorten the execution interval of the determination. Therefore, since it becomes easy to perform the 2nd discrimination | determination which is easy to select an advantageous 2nd privilege game when it becomes a specific discrimination | determination result, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, time information is timed by the time measuring means. The ratio at which the second selection state is set by the second setting means when the timekeeping information timed by the timekeeping means is within a predetermined range and the determination result of the first determination is a special determination result rather than out of the predetermined range Is configured to be high.
Thereby, there exists an effect that the advantageous degree of a 1st game state can be varied according to the time information which time-measurement means time-measures.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First entrance (first entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
112 Firing control device (firing means)
640 Second entrance (second entry means)
S503, S504 First determination means S608 Selection means S609 Second dynamic display execution means S706, S1206 Special game execution means, type selection means S803, S805, S806 Second setting means S1003, S1004 Second determination means S1108 Period selection means S1109 Second dynamic display execution means

Claims (5)

First determination means for performing first determination based on establishment of the first condition;
Second determination means for performing a second determination based on the establishment of the second condition;
Execution of a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result in the first determination by the first determination unit or the second determination by the second determination unit Means,
A gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state based on establishment of the specific condition In a gaming machine equipped with
Display means capable of displaying identification information;
First dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a determination result of the first determination by the first determination means on the display means;
Second dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a determination result of the second determination by the second determination means on the display means;
As the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display execution means, the first dynamic display period and the first dynamic display period are advantageous to the player. Period selection means for selecting one dynamic display period from a plurality of predetermined periods including at least a second dynamic display period having a different degree;
Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the ratio of selecting the second dynamic display period by the period selection means is higher than the ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period. First setting means for setting a low first selection state;
The determination result of the first determination by the first determination means is a special determination result different from the specific determination result when the first selection state is set by the first setting means. And a second setting unit capable of setting a second selection state in which a ratio of the period setting unit to select the second dynamic display period is higher than that of the first selection state. Machine. Selecting means for selecting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information executed by the first dynamic display executing means from a plurality of periods;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the selection means has the same ratio of selecting each of the plurality of periods in the first selection state and the second selection state.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the second dynamic display period is more advantageous to the player than the first dynamic display period. As a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. Type selection means for selecting the type of the bonus game,
The type selection means has a higher ratio of selecting the second award game when the specific determination result is obtained in the second determination as compared to the first determination.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the second dynamic display period is shorter than the first dynamic display period. It has timekeeping means to keep time information,
The second setting means is configured such that when the timekeeping information timed by the timekeeping means is within a predetermined range and the determination result of the first determination is the special determination result, the timekeeping information is out of the predetermined range. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein a ratio of setting the second selection state is higher than a case.

Images